R

DISCOVERY SPORT
OWNER'S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. LRL 10 01 63 152

L
Introduction

ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK

Please take the time to study all of the owner/operator literature supplied with your vehicle as soon
as possible.

IMPORTANT
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment,
some of which may not be fitted to your vehicle. Due to printing cycles, this handbook may include
descriptions of options before they become generally available.
The vehicle options, hardware and software, are designed for the market in which the vehicle is
intended for original sale. If the vehicle is to be registered or used in another geographical area, it
may need modifications to suit local requirements. Jaguar Land Rover Limited is not responsible
for the cost of any modifications. Warranty conditions may be affected.
The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Subsequent vehicle
design changes may result in a supplement being added to the literature pack. Updates can also be
viewed on the Land Rover internet site at: www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,
may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.

SYMBOLS USED IN THIS HANDBOOK

Safety warnings indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, or
information that should be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibility
of personal injury.
Cautions indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, or information that
should be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibility of damage to your
vehicle.
This recycling symbol identifies those items that must be disposed of safely in order to
prevent unnecessary damage to the environment.

This symbol identifies those items that must be disposed of correctly, as they contain
harmful substances. Seek advice on disposal from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer
and/or your local authority.

This symbol identifies those features that can be adjusted, disabled or enabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

© Jaguar Land Rover Limited 2014.

All rights reserved.

2
 R
Introduction

INSTRUCTIONAL VIDEOS
Throughout this handbook are a selection of QR codes which, when scanned using a smartphone
app, will connect the smartphone to relevant instructional videos.
Note: These videos are best viewed using a high-speed internet or 4G connection.

3
L

4
 R
Contents

Introduction......................................2 Adaptive cruise control.................134

Entering the vehicle..........................6 Driving programs..........................141
Exiting the vehicle...........................14 Hill descent control (HDC)............144
Front seats......................................19 Wade sensing...............................146
Rear seats.......................................23 Driving aids...................................147
Head restraints...............................29 Media............................................150
Steering wheel................................31 Voice control.................................160
Seat belts........................................32 Bluetooth®...................................161
Child safety.....................................36 Telephone.....................................163
Airbags...........................................42 InControl.......................................165
Instrument panel.............................48 Navigation system........................169
Warning lamps...............................53 Fuel and refuelling........................179
Exterior lights.................................58 Maintenance.................................185
Interior lights..................................62 Vehicle cleaning............................197
Wipers and washers.......................64 Fluid level checks..........................201
Mirrors............................................68 Vehicle battery..............................206
Blind spot monitoring.....................70 Fuses............................................210
Garage door opener........................74 Tyres.............................................220
Windows.........................................77 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Touch screen..................................79 (TPMS).........................................227
Heating and ventilation...................82 Tyre repair kit................................229
Storage compartments...................89 Wheel changing............................233
Load carrying..................................92 Vehicle recovery...........................240
Towing............................................95 After a collision.............................244
Starting the engine........................108 Vehicle labels................................246
Intelligent stop/start......................110 Technical specifications................247
Gearbox........................................112 Type approval...............................258
Stability control.............................115 Index.............................................271
Traction control............................116 Controls overview.........................290
Suspension...................................117
Brakes...........................................118
Parking aids..................................122
Park assist....................................126
Cameras........................................130
Automatic speed limiter (ASL)......132
Cruise control...............................133

5
L
Entering the vehicle

UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE

Any person fitted with an implanted Interference may cause the implanted
medical device should make sure that medical device to malfunction, causing
the device is kept at a distance of at serious injury or death. For more
least 22 cm (8.7 inches) away from any information on the locations of the
transmitter mounted in the vehicle. security system transmitters, see 255,
This is to avoid any possibility of SMART KEY TRANSMITTER
interference between the system and LOCATIONS.
the device.

6
 R
Entering the vehicle

The vehicle can be operated when the When closing the tailgate again, if the
Smart key is inside the vehicle. So to vehicle is already locked and armed, the
prevent accidental or unauthorised hazard warning lamps will flash after a few
operation, never leave the Smart key seconds to confirm that the full alarm
unattended in the vehicle. Also never system has been reactivated. There will also
leave children or animals unattended be an audible sound if the vehicle was
in the vehicle. double locked. See 10, OPENING AND
Note: The operational range of the Smart key CLOSING THE TAILGATE. See also 11,
will vary considerably, depending on OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWERED
atmospheric conditions and interference from TAILGATE.
other transmitting devices. Note: Make sure the Smart key does not
Note: If any door, or the tailgate, is unlocked remain in the vehicle prior to closure. If the
10 times within a short period, the latch is vehicle is in an area of localised Radio
disabled for approximately one minute. Frequency (RF) interference or the Smart
key is shielded by metal objects, the vehicle
The vehicle is supplied with 2 Smart keys. The
may close and lock with no means of
Smart keys act as remote controls for the
opening again.
locking and alarm system, and allow the vehicle
to be locked, unlocked and driven without the 4. Panic alarm:
use of a conventional key. See 8, KEYLESS • Press and hold for 3 seconds (or press
ENTRY, 15, KEYLESS LOCKING and 108, 3 times within 3 seconds) to activate
STARTING THE ENGINE. Each Smart key also the horn and the hazard lamps.
has an emergency key housed behind a slide • Once active for more than 5 seconds,
off cover. the alarm can be cancelled by pressing
1. Lock: Press to secure the vehicle. The the button and holding for 3 seconds
vehicle can be Single or Double locked. See (or pressing 3 times within 3 seconds).
14, SINGLE LOCKING, 14, DOUBLE • The emergency alarm will also be
LOCKING and 16, GLOBAL CLOSING. cancelled if a valid Smart key is present
2. Unlock: Press briefly to unlock the vehicle when the START/STOP button is
and deactivate the alarm. The hazard pressed.
warning lamps will flash twice to indicate 5. Approach illumination:
that the vehicle is unlocked and the alarm
• When approaching the vehicle during
has been deactivated. The interior lamps
darkness, press to switch on the
will illuminate to assist entry to the vehicle.
approach illumination. Press again to
Power-fold mirrors will unfold (if enabled).
turn the approach lamps off.
See 8, GLOBAL OPENING.
Note: In some markets, a second press
3. Tailgate operation: Press briefly to
of the button will turn on the headlamps
open/close the tailgate. If the vehicle is
and reversing lamps. A third press will
locked and armed, the Perimeter alarm will
be required to turn the lamps off.
remain active while the tailgate is open, but
intrusion and inclination sensing systems
will be disabled for the duration that the
tailgate is open.

7
L
Entering the vehicle

• The approach illumination period, set 1. Single-point entry: Unlocks the driver's door
at the factory, is 30 seconds. This delay and the fuel filler flap only. A second press
period may be configured to provide is required to unlock the remaining doors
illumination lasting between 0 and 240 and the tailgate.
seconds. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Multi-point entry: Unlocks all of the doors,
MENU. the fuel filler flap and the tailgate on the first
6. Emergency key access: Slide open the side press.
cover to release, then remove. To change from Single to Multi-point entry (or
7. Remove the emergency key blade and vice versa), press both the lock and unlock
unfold. buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. The
8. If the Smart key fails to open the vehicle, hazard warning lamps will flash twice to confirm
insert the key blade into the slot at the base the change.
of the driver's door lock cover and gently This feature may also be set via Vehicle Set-up
lever the key blade upwards. Carefully rotate in the Instrument panel menu. See 49,
the door lock cover upwards, to lever the INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
cover off the retaining clips. Note: If, when the vehicle is unlocked, an
9. Insert the key blade into the exposed lock audible warning is emitted, this will be a
and turn to operate the lock. The alarm will 'Mislock' error. There may be a fault with either
sound until the Smart key is positioned of the alarm sensors. Consult a
correctly, to disarm the alarm: see 109, Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as possible.
KEYLESS START BACKUP.
Note: When replacing the door lock cover, GLOBAL OPENING
locate the top retaining clips before pushing Press and hold the Smart key unlock button for
the cover into position. 3 seconds to unlock the vehicle and open all of
10. Keyless entry/exit: Exterior door handles the windows.
have separate unlock and lock sensors. The To cancel Global opening, press any of the
unlock sensor is located on the inner buttons on the Smart key or operate the driver’s
surface of the handle. window switches. To stop a particular window
Note: A replacement Smart key can be obtained opening, operate the relevant window switch.
only from a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Note: Global opening can be enabled and
Repairer. The Dealer/Authorised Repairer will disabled via Vehicle Set-up in the Instrument
require proof of identification and ownership. panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notify your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised MENU.
Repairer immediately if a Smart key is lost or
stolen. KEYLESS ENTRY
Keyless entry allows the vehicle to be opened
SINGLE/MULTI-POINT ENTRY
if a Smart key is within 1.0 m (3 ft) of the door
When you press the unlock button, the vehicle handle or the tailgate external switch.
will unlock in one of two ways:

8
 R
Entering the vehicle

Note: The Smart key may not be detected if it SMART KEY SYSTEM TRANSMITTERS
is placed within a metal container, or if it is
Any person fitted with an implanted
shielded by a device with a back-lit LCD screen,
medical device should make sure the
such as a smart phone, laptop (including when
device is kept at a distance of at least
inside a laptop bag), games console, etc. Keep
22 cm (8.7 in) away from any
the Smart key clear of such devices when
transmitter mounted in the vehicle.
attempting Keyless entry or Keyless starting.
This is to avoid any possibility of
Note: The Smart key needs only to be on the interference between the system and
driver’s person, or in a non-metallic bag or device. See 255, SMART KEY
briefcase. It does not need to be exposed or TRANSMITTER LOCATIONS.
handled.
To enter the vehicle, just pull the door handle. STEERING COLUMN LOCK
The alarm will be disarmed and the doors During vehicle recovery, a Smart key
unlocked according to the current unlock/entry must remain inside the vehicle, so that
setting (Single or Multi-point). The hazard the steering column remains unlocked.
warning lamps will flash twice as 'unlock’ See 240, RECOVERY METHOD.
confirmation. Power-folded mirrors will fold out
(if enabled). Your vehicle is fitted with an electronic steering
column lock, which locks and unlocks in
Note: If Single-point entry is the current security conjunction with the vehicle's locking system.
setting and a door other than the driver’s door It also locks automatically, after a time delay, if
is opened first, all of the doors will unlock. the ignition is switched off and the Smart key
Instructional video - Keyless entry. is removed from the vehicle.
Any malfunction of the steering column lock
will be indicated by the message Steering
Column Locked being displayed in the Message
centre. If this occurs:
1. Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
Smart key.
CONVENIENCE MODE 2. Try again to unlock the steering column
When the door is opened using either the Smart lock, by turning the steering wheel gently
key or Keyless entry, the vehicle's electrical to the left and right.
system initiates the Convenience mode. The 3. If the problem persists, seek qualified
following systems become functional: assistance immediately.
• Driver position memory.
• Seat and steering column adjustment. DRIVE-AWAY LOCKING
• Interior and exterior lighting. Drive-away locking automatically locks all of
the doors when the vehicle reaches a set speed.
• Message centre.
This feature can be enabled/disabled via
• Auxiliary power socket. Drive-away locking in the Vehicle Set-up
menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.

9
L
Entering the vehicle

Note: Pressing the unlock or lock button on the 1. Press to release the tailgate and then lift the
driver or front passenger door after Drive-away tailgate to open.
locking has taken place, will override Drive-away Note: The tailgate external release switch will
locking for the current journey. See 16, DOOR operate if all of the doors are unlocked and the
LOCKS AND RELEASE LEVERS. automatic transmission gear selector is in the
Park (P) position. If the gear selector is in the
OPENING AND CLOSING THE Neutral (N) position, the switch will only operate
TAILGATE if all of the doors are unlocked, and the ignition
While the tailgate is open, the locking is in Convenience mode or switched off. The
latch is exposed. Do not attempt to switch will not operate if the gear selector is in
manually close the latch, as it may any other position.
also automatically ‘soft close’ and trap The tailgate can also be released using the
items or body parts. following methods:
Make sure there is a minimum space of • The interior tailgate release button. See 290,
1.5 m (58 ins) above and at the rear of DRIVER CONTROLS.
the vehicle, before operating the tailgate. • The Smart key tailgate release button. See
Insufficient opening space may result in 6, UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE.
damage to the vehicle.
Note: The tailgate will not open if the vehicle is
Do not operate the tailgate if a cycle rack travelling at, or above, approximately 5 km/h (3
is fitted to the tailgate. Remove any mph).
cycles and/or racks before operating the
Closing the tailgate: As the closing tailgate
tailgate.
reaches its lowest position, it will automatically
'soft close’ to the fully closed position. Do not
slam the tailgate.
Note: If the Smart key is inadvertently left inside
the loadspace and the vehicle is locked and the
alarm set, an audible warning will sound to
indicate a mislock and the tailgate will re-open
after approximately 3 seconds. The Smart key
may not be detected if it is placed within a metal
container, or if it is shielded by a device with a
back-lit LCD screen, such as a smart phone,
laptop (including when inside a laptop bag),
games console, etc.
Note: Make sure the tailgate is fully closed
before leaving the vehicle unattended. The
visible and audible warnings will indicate if the
vehicle is locked and the alarm armed. If there
are no visible or audible warnings upon closing
the tailgate, the vehicle may be unprotected.

10
 R
Entering the vehicle

OPENING AND CLOSING THE 2. Press the button to close the powered
POWERED TAILGATE tailgate. The button can also be used to stop
the tailgate while it is opening.
While the tailgate is open, the locking
latch is exposed. Do not attempt to After the tailgate has opened to its set height,
manually close the latch, as it may it can be manually raised or lowered. If the
also automatically ‘soft close’ and trap tailgate fails to open or close correctly, close it
items or body parts. manually and then press the tailgate release
button again.
Do not operate the tailgate if a cycle rack
is fitted to the tailgate. Remove any As the closing tailgate reaches its lowest
cycles and/or racks before operating the position, it will 'soft close’ to the fully closed
tailgate. position. If the vehicle was previously locked
and armed, the hazard warning lamps will flash
to confirm that the vehicle has locked and
rearmed to the previous locked and armed state.
An audible warning may also sound as
confirmation.
Note: If a tailgate button is pressed while the
tailgate is opening or closing, all movement will
stop. However, if a button is pressed during the
'soft close’ stage, the open request will be
ignored.
Before operating the tailgate, make
sure anyone in the vicinity does not
have any part of their body in a position
where it could be trapped. Note that
the 'soft close’ action does not
incorporate object detection. Death or
serious injury could occur, even with
an object detection system.
Object detection while opening: If an object is
detected that would interfere with the tailgate
opening, tailgate movement will stop. Remove
any obstructions and press the tailgate button
again to open.

1. Press the button to open the powered

tailgate. The button can also be used to
stop, reverse the direction, or close the
tailgate.

11
L
Entering the vehicle

Object detection while closing: If an object is To reset the maximum opening height, repeat
detected that would interfere with the tailgate the process, but when the tailgate reaches its
closing, tailgate movement will stop and then current programmed height, manually move it
reverse to the fully open position (if available to the fully open position, before pressing and
to do so). An audible warning will be given to holding the button.
indicate a mislock. Remove any obstructions The powered tailgate may lose its position
and if the tailgate is open, press the tailgate memory if there are multiple object detections,
switch again to close the tailgate. If the tailgate or if the battery voltage is low. Powered
is not open, press a tailgate release switch to operation may be inhibited.
open the tailgate, remove any obstructions.
To reset the tailgate:
Once the obstructions have been removed,
press the tailgate close switch to close the 1. Manually close the tailgate.
tailgate. 2. Press a release switch.
Instructional video - Powered tailgate. 3. Allow the tailgate to power fully open, or to
the previously set position.
4. Press and release the close switch.
5. Allow the tailgate to power close fully. The
tailgate's programmed memory will now be
restored.

TAILGATE OPENING HEIGHT

The maximum opening height can be set as
required. This is useful in parking areas with
low ceiling heights, or just for ease of use.
1. Open the tailgate to the position which you
want to set as the maximum height. Press
any tailgate control to stop movement at
the required position. The final position can
be achieved manually, if required.
2. Make sure the tailgate is stationary for at
least 3 seconds.
3. Press and hold the tailgate close switch for
10 seconds to set the maximum opening
height.
4. Close the tailgate, then open again to check
that it opens to the programmed height.
Note: If, after performing part 3 of the process,
the tailgate closes automatically, the required
height has not been set. Repeat the process,
making sure that all steps are adhered to.

12
 R
Entering the vehicle

SMART KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT Battery disposal: Batteries contain

harmful substances and must be
When the battery needs replacing, there will be
disposed of correctly. Seek advice
a significant decrease in the effective range and
on disposal from a
SMART KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed
Dealer/Authorised Repairer and/or
in the Message centre.
your local authority.

SMART KEY CARE

To prevent accidental operation, which
may result in an injury, never leave the
Smart key in the vehicle if children or
animals are also left in the vehicle.
Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,
humidity or allow contact with fluids. Do not
leave the transmitter exposed to direct sunlight.
The emergency key blade number is recorded
on an attached label. Peel off the label and
attach it to the designated area in the Service
Record & Warranty Benefits booklets, supplied
in the literature pack. Keep this safe, but not in
the vehicle.
The operational range of the Smart key will vary
considerably, depending on atmospheric
conditions and interference from other
To replace the battery: transmitting devices.
1. Remove the cover by sliding in the Note: The Radio Frequency (RF) used by the
directions of the arrows. Smart key may be used by other devices (e.g.,
2. Use the emergency key blade to separate medical equipment). This may prevent the
the Smart key body. Smart key from operating correctly.
3. Fit a new and unused CR2032 type battery
(available from a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer) with the positive (+) side upwards.
Note: Avoid touching the new battery.
Moisture/oil from fingers can reduce battery life
and corrode the contacts.
Note: If the low battery warning does not
extinguish, this indicates that the replacement
battery is not in a new and unused condition.
Refit the parts in reverse order, making sure
that they click securely into place.

13
L
Exiting the vehicle

SINGLE LOCKING This provides extra security if the vehicle is left

unattended. The vehicle cannot be opened by
Press the lock button on the Smart key briefly
breaking a window and operating the door locks
to single lock the vehicle and activate the
from inside. Additionally, Double locking also
Perimeter alarm. The hazard warning lamps will
activates the full alarm system, see 15, FULL
flash to confirm.
ALARM.
Single locking secures the vehicle and prevents
Note: In this state, an open window may cause
the doors from being opened from the outside.
the alarm to sound due to the movement of air
The doors may still be unlocked and opened
currents. For this reason, make sure all of the
from inside the vehicle. In this state, only the
windows are fully closed before Double locking
Perimeter alarm is activated. See 17, MISLOCK.
the vehicle.
Note: This setting should be used in
circumstances, such as travelling on a ferry,
LOCK CONFIRMATION
when pets are to be left in the vehicle, or if a
window must be left open, etc. If you are uncertain whether the vehicle is
locked and armed (either by Single or Double
Note: Always secure your vehicle when left
locking), press either the Smart key lock button
unattended. Where possible, always secure your
or, if Keyless entry is fitted, touch an exterior
vehicle to the maximum available level of
door handle lock sensor. The hazard warning
security.
lamps will flash once to indicate and confirm
the current lock status.
DOUBLE LOCKING
Note: If the vehicle is not already locked and
Never double lock the vehicle with armed, pressing the lock button will single lock
people, children, or pets inside. In the the vehicle. Press again to double lock, if
event of an emergency, they would be required.
unable to escape and the emergency
services would be unable to release
AUTOMATIC RELOCKING AND RE-
them quickly.
ARMING OF THE ALARM
Press the lock button on the Smart key twice
within 3 seconds to double lock the vehicle and If a door, the tailgate or the bonnet are not
activate the full alarm system. The hazard opened within 40 seconds of unlocking the
warning lamps will flash twice to confirm and vehicle via the Smart key, all of the doors will
a double lock tone will sound. re-lock automatically to the previous locked
state and the alarm will re-arm.
Double locking secures the vehicle and prevents
the doors from being opened from inside or
outside of the vehicle. The doors cannot be
PERIMETER ALARM
unlocked or opened from inside the vehicle The perimeter alarm system is activated when
when double locked. the vehicle is single locked. See 14, SINGLE
LOCKING.
Once activated, the alarm system will sound if:
• The bonnet, tailgate or a door is opened.

14
 R
Exiting the vehicle

• The engine START/STOP button is pressed Note: The vehicle will not lock automatically.
without a valid Smart key present. The Smart key may not be detected if it
If the vehicle is fitted with a battery-backed is placed within a metal container, or if
sounder, the sounder will sound if the battery it is shielded by a device with a back-lit
is disconnected, or an attempt is made to LCD screen, such as a smart phone,
disconnect the sounder. laptop (including when inside a laptop
bag), games console, etc.
FULL ALARM Note: Loose coins, in the same pocket as the
The full alarm system is activated when the Smart key, may also affect its detection.
vehicle is double locked. See 14, DOUBLE
LOCKING.
Once activated, the alarm system will sound if:
• The bonnet, tailgate or a door are opened.
• Movement is detected within the vehicle's
interior.
• The vehicle is raised or tilted.
If the vehicle is fitted with a Battery-backed
sounder, the alarm system will also sound if: Note: Keyless locking will activate only if the
• The vehicle battery is disconnected. Smart key is detected outside the vehicle. If no
Smart key is present, no locking will occur.
• An attempt is made to disconnect the
Battery-backed sounder. • To single lock the vehicle, touch only the
lock sensor on the door handle (1) once,
without grabbing the door handle.
INTERIOR PROTECTION
Note: Do not place your fingers around the
The interior protection feature of the full alarm
back of the handle while touching the
system may be temporarily disabled via Alarm
sensor; doing so will prevent the vehicle
sensors in the Vehicle set-up menu. See 49,
from locking.
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
The hazard warning lamps will flash once
Note: If the interior protection is temporarily to confirm locking and the power fold
disabled, it will be automatically enabled the mirrors will fold in (if enabled).
next time the vehicle is Double locked with the
• To double lock the vehicle, touch only the
Smart key.
lock sensor (1) twice within 3 seconds,
without grabbing the door handle.
KEYLESS LOCKING
Note: Do not place your fingers around the
Never double lock the vehicle with back of the handle while touching the
people, children or pets inside. In the sensor; doing so will prevent the vehicle
event of an emergency, they would be from locking.
unable to escape and the emergency
services would be unable to release
them quickly.

15
L
Exiting the vehicle

The hazard warning lamps will flash twice BATTERY-BACKED SOUNDER

to confirm (with a long second flash). An
In certain markets, a Battery-backed sounder is
audible confirmation may also be given (if
fitted. This device will sound if it, or the vehicle's
enabled).
battery is disconnected while the security
Note: When locking the vehicle via Keyless system is armed.
locking, if one or more of the doors, the bonnet
or the tailgate is not fully closed, or the ignition TILT SENSOR
is ON, the vehicle will NOT lock. There will be
NO audible mislock error warning. The hazard The tilt sensor detects any change to the
warning lamps will NOT flash and the door vehicle’s angle to the ground. When the alarm
mirrors (if enabled) will NOT fold in. Check that is armed and the vehicle is double locked, any
all of the doors, the bonnet and the tailgate are change in the vehicle’s angle will activate the
closed properly. Make sure the ignition is turned tilt alarm.
OFF and lock the vehicle again. If the mislock Note: The tilt sensors can be temporarily
persists, consult your Dealer/Authorised disabled for the next time the vehicle is locked.
Repairer. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU. The
sensors will be automatically enabled the next
GLOBAL CLOSING time the vehicle is double locked with the Smart
key.
Make sure no children, pets, or
obstructions are in any open aperture
before operating Global closing. DOOR LOCKS AND RELEASE LEVERS
Make sure all of the doors are closed. Press and While a door is open, the locking latch
hold the Smart key lock button for 3 seconds. is exposed. If your vehicle is fitted with
The vehicle will single lock and the alarm will the soft close feature, do not attempt
be armed immediately. After 3 seconds, any to manually close the latch, as it may
open windows will be closed. also automatically soft close and trap
items or body parts.
Keyless Global closing (if enabled) can be
operated by touching the door lock sensor for
3 seconds. This will also single lock the vehicle
and activate the alarm.
Note: The windows will close only while the
door lock sensor is being touched. To fully
secure the vehicle, continue to touch the door
lock sensor until all of the windows are fully
closed.
Note: Global closing can be enabled and
disabled via the Vehicle Set-up Instrument
panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU.

16
 R
Exiting the vehicle

1. To lock: With all of the doors closed, press DEACTIVATING THE ALARM WHEN
any lock button to lock all of the doors. TRIGGERED
2. To unlock: Press any unlock button to If the alarm has been triggered, it can be
unlock all of the doors. Alternatively, pull deactivated by pressing the Smart key unlock
either front door release handle (3) once to button, or by positioning the Smart key against
unlock all of the doors. the steering column and pressing the engine
Pull either rear door release handle once to START/STOP button. See 109, KEYLESS START
unlock the individual rear door. BACKUP.
Note: All unlock buttons are inhibited when
the vehicle is locked with the Smart key. EMERGENCY LOCKING
3. Door release handle: Pull to unlock and
open the door(s). If the door is locked,
pulling either front door handle once will
unlock all of the doors. Pulling either rear
door handle once will unlock the individual
rear door.
Note: The rear child security feature will
inhibit the rear door lock and unlock
switches, and the door release handles. See
36, CHILD SAFETY LOCKS.

MISLOCK
When locking the vehicle with the Smart key, a
Mislock can occur if:
• One or more of the doors, the bonnet or the
tailgate is not fully closed.
• The ignition is ON. In the event of the battery discharging or a fault
with the keyless locking system, the doors must
• A Smart key is left inside the vehicle.
be locked manually.
If any of the above are present, the vehicle will
Note: Do not leave the emergency key blade in
NOT lock and there will be an audible mislock
the vehicle, at any point during the emergency
error warning. The hazard warning lamps will
locking procedure.
NOT flash and the door mirrors (if enabled) will
NOT fold in. Check that all of the doors, the 1. Open the door and locate the emergency
bonnet and the tailgate are closed properly. lock access cover. Using the emergency key
Make sure the ignition is turned OFF and lock blade (see 6, UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE),
the vehicle again. If the mislock persists, consult rotate the cover to release it from the door.
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Remove the cover and store it safely.
2. Insert the emergency key blade firmly into
the emergency lock.
The emergency key blade can now be
removed.

17
L
Exiting the vehicle

3. Refit the emergency lock access cover and

rotate it clockwise to secure it firmly.
4. Close the door and check to make sure the
door is locked.
Repeat the procedure for all other unlocked
doors.

18
 R
Front seats

MANUAL SEATS

1. Forward and rearward adjustment.

2. Height adjustment.
3. Seatback angle adjustment.
For information on how to adjust the front head
restraint, see 29, FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS.
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle
is moving; doing so could cause a loss
of vehicle control and personal injury.

19
L
Front seats

ELECTRIC SEATS

1. Lumbar support adjustment. 4. Forward and rearward adjustment.

2. Seatback angle adjustment. 5. Cushion angle adjustment.
3. Height adjustment.

20
 R
Front seats

To adjust the seats, the Smart key must be

inside the vehicle.
For information on how to adjust the front head
restraints, see 29, FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS.
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle
is moving; doing so could cause a loss
of vehicle control and personal injury.

RESTRICTED FRONT SEAT TRAVEL

If seat movement stops unexpectedly
during adjustment, check for and
remove any obstructions.
Once any obstructions have been removed, the
seat adjustment mechanism can be reset as 1. Sit in an upright position with the base of
follows: your spine as far back as possible. To
achieve optimum benefit of the seat belt in
Operate the button again to continue the stalled the event of an accident, do not recline the
adjustment. When seat movement resumes, seat excessively.
hold the button until the end of travel in that
direction has been reached. Seat adjustment 2. Do not move the driver's seat too close to
can now be carried out as normal. the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance of 250 mm (10 in) is
Note: If no obstructions can be seen, but normal recommended between the breastbone and
adjustment cannot be carried out without the steering wheel airbag cover. Hold the
stalling, contact your Dealer/Authorised steering wheel in the correct position, with
Repairer. your arms slightly bent.
3. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION the head restraint is above the centre line
The driver and front seat passenger of the head.
must not ride with the seat fully
4. Position the seat belt so that it is midway
reclined.
between your neck and your shoulder. Fit
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle the strap tightly across your hips, not
is moving. across your stomach.
The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags, Make sure your driving position is comfortable
all contribute to the protection of the user. and enables you to maintain full control of the
Correct use of these components will give you vehicle.
greater protection. Therefore, you should always
observe the following points. DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
The front seat and exterior mirror positions can
be saved to the vehicle's memory.

21
L
Front seats

Once you have adjusted the power-operated EASY ENTRY/EXIT

driver’s seat and the exterior mirrors, the vehicle
When Easy entry/exit is enabled, the driver’s
can memorise the settings for future use. See
seat will automatically lower when the ignition
68, EXTERIOR MIRRORS.
is switched off and the door is opened. Upon
returning to the vehicle, when the driver’s door
is closed and the ignition is turned on, the seat
will return to its previously set position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled via the
Instrument panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT
PANEL MENU.

1. On the driver’s door, press the memory

store button (M) to activate the memory
function. The switch indicator will
illuminate.
2. Press one of the preset buttons within 5
seconds to memorise the current settings.
Memory (1, 2 or 3) Settings Saved will be
displayed in the Message centre,
accompanied by an audible chime to
confirm the settings have been saved to the
memory.
Note: A seat position will be saved to the
memory, only during the 5 second active
period.
Note: Any existing settings will be
over-written when a new position is saved
to the memory.
To recall a saved position, press the relevant
preset button (1, 2 or 3). Memory (1, 2 or
3) Recalled will be displayed in the
Message centre.

22
 R
Rear seats

FOLDING THE REAR SEATS FOLDING AND RAISING THE FIXED

Always make sure that objects carried SEATS
in the vehicle are secured properly. The split folding rear seats can be folded
Never allow passengers to travel in the completely to accommodate large loads, or
loadspace under any circumstances. partially to accommodate large loads and still
Make sure that when the seatback is retain seating for passengers.
raised, the locking mechanism is fully
engaged.
When raising the rear seatbacks, make
sure the seat belts are correctly routed
and not trapped behind the seats.
Make sure the head restraints are
raised to the correct position before
the seats are used by a passenger.

Fold part or all of the seat, as follows:

1. Pull the strap on the required cushion(s),
to raise to the vertical position.
2. Fully lower the head restraints.
3. Press the seatback release button(s), then
lower the seatback(s) until locked into place.

23
L
Rear seats

To raise the rear seat(s), follow the lowering

process in reverse.
Make sure that when the seatback(s)
is raised, the locking mechanism is
fully engaged. If the seatback(s) is not
fully locked in place, red markers will
be visible around the seatback buttons.
Adjust the head restraint(s).

FOLDING AND RAISING THE SLIDING

SEATS
The split folding rear seats can be folded
completely to accommodate large loads, or
partially to accommodate large loads and still
retain seating for passengers.

The second row seatbacks can be folded from

inside the loadspace (1), or by the passengers
occupying the third row seats (2):
• Pull back on the switch to release the
To fold a second row seatback: Lift the lever on seatback locking mechanism for the Right
the side of the seat and pull the seatback (R) or Left (L) side seatback.
forwards until it locks into the lowered position.
Note: The switches will only operate when
To raise the seatback: Lift the lever to unlock the vehicle is stationary and the tailgate is
the seatback and then lift until it is locked firmly open.
in the upright position.

24
 R
Rear seats

• Push forward on the unlocked seatback to

lower it into the folded position.
To reset: Lift the seatback into the upright
locked position using the lever on the side of
the seat. Make sure the seatback locks firmly
into the upright position.

To fold the centre of the seatback: Press the

release button on the top of the seatback, then
fold the centre of the seatback forwards into the
lowered position.
To reset into the upright position: Lift the centre
of the seatback until it locks firmly into the
upright position.
To recline the second row seatback: Lift the
Note: The second row centre seatbelt
lever on the side of the seat and push the
incorporates a locking feature to prevent the
seatback into the recline position.
seatbelt from being pulled out too far when the
To reset the seatback into the upright position: seatback is folded flat. To reset this feature after
Lift the lever and pull the seatback forward into folding the seat and returning to the upright
the upright position. Make sure the seatback position, pull the belt twice, the seatbelt will
locks firmly into the upright position. then operate as normal.

25
L
Rear seats

ACCESS POSITION (7 seat vehicle)

The vehicle must not be driven with the
rear seats in the access position.
Motion of the vehicle could cause the
seatback to fall forwards suddenly,
causing injury.

To move a rear seat forward or back:

• Lift the bar at the front of the rear seat. Then
slide the rear seat into the required position.
• Release the bar and make sure the rear seat
is locked firmly in position.

To tilt the seatback forwards: Pull the lever on

the top of the seatback upwards (1) to release
the locking mechanism, and then move the
seatback forwards into the tilt position.
To move the seat forwards: Pull the lever on the
front of the seat upwards (2) to release the
locking mechanism, and then move the seat
forwards.

26
 R
Rear seats

When returning the seat from the To raise a third row seat:
access position, make sure nothing is 1. From inside the loadspace: On the seat to
trapped beneath the returning seat. be raised, pull the strap on the rear of the
Make sure that when the seatback and seat, to lift the seat into the raised position.
seat are returned to the pre-access Note: The seat is heavy, so care should be
position, the locking mechanisms are taken when raising the seat.
fully engaged. Physically test to make
2. From inside the vehicle: Lift the head
sure that the seat and seatback is
restraint, until it locks into the upright
secure before driving.
position.
FOLDING AND RAISING THE THIRD
ROW SEATS
The head restraint must always be
raised when using the third row seats.
When raising the rear seats, make sure
that seat belts are correctly routed and
not trapped behind the seats.
Beware of trapping fingers when
raising and lowering the third row seat.

To fold a third row seat:

1. From inside the loadspace: Pull the strap
on the rear of the seat to be folded, to
release the head restraint locking
mechanism and then manually fold the head
restraint forward.

27
L
Rear seats

2. To fold the seat: Pull the strap again to

release the seat locking mechanism, and
then fold the seat forwards into the stowed
position.
Note: The seat is heavy, so care should be
taken when lowering the seat.
Instructional video - Folding and raising the
third row seats.

28
 R
Head restraints

FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS 2 people are required when removing a front

head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the head restraint is above the To remove the head restraint:
centre line of the head. An incorrectly 1. Move the head restraint to the upper most
adjusted head restraint increases the position.
risk of death or serious injury in the 2. Using 2 hands, press down on each of the
event of a collision. collars on the top of the seat to engage
Do not drive, or carry passengers with hidden buttons inside the seat.
the head restraints removed from 3. While the collars are being pressed down,
occupied seats. The absence of a the second person should lift out the head
correctly adjusted head restraint restraint.
increases the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision. Make sure the head restraint is refitted before
the seat is used by a passenger.
Never adjust the head restraints while
the vehicle is in motion. To refit the head restraint:
Always store a removed head restraint 1. Press the button on the side of the head
securely. restraint and push the stems into the
restraint as far as they will go.
2. Line the stems up with the hole in the
collars and push down until both stems
engage into the locked position.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the head restraint is above the
centre line of the head. An incorrectly
adjusted head restraint increases the
risk of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision.
Do not drive or carry passengers with
the head restraint removed from an
1. Move the head restraint up to the required occupied seat. The absence of a
position. correctly adjusted head restraint
2. To move the restraint downwards, press increases the risk of neck injury in the
the button on the side of the head restraint event of a collision.
and move the restraint to the required Always store a removed restraint
position. securely.
Note: Head restraints fitted with Rear seat
entertainment screens must NOT be removed.

29
L
Head restraints

The head restraints can be removed, if required

(e.g., to fit larger child seats). To remove a head
restraint, first raise the head restraint to its
uppermost position. With the adjusting collar
pressed in, lift the restraint out of the seatback.
To refit a head restraint, make sure it is facing
the correct direction, insert the stems of the
head restraint into the sockets and push it
downwards until at least the first click.

1. To raise, pull the head restraint upwards.

2. To lower, press in the adjusting collar and
push down on the head restraint.

30
 R
Steering wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL Full steering assistance should return when the
system has been allowed to cool. If full steering
assistance does not return, consult a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL

Press to switch on the steering wheel heating.

Press again to turn off.
Note: If the steering wheel heater is operating
Never adjust the steering column while
when ECO Program is selected, the steering
the vehicle is in motion.
wheel heater will switch off automatically. The
1. Move the lever fully down to unlock the steering wheel heater can be switched on again
column. When the steering has been but this may affect the fuel economy of the
adjusted to the desired position, move the vehicle.
lever fully up to re-lock the column.
2. The steering column can be adjusted, up,
down, in or out.

POWER STEERING
A fault with the power steering system is
indicated by a message in the Message centre,
accompanied by an amber warning lamp. See
53, GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATION
MESSAGE (AMBER). A reduction in power
steering assistance may be experienced. The
fault may be caused by overheating due to
extensive steering inputs or high ambient
temperatures.

31
L
Seat belts

USING THE SEAT BELTS

1. Putting on a seat belt: Draw the belt out Position the seat belt correctly for the
smoothly, making sure that the seat and safety of the mother and unborn child.
your position on the seat are correct. Never wear just the lap strap, and
When correctly positioned, the seat belt never sit on the lap strap while using
should cross the collar bone at the just the shoulder strap. Both of these
mid-point between the neck and end of your actions are extremely dangerous, and
shoulder. may increase your risk of serious injury
Where possible, rear seat passengers in the event of an accident or during
should adjust their seating position to emergency braking.
achieve the same seat belt position. Never place anything between you and
2. Fastening a seat belt: With the seat belt the seat belt in an attempt to cushion
correctly positioned, place the metal tongue the impact in the event of an accident.
into the buckle nearest to you. Press it in It can be dangerous, and will reduce
until a click is heard. the effectiveness of the seat belt in
To release the seat belt, press the red preventing injury.
button. Do not use comfort clips or devices that
Note: When releasing the seat belt, it is would create slack in the seat belt
advisable to hold the belt before pressing system.
the release button. This will prevent the belt No modifications or additions should
from retracting too quickly. be made by the user which will either
3. Seat belt use during pregnancy: Position prevent the seat belt adjusting devices
the lap strap comfortably across the hips, from operating to remove slack, or
beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal prevent the seat belt assembly from
part of the seat belt between the breasts being adjusted to remove slack. A
and to the side of the abdomen. slack seat belt offers a greatly reduced
level of occupant protection in an
impact.

32
 R
Seat belts

Seat belts are designed to bear upon The air bag Supplementary Restraint
the bony structure of the body and System (SRS) is designed to add to the
should be worn low across the front of overall effectiveness of the seat belts.
the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and It does not replace them. Seat belts
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the must always be worn.
lap section of the belt across the Do not carry hard, fragile, or sharp
abdominal area must be avoided. items between your person and the
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly seat belt. In an impact, the pressure
as possible, consistent with comfort, on such items can cause them to break,
to provide the protection for which they which in turn may cause death or
have been designed. A slack belt will serious injury.
greatly reduce the protection afforded Seat belts should be worn by all
to the wearer. Ensure that any belt vehicle occupants, for every trip, no
positioning sliders are adjusted so as matter how short. Failure to do so will
not to introduce slack. greatly increase the risk of death or
Belts should not be worn with the serious injury in the event of an
straps twisted. Each belt assembly accident.
must only be used by one occupant; it Never wear just the lap belt or just the
is dangerous to put a belt around a shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder
child being carried on the occupant’s diagonal set belt. Both of these actions
lap. are extremely dangerous and may
Riding with a reclined seatback increase your risk of injury.
increases your chance of serious or
fatal injuries in the event of a collision SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS
or sudden stop. The protection of your
The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in
restraint system (seat belts and
conjunction with the Supplementary Restraint
airbags) is greatly reduced by reclining
System (SRS) to provide additional protection
your seat. Seat belts must be snug
in the event of a severe frontal impact. They
against your hips and chest to work
automatically reduce any slack in a seat belt to
properly. The more the seatback is
reduce forward movement of a front seat
reclined, the greater the chance that
occupant or a third row seat occupant.
an occupant's neck will strike the
shoulder belt. Drivers and passengers The seat belt pre-tensioners will
should always sit well back in their activate only once and then must be
seats, properly belted and with the renewed. Failure to replace them will
seatbacks upright. reduce the effectiveness of the SRS in
reducing the risk of serious injury or
Never place anything between you and
death in the event of an accident.
the seat belt. It can be dangerous and
reduce the effectiveness of the seat After any impact, have the seat belts and
belt in preventing injury. pre-tensioners checked and, if necessary,
renewed by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

33
L
Seat belts

SEAT BELT SAFETY SEAT BELT CARE

Care should be taken to avoid The seat belt should be replaced if the
contamination of the webbing with webbing becomes frayed,
polishes, oils and chemicals, and contaminated or damaged.
particularly battery acid. Cleaning may It is essential to replace the entire
safely be carried out using mild soap assembly after it has been worn in a
and water. severe impact even if damage to the
The belt should be replaced if the assembly is not obvious.
webbing becomes frayed, If any damage, wear, cuts, defects, or
contaminated or damaged. impaired operation are noted with the
It is essential to replace the entire seat belts, the vehicle should be taken
assembly after it has been worn in a to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
severe impact, even if damage to the immediate attention. Do not use the
assembly is not obvious. vehicle if the seat belts cannot be
If any damage, wear, cuts, defects, or operated correctly.
impaired operation are noted with the Care must be taken to avoid
seat belts, the vehicle should be taken contamination of the webbing with
to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for polishes, oils and chemicals, and
immediate attention. Do not use the particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
vehicle if the seat belts cannot be safely be carried out using mild soap
operated correctly. and water. Contaminated seat belts
Do not carry hard, fragile, or sharp may not operate correctly in an impact
items between your person and the and cannot be relied upon.
seat belt. When using seat belts to restrain items
Seat belts should be worn by all other than occupants, make sure the
vehicle occupants, for every journey, belts are not damaged, or exposed to
no matter how short. sharp edges.
Never wear just the lap belt, or just the
shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder SEAT BELT CHECKS
diagonal seat belt. Both of these Note: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, the
actions are extremely dangerous and seat belt mechanism may lock. This is a safety
may increase your risk of injury. feature and the belt should be gently eased out
When using seat belts to restrain items from the upper anchorage.
other than occupants, make sure the The seat belts should be inspected regularly to
belts are not damaged, or exposed to check for fraying, cuts, wear to the webbing and
sharp edges. the condition and security of the mechanism,
buckles, adjusters and mounting points.
• With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.

34
 R
Seat belts

• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the A graphic displayed in the Message centre
seat belt to the limit of its travel. Check that indicates which seat belts are fastened at the
it unreels smoothly with no snatches or start of a journey, and also when a seat belt is
snags. Allow the belt to fully retract, again fastened or unfastened during a journey. Each
checking for smooth operation. seating position is represented by a passenger
• Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold the icon, the colour and symbol of which indicates
tongue plate and give a quick forward pull. the seat belt status:
The mechanism must lock and prevent any • Tick/green - seat belt, in the indicated
further unreeling. position, is fastened.
If any of the seat belts fail to meet • Cross/red - seat belt, in the indicated
those criteria, immediately contact position, has been unfastened while the
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer. vehicle's ignition is on. This indicator will
turn grey after 30 seconds.
SEAT BELT REMINDER • Grey - seat belt not fastened.
Seat belt reminder commences when the vehicle Note: The indicators will be displayed for 30
is in motion and the driver's belt is unbuckled. seconds each time there is a status change, e.g.,
Dependent on the market, an audible chime a seat belt is unfastened or fastened or a door
sounds and the warning indicator in the is opened and then closed.
Instrument panel illuminates. See 54, SEAT In addition, an audible warning will sound under
BELT (RED). The visual and audible warnings the following conditions:
applicable to the Seat belt reminder feature are
market dependent, to meet individual market • The seat belt of an occupied front seat is
requirements. The warning signals given may not fastened, or is unfastened during a
also change, depending on whether the vehicle journey.
is stationary or when the vehicle's speed • A rear seat belt is unfastened.
exceeds a predetermined threshold. In certain Note: If a heavy object is placed on the front
markets, the Seat belt reminder, feature also passenger seat, it may activate the Seat belt
applies to the front passenger seat. reminder feature. It is recommended that any
The Message centre also displays a front and objects placed on the front passenger seat are
rear Seat belt reminder, that warns the driver secured using the seat belt.
when the seat belt of any occupied seat is not
fastened or is unfastened during a journey.

35
L
Child safety

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS Do not allow a baby or infant to be held

or carried on the lap. The force of a
crash can increase effective body
weight by as much as thirty times,
making it impossible to hold onto the
child.
Children typically require the use of a
booster seat appropriate to their age
and size, thereby enabling the seat
belts to be properly fitted, reducing the
risk of injury in a crash. Children could
If children are to be carried in the rear seat
be endangered in a crash if their child
positions, it is recommended that the rear door
restraints are not properly secured in
interior handles are disabled.
the vehicle.
Press the switch to activate the child door locks
Do not use a child seat that hooks over
and inhibit the rear windows. The LED indicator
the seatback. This type of seat cannot
will illuminate when active and a message will
be satisfactorily secured and is unlikely
display in the Message centre.
to be safe for your child.
To switch off, press the switch again. The LED
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are designed
will extinguish and a message will display in the
for adults and larger children. For their safety,
Message centre.
it is very important for all infants and children
under 12 years of age to be restrained in a
CHILD SEATS suitable child safety seat, appropriate to their
For optimum safety, children should age and size.
travel in the rear of the vehicle at all If it is essential that a child travels in the front
times; front passenger seat travel is passenger seat (and national legislation permits
not recommended. However, if it is this), Land Rover recommends that the
essential that a child travels in the following preparations are made before fitting
front (not permitted in Australia), set the child restraint:
the vehicle's seat fully rearward and
• Disable the front passenger airbag. See 43,
seat the child in an approved
DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG.
forward-facing child seat. Do not use
a rear-facing child seat - an inflating • Adjust the front passenger seat fully
airbag could impact with the seat and rearwards.
cause serious injury. • Adjust the lumbar support to its minimum
Do not use a forward-facing child seat support position.
until the child using it is above the • Adjust the seat cushion to its highest
minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and position. If cushion angle adjustment is
able to sit up unaided. Up to the age possible, adjust it to its lowest position.
of 2, a child's spine and neck are not • Adjust the seatback to the upright position
sufficiently developed to avoid injury to support the child restraint.
in a frontal impact.

36
 R
Child safety

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward This symbol, affixed to the passenger side
facing child restraint on a seat sun-visor, warns against the use of a rear-facing
protected by an airbag in front of it! child seat in the front passenger seat, when a
NEVER use a rearward facing child front passenger airbag is fitted and operational.
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can Crash statistics show that children are
occur. safest when properly restrained in a
child or infant restraint system that is
secured in a rear seating position.
Information given within the table is
correct at the time of going to press.
However, availability of child restraints
may change. Please consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the latest
recommendation.
Note: The information contained in the following
This symbol, affixed to the front door B-post on tables may not be applicable to all countries. If
the passenger side, warns against the use of a you are in any doubt regarding the type and
rear-facing child seat in the front passenger fitment of child seats, seek advice from a
seat, when a front passenger airbag is fitted and Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
operational.
Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of
doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be
used when considering an appropriate child
seat.
Note: The legislation which governs how and
where children should be carried when travelling
in a vehicle, is subject to change. It is the
responsibility of the driver to comply with all
regulations in force.

Seating positions Mass group

0 = Up to 10 0+ = Up to 13 I = 9-18 kg II = 15-25 kg III = 22-36 kg
kg (22 lb) kg (29 lb) (20-40 lb) (33-55 lb (49-80 lb)
0-9 months 0-18 months 9 months to 4 4-9 years 8-12 years
years
Front passenger* U U U U U
Second row U U U U U
seats**
Third row seats*** X X X UF UF

37
L
Child safety

U = Suitable for universal category restraints, ** For vehicles fitted with sliding second row
approved for this mass group. seats:
X = Not suitable for the use of child restraints • Adjust the seatback to the upright position.
of this mass group. • Adjust the seat to the rear most position,
UF = Suitable for universal forward facing child unless the third row seats are occupied.
restraints of this mass group. *** Adjust the second row seatback to the
* Always make sure the passenger airbag has upright position and move the seat forward, to
been disabled before using a child restraint in give sufficient clearance to allow fitment of the
this seating position. See 43, DISABLING THE third row child restraint.
PASSENGER AIRBAG. The front passenger seat
should be positioned fully rearward, the seat
cushion to its highest position and the seatback
adjusted to an upright position to support the
child restraint.
ISOFIX Child Seat Positioning
Mass group as shown Size class Fixtures Second row Recommended child
on child restraint outboard* restraint system
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X -
G ISO/L2 X -
0 E ISO/R1 IL Britax/Römer Baby-Safe
Up to 10 kg (22 lb) Plus with Baby-Safe
(0-9 months) ISOFIX Base
0+ E ISO/R1 IL
Up to 13 kg (29 lb) D ISO/R2 IL -
(0-18 months)
C ISO/R3 IL -
I D ISO/R2 IL -
9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) C ISO/R3 IL -
(9 months - 4 years)
B ISO/F2 IUF Britax/Römer Duo Plus
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
II/III - - - -
15 to 36 kg (33 to 80
lb) 4-9 years

38
 R
Child safety

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint • Always attach the top tether when installing
systems of universal category, approved for use an ISOFIX seat (if applicable to seat type).
in the mass group. • If a head restraint interferes with the fitting
IL = These ISOFIX child restraint systems are of a child restraint, remove the head
of the specific vehicle, restricted or restraint and stow it securely. See 29,
semi-universal categories. REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS.
X = Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint Always refit the head restraint when the
fitment in this mass group. child seat is removed.
*For vehicles fitted with sliding second row • Always check the security of the child
seats: restraint.
• Adjust the seatback to the upright position. • For child seats fitted with a support leg,
adjust the leg so that it rests firmly on the
• Adjust the seat to the rear most position,
floor.
unless the third row seats are occupied.
• Do not dress a child in bulky clothing, or
Note: ISOFIX anchorages are provided for
place any objects/padding between the child
second row outer seating positions. ISOFIX
and the restraint.
child restraints should be securely attached,
following the manufacturer’s instructions at • Regularly check the fit and condition of child
these locations only. restraints. If the fit is poor, or wear/damage
is visible renew the restraint immediately.
RECOMMENDED CHILD SEATS • Set a good example - always wear your seat
belt.
Child size/age Recommended seat
• Make sure that any belt positioning sliders
Groups 0 and 0+ Britax/Römer Baby-Safe on the seat belts are adjusted such that
plus with Baby-Safe there is no slack in the lap belt after
ISOFIX Base fastening.
Group I Britax/Römer Duo Plus
BOOSTER SEATS
Group II and III Britax/Römer Kid Plus
In a situation where a child is too large to fit
into a child safety seat but is still too small to
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LIST safely use just the 3-point belt, a booster seat
Every time a child travels in the vehicle observe is recommended for maximum safety. Follow
the following: the manufacturer's instructions for fitting and
• Use appropriate child restraints. use, then adjust the seat belt to suit.
• Carefully follow the restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions. INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD
• Adjust the harnesses for every child on
RESTRAINTS
every journey. Do not attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints
to the centre rear seating position. The
• Make sure all slack is removed from the
anchor bars are not designed to hold
adult seat belt.
an ISOFIX restraint in this position.

39
L
Child safety

If the restraint is not correctly Note: Always make sure that if an upper tether
anchored, there is a significant risk of is provided, it is fitted and tightened correctly.
injury to the child in the event of a
collision or emergency braking. INSTALLING TETHER ANCHORAGE
ISOFIX anchorage child seats can only be fitted CHILD RESTRAINTS
to the outer seat positions on the second row WARNING: child restraint anchorages
of seats. are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
Always follow the child seat or restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions
when fitting tether straps.
When fitting a child seat or restraint
system, always pass the tether strap
over the top of the seatback and
beneath the head restraint.
If a child seat or restraint system is to
be fitted to the centre seating position,
the centre armrest must be in the
stowed position (folded into the seat).
Your vehicle may be equipped with anchorage
points on the back of the second row seats.
To install an ISOFIX child seat: These should be used to attach straps from
child seats or restraint systems.
1. Locate the ISOFIX anchor bars and, if fitted,
remove the covers. Note: A tether anchorage is provided for the
centre seat position. Do not use this anchor
2. Slide the child seat into position and attach position with an ISOFIX child seat.
the locking mechanism to the ISOFIX
anchor bars.
If an upper tether is fitted to the child seat, see
40, INSTALLING TETHER ANCHORAGE CHILD
RESTRAINTS.
Test the security of the child restraint. To do
this, attempt to pull the restraint away from the
vehicle's seat and twist the restraint from side
to side. Even if the restraint appears secure, you
should still check the anchor points visually, to
make sure they are correctly attached.

40
 R
Child safety

Australian vehicles only

For 5 and 7 seat vehicles fitted with sliding rear
seats, the seats shall be adjusted to the
foremost position prior to attaching the tether
straps. The seats should then be returned to the
rearmost position to aid fitment of the child
seat.

Tether strap anchor point locations:

1. Fixed rear seats.
2. Sliding rear seats.
Install the tether straps as follows:
1. Install the child restraint securely in one of
the rear seating positions.
2. Pass the tether strap over the seatback,
beneath the head restraint and between the
seatback and the loadspace cover.
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether
anchor point on the back of the seat. Make
sure the tether strap hook is facing the
correct way, as illustrated.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Note: For 5 seat vehicles fitted with sliding
seats, the loadspace floor should be lifted and
moved rearwards. This is to allow access to the
tether anchor points. The loadspace floor should
be replaced after attaching the tether straps.

41
L
Airbags

AIRBAGS

1. Front passenger’s airbag. • Any part of the airbag Supplementary

2. Curtain airbags. Restraint System (SRS) shows signs of
cracking or damage, including trim covering
3. Side airbags.
airbags.
4. Curtain airbags (7 seat vehicles only).
• The amber airbag warning lamp illuminates.
5. Driver’s airbag.
6. Knee-bolster airbag. AIRBAG OPERATION
Note: The general location of airbags fitted to For the airbags to operate correctly,
the vehicle are marked by the word AIRBAG. the roof lining and door post trims must
Always contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer be in good condition, correctly fitted,
if: and free from obstruction. Any
damage, wear, or incorrect fitment
• An airbag inflates.
should be referred to your
• The front or sides of the vehicle are Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
damaged. possible, for examination and repair.

42
 R
Airbags

Do not allow passengers to obstruct • Objects placed on, or close to, an airbag
the operation of the airbags by placing cover.
any part of their person, or any objects, • Clothing, sun screens, or other material
in contact with, or close to, an airbag hanging from grab handles.
module. Only use approved
• Clothing, cushions, or other material,
accessories (e.g., seat covers).
covering seat-mounted airbags.
Make sure that a gap is maintained
• Seat covers which are not approved by Land
between the side of the vehicle and the
Rover, or specifically designed for use with
head and torso. This will enable
seat-mounted airbags.
unobstructed inflation of the curtain
and seat-mounted side airbags. This list is not exhaustive and it remains the
responsibility of the driver and passengers to
Airbags inflate at high speeds. To
make sure the airbags are not obstructed in any
minimise the risk of injury, make sure
way.
all vehicle occupants wear correctly
positioned seat belts, sit correctly in The airbags and Supplementary Restraint
the seats, and position the seats as far System (SRS) are not designed to operate as a
back as is practical. result of:
Airbag inflation takes place • Rear impacts.
instantaneously and cannot protect • Minor front impacts.
against the effects of secondary • Minor side impacts.
impacts. Under these circumstances,
the only protection will be provided by • Heavy braking.
a correctly worn seat belt. • Driving over bumps and pot holes.
Phone systems should only be installed High speed impacts may cause serious
by qualified persons, familiar with the injury or death, irrespective of safety
operation of and requirements for features fitted to a vehicle.
vehicles fitted with a Supplementary The airbag SRS cannot provide
Restraint System (SRS). If you are in protection in some types of impact.
any doubt, seek advice from your Under these circumstances, the only
Dealer/Authorised repairer. protection will be provided by a
Airbag deployment is dependent on the rate at correctly worn seat belt.
which the passenger compartment changes
velocity following the collision. Circumstances DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG
affecting different collisions (vehicle speed, Note: Disabling the passenger airbag is market
angle of impact, type and size of object hit, etc.), dependent.
vary considerably and will affect the rate of
deceleration accordingly. The passenger's front airbag can be switched
on and off, using the interactive controls on the
Airbags cannot deploy correctly if they are Instrument panel when the vehicle is stationary.
obstructed. Examples of obstructions are: See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
• Any part of an occupant’s body in contact
with, or close to, an airbag cover.

43
L
Airbags

The passenger airbag should be The displayed text and diagram will show the
disabled when a child restraint is fitted current Passenger Airbag On or Off status.
to the front passenger seat. Select Change Setting to choose either On or
Crash test data and statistics show that Off.
the safest place for a child to be
restrained is in a child seat correctly
fitted to the vehicle's rear seat.
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational airbag in
front of it. Doing so presents a high risk
of death or serious injury to the child
in the event of an accident.
Select Passenger Airbag from the Vehicle
Set-up menu, located in the Main Menu.
The warning lamp, mounted in the roof console,
will display the operational status of the
passenger front airbag, as shown in the
following table.

Setting Passenger airbag status Airbag status indicator

Off Disabled PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
On Activated ON PASSENGER AIRBAG*

* Displays for 60 seconds, then extinguishes. Do not fit a child restraint to the front
Note: The Instrument panel will also display a passenger seat if the Airbag warning
warning for 4 seconds every time the ignition lamp illuminates continuously with the
is switched on. ignition on. See 55, AIRBAG (AMBER).
As soon as the child seat is removed The passenger airbag must be disabled
from the front passenger seat, the when a rearward facing child restraint
airbag must be turned on. Failure to is fitted to the front passenger seat.
do so will put any front seat passengers
at greater risk of death or serious injury FRONT AIRBAGS
in the event of an accident. The front passenger, driver and knee bolster
When checking the operational status airbags are designed to protect the front seat
of the front passenger airbag, make occupants in the event of an impact.
sure the ignition is switched on and the
warning lamp bulb check period of 8
seconds has elapsed.

44
 R
Airbags

SIDE AIRBAGS AIRBAG WARNING LAMP

These are designed to protect the thorax region The airbag warning lamp is displayed in the
of the torso and will deploy only in the event of Instrument panel and will illuminate as a bulb
a side impact and then, only on the side of the check when the ignition is turned on. See 55,
impact. AIRBAG (AMBER).
If the warning lamp indicates that a
CURTAIN AIRBAGS fault is present in the system, do not
The curtain airbags are deployed in side impact use a child restraint on the front
and rollover events, providing greater protection passenger seat.
from serious head injuries. If any of the following warning lamp conditions
occur, the vehicle should be checked by your
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT EFFECTS Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately.
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder • The warning lamp fails to illuminate when
is released. This is normal and not an the ignition is turned on.
indication of a malfunction. The • The warning lamp (following the bulb check
powder may cause irritation to the skin period) fails to extinguish within 8 seconds
and should be thoroughly flushed from of the ignition being turned on.
eyes and any cuts or abrasions. If • The warning lamp illuminates at any time
breathing difficulty is experienced, other than the bulb check, when the ignition
leave the vehicle if possible, or open is on.
the windows or doors to allow fresh air
in. When the ignition is switched on, a diagnostic
control unit monitors the readiness of the
Airbags inflate at high speed and can system’s electrical circuits. The elements of the
cause injuries. To minimise the risk of Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) being
injury, make sure all occupants wear monitored include:
correctly positioned seat belts, sit
correctly in the seats and position the • SRS warning indicator.
seats as far back as is practicable. • Rotary coupler.
Airbag deployment is accompanied by • Airbag modules.
a very loud noise, which may cause • Front and third row seat belt pre-tensioners.
discomfort, and temporary loss of
• Front seat belt buckle switches.
hearing.
• Front seat track position sensor.
After inflation, some airbag
components will be very hot. Do not • Airbag diagnostic control unit.
touch the airbag components until they • Crash and rollover sensors.
have cooled sufficiently. • Airbag wiring harness.
• Airbag status indicator.

45
L
Airbags

AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION PEDESTRIAN AIRBAG

Do not attempt to service, repair,
renew, modify, or tamper with, any
part of the SRS. This includes wiring
or components in the vicinity of SRS
components. Doing so may cause the
system to trigger, or render the system
inoperative.
Do not use any electrical test
equipment or devices in the vicinity of
SRS components or wiring. Doing so
may cause the system to trigger, or
render the system inoperative.
All of the following operations should be carried
out only by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
suitably qualified person:
• Removal, or repair, of any wiring or
component in the vicinity of any SRS If your vehicle is fitted with a Pedestrain airbag,
components. it is located beneath a panel in the bonnet (1).
• Fitment of electrical, or electronic, To verify that a Pedestrian airbag is fitted to the
equipment and accessories. vehicle, the word AIRBAG is located in 2 places
• Modification to the front or sides of the on the rear of the panel (2).
vehicle's exterior. In the event of a frontal impact with a
• Attachment of accessories to the front or pedestrian, sensors in the front bumper react
sides of the vehicle. and the pedestrian airbag inflates. The sensors
will operate at speeds between 25 to 50 km/h
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS (15.5 to 31 mph).
Occupants with disabilities which may require If there is a fault with the Pedestrian airbag, the
modification of the vehicle, must contact a message Check Pedestrian System will appear
Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any in the message centre. In this event the vehicle
modifications are made. should be taken to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer
to have the fault investigated.
Do not carry out any modifications to
the front bumper, or fit any accessories
to the bumper or the bonnet, that has
not been approved by Jaguar Land
Rover, as this could affect the
operation of the sensors and/or the
airbag.

46
 R
Airbags

If damage of any kind is sustained to

the front bumper, this should be
inspected by a Dealer/ Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
For instructions on what to do after a collision
where the pedestrian airbag has deployed. See
244, AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE PEDESTRIAN
PROTECTION SYSTEM.

47
L
Instrument panel

INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Temperature gauge: If the temperature

gauge pointer moves into the red section
at the top of the scale, the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safety permits and allow the engine to idle
until the temperature reduces. If, after
several minutes, the temperature does not
reduce, switch off the engine and allow it
to cool. If the problem persists, seek
qualified assistance immediately.
Serious engine damage can occur if the
vehicle is driven while the engine is
overheating.
Note: At high engine temperatures, there
may be a noticeable reduction in engine
power and the air conditioning may cease
operation. This is a normal operating
strategy, to reduce load on the engine and
assist with cooling.
8. Warning lamps and indicators display: The
1. Speedometer. other warning lamps are displayed within
the speedometer and tachometer.
2. Tachometer.
3. Message centre and menu display.
4. Fuel gauge: See 55, LOW FUEL WARNING
(AMBER).
Never allow the engine to run out of fuel.
The resultant misfire can seriously
damage the catalytic converter.
5. ECO data system status display for the
accelerator pedal, engine revolution speed
and brake pedal application.
Also the trip computer information is
displayed in this area, see 50, TRIP
COMPUTER.
6. Gear selector status.

48
 R
Instrument panel

INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU 7. Access the Vehicle Set-up menu.

Before making any changes to the
vehicle set-up, you must make sure
that you have read and fully understood
the relevant topics/sections of the
handbook. Failure to do so could lead
to serious injury or death.
8. Access the Vehicle Info menu.
Note: Can only be accessed when the
engine is not running.

WARNING AND INFORMATION

MESSAGES
Do not ignore warning messages, take
appropriate action as soon as possible.
Failure to do so may result in serious
damage to the vehicle.
If the message is suppressed, an
amber or red warning icon will remain
illuminated until the cause of the
message is rectified.
For information regarding the individual
A number of vehicle features and display messages, their meanings, and any action
settings may be configured via the Instrument required, please refer to the relevant section
panel menus. within this handbook.
To display the instrument panel menu, press If more than 1 message is active, each is
the MENU button on the steering wheel. displayed in turn for 2 seconds in order of
To navigate through the instrument panel priority.
menus, operate the menu control buttons on Note: Messages are displayed in order of
the steering wheel. importance. High importance warning messages
1. Steering wheel menu control buttons. are given the highest priority.
2. Select Close Menu to close and return to Warning messages may be accompanied by an
the Main Menu. audible warning, and the message text may have
the handbook symbol next to it. Warning
3. Access the Driving Features menu.
messages are displayed until the condition
4. Access the Trip Computer menu. causing the fault is rectified or the message is
5. Access the Instrument Display menu. suppressed using the OK button on the steering
Note: Some personalisation options may wheel.
not be available in all markets.
6. Access the Head Up Display (HUD) menu.

49
L
Instrument panel

TRIP COMPUTER To reset the fuel consumption value, press and

hold the button until the display clears.
The computer memory stores data for a journey,
or series of journeys, until it is reset to zero. The distance, average speed and average fuel
economy values for trip A and trip B can be
There are 3 trip memories available, A, B and
reset. Set the trip computer display to show the
Auto. You can specify which trip memory is
trip that you wish to reset, then press and hold
viewable, using the Instrument panel menu.
the ¡ button until the message Resetting trip is
displayed.
USING THE TRIP COMPUTER
It is not possible to manually reset the Auto trip
memory. This resets automatically each time
the ignition is switched on.
Trips may be added together, to record a
continuous journey, or removed. Press the
button for longer than one second, when Auto
trip memory values for distance, average speed
and average fuel economy are displayed, then
Adding last journey or Removing last journey
will appear on the screen. Press the button for
A short press (one second or less) or a series longer than one second, and the previous trip
of short presses of the ¡ button will change the information will be added to, or removed from,
trip computer display. The options available are: the current trip and the new total will be
• Date and Odometer. displayed. There is no limit to the number of
• Trip distance. times this can be done before the ignition is
switched off.
• Trip average speed.
• Trip average fuel consumption. TRIP DISTANCE
• Instantaneous (short term average) fuel Distance travelled since the last memory reset.
consumption. The maximum trip reading is 9999.9 (kilometres
• Range available from remaining fuel. or miles). The computer will automatically reset
• ECO program instantaneous driving style to zero if this distance is exceeded.
rating. This will automatically be displayed
when ECO program is selected, see 141, RANGE
ECO PROGRAM. This shows the predicted distance (kilometres
• Blank display. or miles) that the vehicle should travel on the
Note: These options can be enabled/disabled remaining fuel, assuming fuel consumption and
via the Instrument panel menu (Select Trip driving style remain constant.
Computer and then Trip content), except for
the ECO data system status display and the Date
and Odometer options.
To reset the trip computer values to zero, press
and hold the ¡ button for 2 seconds.

50
 R
Instrument panel

METRIC/IMPERIAL/MIXED DISPLAY The HUD can be controlled from the Head-Up

Display option in the Instrument panel menu.
The trip computer readings can be changed
For more information, see 49, INSTRUMENT
between metric, imperial and mixed units in the
PANEL MENU.
Trip Computer menu of the Message centre.
See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU. Once selected, the menu offers a number of
options, including:
Note: The temperature display can be changed
between °C (Celsius) and °F (Fahrenheit), • Turning the HUD on/off.
independently of Metric or Imperial units. • Selecting which information is displayed on
the inside of the windscreen.
HEAD UP DISPLAY • The position of the display.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) feature projects • The brightness of the display.
driver information onto the inside of the
It is important that the position of the display
windscreen.
is set correctly. The correct position is
dependent on a number of conditions, including
the height of the driver and the seat position.
Note: Before setting the position of the HUD,
make sure that the driver's seat is correctly
positioned. See 21, SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION. The HUD level should be set
horizontally, within the driver's vision.
To set the display position, select HUD Position
from the Head-Up Display menu and follow the
on-screen instructions. Use the driver's seat
memory store button (M) to store your
The information displayed is as follows: preferences. See 21, DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY.
1. Current gear selected.
The brightness of the display is set
2. Follow mode is active. See 135, ENTERING
automatically to suit the ambient light
FOLLOW MODE.
conditions. Brightness can be manually adjusted
3. Cruise control set speed. to your preferred level by selecting HUD
4. Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control Brightness from the Head-Up Display menu.
(ACC) is active. Follow the on-screen instructions and then
5. Traffic sign recognition, identified speed press OK to confirm.
limit. See 147, TRAFFIC SIGN The HUD is linked to the Trip computer units
RECOGNITION. settings. If fuel economy is set to mpg, the HUD
6. Current vehicle speed. will be in miles. If fuel economy is set to km/l,
the HUD will be in kilometres. See 51, METRIC/
7. Turn-by-turn navigation instructions.
IMPERIAL/MIXED DISPLAY.

51
L
Instrument panel

Note: In extreme temperatures, the HUD takes

a longer time to display from start-up. This is
to make sure that the HUD always runs at its
optimum temperature.
Note: It may not be possible to see the full HUD
image, while wearing polarised sunglasses.
Note: Do not place anything over the HUD unit,
which is positioned above the Instrument panel,
next to the windscreen.
If cleaning is required, see 199, INSTRUMENT
PANEL, TOUCH SCREEN AND AUDIO SYSTEM
and follow the same cleaning instructions.

52
 R
Warning lamps

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATION

RED warning lamps are for primary warnings. MESSAGE (AMBER)
A primary warning must be investigated
Illuminates when a non-critical
immediately by the driver or qualified assistance
warning message or an information
before continuing.
message is available in the Message
AMBER and YELLOW warning lamps are for centre.
secondary warnings. Some indicate that a
vehicle system is in operation, others indicate LOW OIL PRESSURE (RED)
that the driver must take action and then seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible. If the lamp flashes or illuminates
GREEN and BLUE lamps within the instrument while driving, stop the vehicle as
panel indicate system status. soon as safety permits and switch
off the engine immediately.
LAMP CHECK Check and top up the oil level if necessary. Start
the engine; if the lamp remains illuminated,
A warning lamp bulb check is initiated when the
switch the engine off immediately and seek
ignition system is switched on and lasts for 3
qualified assistance before continuing.
seconds (except for the airbag warning lamp
which will remain on for 6 seconds). If any
warning lamp remains on after this period, BRAKE (RED)
investigate the cause before driving. Illuminates briefly as a bulb check,
Some warning lamps have associated messages when the ignition is switched on. If
displayed in the Message centre. the lamp illuminates while driving,
Note: Not all warning lamps are included in the suspect low brake fluid level or a
check (e.g., high beam headlamps and direction fault with the Electronic Brake
indicators). Distribution (EBD) system.
Note: If a trailer with LED lights is connected to Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
the trailer socket, the bulb check may not be check and top up the brake fluid, if necessary.
performed. If the lamp remains illuminated, seek qualified
assistance before continuing.
CRITICAL WARNING MESSAGE (RED)
PARKING BRAKE (RED)
Illuminates when a critical warning
message is available in the Message Illuminates when the Electric Parking
centre. Brake (EPB) is correctly applied. If
the lamp flashes, a fault has been
detected. Seek qualified assistance
urgently.

53
L
Warning lamps

BATTERY CHARGE (RED) ENGINE/TRANSMISSION (AMBER)

Illuminates as a bulb check, when Illuminates briefly as a bulb check,
the ignition is switched on and when the ignition is switched on. If
extinguishes when the engine is the lamp illuminates when the
started. engine is running, there is an
If the lamp remains on or illuminates while emissions related fault with the
driving, there is a fault with the battery charging engine or transmission. The vehicle
system. Seek qualified assistance urgently. can be driven, but may enter
limp-home mode with the possibility
of reduced performance. Seek
SEAT BELT (RED)
qualified assistance as soon as
Illuminates, accompanied by a possible.
chime, when the vehicle is in motion If the warning lamp flashes while the engine is
and an occupied front seat belt is running, reduce speed and seek qualified
unbuckled. The lamp will extinguish assistance urgently.
when the relevant seat belt is
buckled.
BRAKE (AMBER)
Note: Objects on the front passenger seat may
activate the seat belt reminder feature. It is Illuminates briefly as a bulb check,
recommended that any objects placed on the when the ignition is switched on. If
front passenger seat are secured using the seat the lamp illuminates after starting
belt. See 32, USING THE SEAT BELTS. the engine or while driving, suspect
worn brake pads or a fault with the
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (RED)
system.
If the Lane departure warning The vehicle can still be driven with care, but
system detects that the vehicle has seek qualified assistance urgently.
crossed either of the lane markings
that it is travelling within, without DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)
activation of the appropriate
direction indicator, then the relevant
(AMBER)
lane will illuminate red. This will also Flashes when DSC is active.
be accompanied by a vibration felt
through the steering wheel.
If there is a fault, it will remain illuminated and
the Message centre will display DSC NOT
AVAILABLE. The vehicle can still be driven, but
without DSC assistance. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

54
 R
Warning lamps

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) GLOW PLUGS (AMBER)

OFF (AMBER) Illuminates when the ignition is
Illuminates when DSC is switched switched on, to indicate that the
off. A chime will sound and a glow plugs are active.
confirmation message will be
displayed in the Message centre. AUTOMATIC SPEED LIMITER (AMBER)
Illuminates when the Automatic
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) Speed Limiter (ASL) is active.
(AMBER)
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check,
FOLLOW MODE (AMBER)
when the ignition is switched on.
Illuminates when the Adaptive
If the lamp remains on or illuminates while Cruise Control (ACC) system is in
driving, there is a fault with the ABS system. Follow mode.
Drive with care, avoiding heavy brake
application and seek qualified assistance EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE (AMBER)
urgently.
Illuminates when the external
AIRBAG (AMBER) temperature is low enough that ice
may be present on the road.
Illuminates as a bulb check, when
the ignition is switched on, and LOW FUEL WARNING (AMBER)
extinguishes after 6 seconds.
Illuminates when the fuel level is
If the lamp illuminates again, after the bulb
low. Refuel at the earliest
check, or when driving, there is a fault with the
opportunity.
airbag system. Seek qualified assistance as
soon as possible. The arrow shows which side of the vehicle to
locate the fuel filler cap.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AMBER) TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (YELLOW)
Illuminates when there is a system
fault. The headlamps will still The warning lamp illuminates,
operate, but without this feature accompanied by a message in the
operating correctly. Seek qualified Message centre, to warn that one or
assistance as soon as possible. more tyres are significantly
under-inflated. Stop the vehicle as
REAR FOG LAMP (AMBER) soon as possible, check the tyre
pressures and inflate to the
Illuminates when the rear fog lamps recommended pressure.
are switched on. The lamp will flash to indicate a system fault.

55
L
Warning lamps

GEAR SHIFT (GREEN) FRONT FOG LAMPS (GREEN)

The gear shift indicator illuminates Illuminates when the front fog lamps
briefly at the recommended gear are switched on.
change point (up-shift).
The shift indicator will not illuminate while
Cruise control is active and not being overridden
DIRECTION INDICATORS (GREEN)
by pressing the throttle pedal. The appropriate warning lamp will
Note: This warning indicator is only a guide. It flash when the direction indicators
remains the responsibility of the driver to are operated.
operate the vehicle in an appropriate manner
for the prevailing conditions. TRAILER DIRECTION INDICATORS
(GREEN)
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (GREEN)
Illuminates as a bulb check when
Illuminates continuously when Hill the ignition is switched on and
Descent Control (HDC) is selected extinguishes when the engine is
and HDC operating conditions are started.
met. See 144, HDC CONTROLS. If a trailer is attached, the warning lamp will
If the lamp flashes, HDC has been selected, but flash in conjunction with the direction indicator
the operating conditions are not being met or warning lamp. If the lamp fails to flash, the
HDC fade-out is occurring. direction indicator bulb on the trailer may be
faulty.
CRUISE CONTROL (GREEN) Note: If the attached and connected trailer is
fitted with LED lights, the bulb check may not
Illuminates when Cruise control or
be performed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
active.
AUTO HIGH BEAM (GREEN)
FORWARD ALERT (GREEN) Illuminates when the Auto high beam feature
has switched on the high beams.
Illuminates when Forward alert is
active. INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN)
Illuminates when the engine is shut
SIDE LAMPS (GREEN) down by the Intelligent stop/start
Illuminates when the side lamps are system.
switched on. Note: Other warnings normally associated with
an engine shutdown, for example, the ignition
warning lamp, do not illuminate during an
engine shutdown by the Intelligent stop/start
system.

56
 R
Warning lamps

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (GREEN)

Illuminates grey to confirm the Lane
departure warning system is
enabled. Recognised lane markings
will illuminate green, otherwise they
will illuminate grey.

HIGH BEAM (BLUE)

Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are switched on or
flashed.

57
L
Exterior lights

LIGHTING CONTROL

1. With the headlamps on, push the control Note: Low exterior light levels, caused by
away from the steering wheel to select high adverse weather conditions, may also cause
beam. The Instrument panel warning lamp the Auto lamps to activate.
will illuminate. See 57, HIGH BEAM (BLUE). 6. Front fog lamps: Will operate only while side
Note: Do not use high beam where it may lamps, headlamps or Auto lamps are
distract other road users. selected. Turn the collar away from the
2. Pull the control towards the steering wheel steering wheel and release. The Instrument
and release to flash the high beam on and panel warning lamp will illuminate. See 56,
off. The high beam will remain on for as FRONT FOG LAMPS (GREEN).
long as the switch is held. To turn off the front fog lamps: Turn the
collar away from the steering wheel again
3. Side lamps: Rotate the control to this
and release.
position to switch the side lamps on. The
Instrument panel warning lamp will 7. Rear fog lamps: Will operate only while side
illuminate. See 56, SIDE LAMPS (GREEN). lamps, headlamps or Auto lamps are
selected. Turn the collar towards the
4. Headlamps: Rotate the control to this
steering wheel and release. The Instrument
position to switch the headlamps on.
panel warning lamp will illuminate. See 55,
5. AUTO: With Auto lamps selected, when the REAR FOG LAMP (AMBER).
ambient light fades and the ignition is on, To turn off the rear fog lamps: Turn the
the side lamps, tail lamps, dipped beam collar towards the steering wheel again and
headlamps and licence plate lamps will release.
switch on automatically. Headlamp courtesy
delay, Auto high beam and the Windscreen
wipers detection may also be activated.

58
 R
Exterior lights

In the event of a bulb failure, it should be noted AUTO HIGH BEAM

that some bulbs are renewable only by a
This feature of the Xenon lighting automatically
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. See 190, CHANGING
selects and deselects the high beam, under
A BULB.
specific conditions of road lighting and in the
Instructional video - Auto lamps. absence of other vehicle’s lights. The system is
only active when the ambient light drops below
a predetermined level.
Note: It is not recommended that Auto high
beam is used while driving off road.
For Auto high beam to become operational, the
lighting control must be in the AUTO position
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (5), with dipped beam headlamps selected.
The Daytime running lamps are LED lamps. The Instrument panel warning lamp illuminates
With the lighting control in the OFF position or when Auto high beam is selected. See 56,
in the AUTO position, while the lighting AUTO HIGH BEAM (GREEN).
conditions do not require the headlamps to be Auto high beam will activate only when the
on, then the Daytime running lamps will switch vehicle's speed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph). The
on automatically under the following conditions: system will deactivate when the vehicle's speed
• The engine is running. drops below 24 km/h (15 mph).
• The gear selector is out of Park (P) To manually select high beam, move the control
(automatic transmission). to the high beam position, as normal. To return
to Auto high beam, move the control back to
• The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is not the central position.
applied - market dependent.
To manually override to dipped beam from high
Unless required or prohibited by law, beam, pull the control to the flash position (2)
the Daytime running lamps feature and Auto high beam will be cancelled. To return
can be disabled or enabled by a to Auto high beam, push the control to the high
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. beam position (1) and then return it to the
central position.
HEADLAMP COURTESY DELAY To turn off Auto high beam, turn the lighting
This feature operates whenever the lighting control from AUTO to headlamps.
control is in the AUTO (5) position and the This feature can be disabled/enabled via the
ignition is turned off. The headlamps will remain Vehicle Set-up menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT
illuminated for up to 240 seconds. PANEL MENU.
Note: The time delay may be changed via the The following may affect the operation of Auto
Vehicle Set-up menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT high beam:
PANEL MENU.
• Highly reflective road signs.
The Courtesy delay can be switched off at any
• Dimly lit road users, for example, cyclists
time, by pressing the headlamp button on the
or pedestrians.
Smart key.

59
L
Exterior lights

• Adverse weather conditions, for example, HEADLAMP LEVELLING

rain or fog.
• Dirty or obscured sensor.
• Dirty, damaged, or misted windscreen.
• Oncoming vehicles partially obscured by a
central highway barrier.
Note: The system cannot be relied upon to
activate or deactivate high beam in all possible
circumstances. It remains the driver’s
responsibility to use the headlamps correctly at
all times. Use the headlamp levelling control to account
for vehicle loading changes. Press the switch
Note: Make sure the forward-facing sensors on
to release and then rotate to the required
the back of the rear-view mirror are not blocked
position.
or obstructed.
Vehicle load Switch position
WINDSCREEN WIPER DETECTION Driver only 0
If Auto lamps is selected and the windscreen Driver and front seat 0
wipers are switched on for 20 seconds or more, passenger
the side lamps, tail lamps and headlamps will
switch on automatically. When the wipers are Driver and passengers in 1
switched off, the lamps will automatically switch all seats
off 2 minutes later. Maximum gross vehicle 2
weight
HEADLAMPS - CONDENSATION Driver and maximum rear 3
Misting of lamp lenses can occur under some axle load
atmospheric conditions. This will not affect the
performance of the lamps and will clear during
normal operation.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS)
HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD With the headlamps on, the AFS will adjust the
beams when cornering to provide an improved
The headlamp beam pattern is suitable for
illumination in the direction of travel.
driving on either side of the road. There is no
need for any mechanical adjustment or external The AFS is deactivated when:
decals. • Reverse (R) gear is selected.
• The vehicle is stationary.

60
 R
Exterior lights

If a system fault is detected, the headlamps will

attempt to move to the central position and then
remain stationary. The AFS warning indicator
will illuminate to indicate that a fault is present.
See 55, ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AMBER).
If the warning lamp illuminates, contact a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as possible.

61
L
Interior lights

INTERIOR LIGHTS

1. Footwell lamps: Illuminate when the doors 4. Front interior lamp: Illuminates when the
are unlocked and extinguish 60 seconds doors are unlocked and extinguishes 60
after all of the doors are closed, when the seconds after all of the doors are closed,
engine starts or when the vehicle is locked. when the engine starts or when the vehicle
2. Glovebox lamp: Illuminates when the is locked. Move a finger close to (or touch)
glovebox is opened. the lens to switch on and off manually.
Touch the lens for 2 seconds to
3. Map reading lamps: Move a finger close to
deactivate/activate automatic illumination.
(or touch) the relevant lens to switch on/off.
Note: If you are wearing gloves, it may be
necessary to touch the lens to operate the
lamps.
5. Sun visor lamps: Press the switch to turn
on and off.

62
 R
Interior lights

6. Rear interior/reading lamps: Illuminate when

the doors are unlocked and extinguish 60
seconds after all of the doors are closed,
when the engine starts or when the vehicle
is locked. Press the switch to switch on and
off manually. Touch the front courtesy lamp
lens for approximately 2 seconds to
deactivate/activate automatic illumination
of the rear interior lamps.
7. Rear interior/reading lamps: As item 6, fitted
to 7 seat vehicles only.
8. Loadspace lamp: Illuminates when the
tailgate is opened.

INTERIOR LIGHTS INTENSITY

While the exterior lamps are turned on, the
intensity of the interior switch illumination can
be adjusted. See 290, DRIVER CONTROLS.

AMBIENT LIGHTING
On some vehicles the LED ambient lighting can
be configured for colour and intensity through
the Touch screen. Although the exterior lamps
must be turned on while changes are being
made, a 1 second preview of any changes made
can be seen if the exterior lamps are turned off.
See 80, EXTRA FEATURES.
Note: Vehicles without configurable ambient
lighting will illuminate the standard white light
for the interior lamps.

63
L
Wipers and washers

WIPER OPERATION 1. Automatic rain sensing mode: The front

wipers will respond and adapt automatically
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
to the ambient rain conditions, selecting the
screen.
appropriate wiper frequency for the
In freezing or hot conditions, make sure prevailing conditions. The sensitivity of the
the wipers have not stuck to the glass. system can be adjusted by rotating the
Use the winter park position to lift the collar (2).
wiper blades away from the screen. See Make sure the wipers are switched off
66, WINTER PARK POSITION. before entering a car wash. If the
Remove any snow, ice or frost from the automatic rain sensing system operates
windscreen, around the wiper arms and during the car washing process, damage
blades, and the windscreen scuttle, may occur to the wiper mechanism.
before operating the wipers. 2. Rotate the collar to adjust the sensitivity of
the automatic rain sensing mode when
position (1) is selected. The higher the
sensitivity position the more responsive the
system will become.
When automatic rain sensing mode is
selected, or when sensitivity is increased,
the system will perform a single wipe.
3. Low speed continuous wipe.
4. High speed continuous wipe.
5. A single wipe of the windscreen, or hold
down for further continuous wipes.
6. Windscreen wash/wipe: Pull and release to
operate the front washers and wipers. The
wipers will operate for 2 further wipes after
the control is released. After a few seconds,
a drip wipe will clear any residual washer
fluid from the windscreen. If more washer
fluid is required, pull and hold the control
position.
Note: The front wipers will not operate while
the bonnet is open.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: 7. INT: Rear wiper, intermittent operation.
Wiper frequency will increase with vehicle
speed.
8. ON: Rear wiper, continuous operation.

64
 R
Wipers and washers

9. Rear window wash/wipe: Press and release 9. Rear window wash/wipe: Press and release
to operate the rear washer and wiper. The to operate the rear washer and wiper. The
wiper will operate in a set cycle to minimise wiper will operate in a set cycle to minimise
drips when the button is released. If more drips when the button is released. If more
washer fluid is required, push and hold the washer fluid is required, push and hold the
button. button.
Vehicles without a rain sensor: Note: When reverse gear is selected and the
1. Intermittent wipe: The time delay between front wipers are operating, the rear wiper will
wipes can be adjusted by rotating the collar activate.
(2). Note: The rear wiper will not operate while the
Make sure the wipers are switched off tailgate is open.
before entering a car wash. If the wipers Note: If the wipers leave smears on the glass
operate during the car washing process, after the vehicle has been washed, this may be
damage may occur to the wiper due to wax or other residue. Should this occur,
mechanism. clean the glass with the recommended Land
2. Rotate the collar to adjust the time delay Rover screen cleaning paste. See 248,
between wipes when position (1) is LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.
selected. The higher the setting, the more Note: The windscreen will no longer be wiped
frequently wipes occur. effectively and the automatic rain sensing
Note: Wipe frequency will increase with function will degrade if the wipers become worn.
vehicle speed. Always replace worn or damaged wiper blades
as soon as possible. The wipers service position
3. Low speed continuous wipe.
will move the wipers to allow wiper blade
4. High speed continuous wipe. replacement. See 195, WIPERS SERVICE
5. A single wipe of the windscreen, or hold POSITION.
down for further continuous wipes. Note: If the wiper blades become stuck or
6. Windscreen wash/wipe: Pull and release to jammed, an electronic cut-out will temporarily
operate the front washers and wipers. The halt the wiper's operation. If this happens,
wipers will operate for 2 further wipes after switch off the wipers and the vehicle's ignition,
the control is released. After a few seconds, when safe to do so. Clear any obstructions and
a drip wipe will clear any residual washer free the wiper blades, before attempting to
fluid from the windscreen. If more washer switch on the ignition.
fluid is required, pull and hold the control
position. RAIN SENSOR
Note: The front wipers will not operate while The rain sensor (if fitted) is mounted on the
the bonnet is open. inside of the windscreen, behind the rear-view
7. INT: Rear wiper, intermittent operation. mirror. The sensor is able to detect the presence
Wiper frequency will increase with vehicle and amount of water on the windscreen and
speed. automatically activate the windscreen wipers
8. ON: Rear wiper, continuous operation. accordingly.

65
L
Wipers and washers

Note: Static droplets may not be detected on DRIP WIPE

initial start-up. A single wipe should be used to
If the drip wipe function is configured, the
clear the windscreen.
wipers will operate a few seconds after a
To activate the rain sensitive wipers, move the wash/wipe cycle has finished, to clear any
wiper control to the AUTO position. The remaining drips from the windscreen.
behaviour of the system may be adjusted to the
driver's preference by rotating the collar (2). This function can be
enabled/disabled by a
Note: If the wiper control is turned to the AUTO
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
position, the wipers will not operate if either of
the front doors are open.
WINTER PARK POSITION
Note: In dry and often sunny conditions, optical
influences and dirt accumulation on the To avoid damage to the bonnet, do not
windscreen may result in the windscreen wipers lift the wiper blades when they are in the
activating inadvertently. To prevent this, it is normal parked position.
recommended that, under these conditions, the The wipers can be set to park in a higher
wiper controls are returned to the OFF position. position than normal. This allows the wiper
blades to be lifted away from the screen, while
SPEED-DEPENDENT MODE the vehicle is stationary, to limit the risk of
Front wipers freezing to the glass and to facilitate the removal
of debris or obstructions, for example, snow,
If the vehicle's speed drops below 8 km/h (5
mud, leaves, etc. The Winter park position can
mph) with the wipers operating, the wipers will
be enabled/disabled from the Vehicle Set-up
switch to the next lowest speed. When the
menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
vehicle's speed increases to over 8 km/h (5
mph), the original wiper speed setting will be Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the wipers
restored automatically. in the Winter park position. The wipers should
always be reset to their normal park position
Vehicles without a rain sensor fitted will also
before the vehicle is driven.
increase the frequency of the intermittent front
wipe when the vehicle's speed increases.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
This feature can be enabled/disabled The optional headlamp power wash operates
by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer. automatically with the windscreen wash and
Rear wiper will operate only if the headlamps are switched
on and there is sufficient washer fluid in the
The frequency of the intermittent rear wiper will reservoir.
increase when the vehicle's speed increases.
Headlamp wash operates every fourth operation
This feature can be enabled/disabled of the screen washers, provided the headlamps
by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer. are still switched on and approximately 10
minutes have elapsed since the last headlamp
wash.

66
 R
Wipers and washers

Switching the headlamps or the ignition off and

back on again, will reset the cycle. See 58,
LIGHTING CONTROL, or 108, SWITCHING OFF
THE ENGINE.
Note: The headlamps are washed alternately to
prevent the washer fluid from reducing the light
output from both headlamps simultaneously.

67
L
Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

1. Mirror selector switches: Press to select the Note: An amount of knock protection is
left or right mirror. designed into the door mirrors. If a mirror is
2. Mirror adjustment switch: Move accidentally knocked inwards or manually folded
up/down/left or right to adjust the mirror's inwards, the mirror head will be disengaged
glass position. from the folding mechanism. To re-engage the
mechanism, fold then unfold the mirror using
3. Press both mirror selector switches
the switch.
together to fold/unfold the mirrors
(power-fold option). The mirrors can be configured by a
The mirrors can be adjusted and folded when Dealer/Authorised Repairer to
the ignition is on and for up to 5 minutes after automatically fold when the vehicle
the ignition is switched off, provided the driver’s is locked, and unfold when it is
door is not opened. unlocked.
Note: Power-fold will operate only if the Note: If the mirrors were folded using the
vehicle's speed is below 113 km/h (70 mph). switches, they will not unfold when the vehicle
is unlocked.
Note: The rear-view door mirror heaters operate
automatically according to the external
temperature and windscreen wiper operation.

68
 R
Mirrors

MIRROR DIP WHEN REVERSING

If the vehicle is equipped with memory seats,
when Reverse (R) is selected, the door mirrors
can be set to automatically adjust, providing an
improved viewing angle of the kerb side for
reversing.
The automatic mirror dip feature can be enabled
or disabled using the Vehicle Set-up menu. See
49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
The exact dipped position can be adjusted while
the mirrors are dipped:
1. With the ignition on, select Reverse (R).
2. With the mirror adjust controls, adjust to
the desired dip position.
3. Select Neutral (N). This will store your
setting for future use.
The next time Reverse (R) is selected, the newly
adjusted position will be selected.
When the gear selector is moved out of Reverse
(R), the mirrors will return to their previous
position.
Note: If the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h (4
mph) in Reverse (R), the mirrors will return to
their normal driving position for enhanced
visibility.

HEATED MIRRORS
The rear-view door mirror heaters operate
automatically according to the external
temperature and windscreen wiper operation.

69
L
Blind spot monitoring

BLIND SPOT MONITOR The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system monitors
a zone that covers the area adjacent to the
The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system
vehicle, that is not easily visible by the driver
is a supplement to, not a replacement
and is designed to identify any object overtaking
for, a safe driving style and use of the
the vehicle. The system uses a radar on each
exterior and rear-view mirrors.
side of the vehicle to identify any overtaking
Please note that BSM may not be able vehicle/object within the blind spot area of the
to give adequate warning of vehicles vehicle, while disregarding other objects which
approaching very quickly from behind may be stationary or travelling in the opposite
or vehicles that are being overtaken direction, etc.
rapidly.
BSM may not be able to detect all
vehicles and may also detect objects
such as roadside barriers, etc.
The radar sensors may be impaired by
mud, rain, frost, ice, snow or road
spray. This may affect the system's
ability to reliably detect a
vehicle/object within the blind spot.
Make sure the warning indicators in the
exterior mirrors are not obscured by
stickers or other objects.
Do not attach stickers or objects to the
rear bumpers, that may interfere with
the radar sensors.

If an object is identified by the BSM system as

being an overtaking vehicle/object, an amber
warning icon (1) illuminates in the relevant
exterior mirror, to alert the driver that there is
a potential hazard in the vehicle's blind spot and
therefore, that a lane change might be
dangerous.
The radar monitors the area extending from the
exterior mirror rearwards, to approximately 6
metres (20 feet) behind the rear wheels and up
to 2.5 metres (8.2 feet) from the side of the
vehicle (the width of a typical carriageway lane).
Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTE
countries.

70
 R
Blind spot monitoring

Note: The system covers an area of a fixed lane

width. If the lanes are narrower than a typical
carriageway lane, objects travelling in
non-adjacent lanes may be detected.
The BSM automatically switches on and
becomes active when the vehicle is travelling
at more than 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forward gear.
When the system initiates, it performs a
self-check, during which the warning icons in
the mirrors illuminate alternately for a short
period of time.
The indicator dot (2) remains illuminated until
the vehicle's forward speed exceeds 10 km/h
(6 mph).
The BSM is automatically disabled and an amber
warning indicator dot is displayed in the exterior
mirrors when:
• Any transmission is engaged in reverse
gear.
• Park (P) is selected for vehicles with
automatic transmission.
• The vehicle's speed is below 5 km/h (3
mph).
• The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is applied.
Note: Automatic disabling of the BSM does not
apply to vehicles with Reverse traffic detection.
See 125, REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTION.
The BSM is designed to work most effectively
when driving on multi-lane highways.
The BSM can be enabled or disabled through
the Instrument panel menu. See 49,
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
Note: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on
both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the
warning icons in both external mirrors will
illuminate.
Note: The BSM is disabled when a trailer is
attached.

71
L
Blind spot monitoring

CLOSING VEHICLE SENSING

The Closing vehicle detection system In addition to the functionality provided by the
is a supplement to, not a replacement Blind Spot Monitor (BSM), the Closing vehicle
for, a safe driving style and use of the detection system monitors a larger area behind
exterior and rear-view mirrors. the vehicle (1). If a vehicle is identified by the
The radar sensors may be impaired by system as being a rapidly approaching vehicle
mud, rain, frost, ice, snow or road (2), the amber warning icon will flash in the
spray. This may affect the system's relevant mirror to indicate that there is a
ability to reliably detect an potential hazard and therefore, that a lane
approaching vehicle. change might be dangerous. When the vehicle
reaches the area monitored by the BSM (3), the
Please note that the Closing vehicle
amber warning icon will illuminate continuously.
detection system may not be able to
give adequate warning of vehicles The radar monitors the area extending from the
approaching very quickly from directly exterior mirror rearwards, to approximately 70
behind the vehicle. Always use the metres (230 feet) behind the rear wheels, and
exterior and rear-view mirrors. up to approximately 2.5 metres (8 feet) from
the side of the vehicle.
Make sure the warning indicators in the
exterior mirrors are not obscured by Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTE
stickers or other objects. countries.
Do not attach stickers or objects to the Note: The system covers an area of a fixed lane
rear bumpers, that may interfere with width. If the lanes are narrower than a typical
the radar sensors. carriageway lane, objects travelling in
non-adjacent lanes may be detected.
Note: If a rapidly overtaking vehicle is detected
on both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the
warning icons in both mirrors will flash.

72
 R
Blind spot monitoring

Note: The Closing vehicle detection system is

disabled when a trailer is attached.
Note: When the BSM is disabled through the
Instrument panel menu, the Closing vehicle
detection system is also disabled. See 49,
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.

BSM SENSORS
The BSM system will automatically disable if
either of the sensors become completely
obscured, an amber warning indicator dot is
displayed in the exterior mirror and the message
BLIND SPOT MONITOR SENSOR BLOCKED
appears in the Message centre.
Note: Blockage testing is only initiated when
the vehicle's speed is above 10 km/h (6 mph)
and will take at least 2 minutes of accumulated
driving above this speed, to determine that the
sensor is blocked.
If the sensors become blocked, then please
check that there is nothing obscuring the rear
bumper and that it is clear from ice, frost and
dirt.
If a fault with one of the radar sensors is
detected, an amber warning indicator dot is
displayed in the exterior mirror and the message
BLIND SPOT MONITOR NOT AVAILABLE is
displayed in the Message centre.
Note: Even if the detected fault only affects the
radar sensor on one side of the vehicle, the
whole system is disabled. If the fault is
temporary, the system will operate correctly
once the engine has been switched off and then
on again.
If a fault in the system occurs, consult a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

73
L
Garage door opener

GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER For the best results, fit a new battery to the
hand-held transmitter of the garage door opener
Do not use the transceiver with any
(or other device) before programming. If your
garage door opener that lacks the
garage door opener receiver (located in the
safety stop and reverse feature, as
garage) is equipped with an antenna, make sure
required by safety standards.
the antenna is hanging straight down.
When programming the transceiver to
a garage door opener or entry gate,
PROGRAMMING
make sure the area is clear. This will
prevent potential harm or damage, as
the gate or garage door will activate
during the program.
This device may suffer from interference
if operated in the vicinity of a mobile or
fixed station transmitter. This
interference is likely to affect the
hand-held transmitter as well as the
in-car transceiver.
With the engine switched off:
The door transceiver is located in the rear-view
mirror. It can be programmed to transmit the 1. Make sure the ignition system is on.
radio frequencies of up to 3 different 2. Hold the end of the original garage door
transmitters, which can be used to operate opener hand-held transmitter 50 to 150 mm
garage doors, entry gates, home lighting, (2 to 6 ins) away from the transceiver in the
security systems or other radio frequency rear-view mirror; keeping the indicator lamp
operated devices. in view.
Although this section mainly describes the 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press
procedures for a garage door opener, it equally and hold both the chosen transceiver button
applies to the previously mentioned on the rear-view mirror, as shown above,
applications. and the hand-held transmitter button. Keep
In some countries, this feature is also known both buttons pressed. The indicator lamp
as the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. will flash slowly at first and then change to
a fast flash. When the indicator lamp flashes
For further information, see 76, INFORMATION rapidly, release both buttons. The rapid
AND ASSISTANCE. flashing lamp indicates successful
programming.
BEFORE PROGRAMMING 4. If, after 60 seconds, the indicator lamp does
When programming a device that may not flash rapidly, release both the
require you to press and re-press the transceiver and the hand-held transmitter
hand-held transmitter (cycle), unplug buttons and repeat the procedure, starting
the device during the cycling process to with Step 2. Position the hand-held
prevent possible motor failure. transmitter at a different angle and/or
distance.

74
 R
Garage door opener

5. Press and hold the programmed garage • The name of the button or switch may
door opener button and observe the vary between manufacturers.
indicator lamp. 2. Press and release the learn or smart button.
• If the indicator lamp illumination is 3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
continuous, programming is complete hold the programmed garage door opener
and your device should operate when button for 2 seconds, and release.
the garage door opener button is
4. Repeat the press, hold, release sequence 3
pressed and held for approximately 1
times to complete the programming
to 2 seconds, and then released.
process.
• If the indicator lamp blinks rapidly for
The garage door opener in the rear-view mirror
2 seconds and then illuminates
should now activate the rolling code device.
continuously, proceed with the
following programming instructions for
rolling code device equipment. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER BUTTON
TO ERASE ALL PROGRAMMING To programme a device to a previously
For first time programming, make sure the programmed button:
engine is switched off: 1. Press and hold the desired pre-programmed
1. Make sure the ignition is on (but with the garage door opener button for at least 20
engine switched off). seconds, but no longer than 30 seconds,
until the indicator lamp begins to flash.
2. Press and hold the 2 outer buttons on the
transceiver in the rear-view mirror. Keep 2. Without releasing the rear-view mirror
the buttons pressed until the indicator lamp button, position the hand-held transmitter
begins to flash (this will take approximately approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6 ins)
10 seconds), then release the buttons. away from the transceiver in the rear-view
mirror; keeping the indicator lamp in view.
All memories in the garage door opener have
now been cleared. 3. Carry out Step 3 of Programming.
Note: Do not perform this procedure when
programming the additional garage door opener ENTRY GATE PROGRAMMING
buttons. The technology of some entry gates requires
you to press and re-press (cycle) the hand-held
ROLLING CODE DEVICE EQUIPMENT transmitter button every 2 seconds during
programming.
PROGRAMMING
Continue to press and hold the desired rear-view
Note: The assistance of a second person, may
mirror button while you cycle your hand-held
make the following steps quicker and easier.
transmitter until the indicator lamp flashes
Once the button has been pressed, there are
rapidly.
only 30 seconds in which to complete Step 3.
1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor
head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or
smart button/switch.

75
L
Garage door opener

INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE

It is recommended that when you sell
or dispose of the vehicle, the
programmed transceiver buttons be
erased for security purposes.
For information on the range of available
compatible products or accessories, or for
assistance, you should contact a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or contact
HomeLink via their website.
Note: Keep the original transmitter for future
use or programming procedures if, for example,
you purchase a new vehicle.
Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for
any radio or TV interference caused by
unauthorised modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

76
 R
Windows

ELECTRIC WINDOWS If children are carried in the rear seats,

the isolator switch should be used to
To prevent accidental operation, never
prevent operation of the windows and
leave the Smart key in the vehicle if
doors. If the windows or doors are
children or animals are also left in the
operated by young children there is a
vehicle.
risk of serious injury or death.

ROOF BLIND

1. Window switches: Briefly pull a switch fully Roof blind open/close switch: To open the blind,
up and release; the window will continue to push from the rear of the switch and release.
rise until fully closed. Briefly press a switch The blind will slide fully open.
fully down and release; the window will
To close the blind, push from the front of the
continue to lower until fully open. Pressing
switch to the first position and release. The blind
or pulling a switch again will stop window
will fully close. A further press will stop
movement.
movement of the blind.
The windows will operate for 5 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, as long as none Alternatively, push from the front of the switch
of the doors are opened. to the second position and hold until the blind
Rear windows have a short drop feature for reaches the desired position, then release.
passenger comfort. The first press of a
switch will lower the window a short ANTI-TRAP PROTECTION
distance, to give a flow of air. A second Closing a window or roof blind onto any
press will lower the window to its full extent. part of the body can result in serious
If a resonance or booming sound occurs injury.
when a rear window is open, lowering an
Before closing a window or the roof
adjacent front window by approximately 25
blind, make sure no occupants have
mm (1 in.) will eliminate the condition.
any part of their body in a position
2. Rear window and door isolator switch: where it could be trapped. Even with
Press the switch, the rear windows and an anti-trap system, death or serious
doors are isolated when the indicator light injury could occur.
in the switch is illuminated.

77
L
Windows

Anti-trap protection will stop window or roof

blind movement if an obstruction or resistance
is detected. Check the window or roof blind,
and its aperture, and remove any obstructions
(e.g., ice, etc.).
If it is still necessary to raise the window, the
override procedure is as follows:
1. Attempt to close the window; anti-trap will
prevent closure and lower the window
slightly.
2. Within 10 seconds, attempt to raise the
window again; anti-trap will prevent closure
and lower the window slightly.
3. Attempt to close the window for a third
time, this time hold the switch in the close
position. Hold until closed.
Note: If this procedure fails to remove the
blockage, the window operation may need to
be reset.

78
 R
Touch screen

TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS

Do not adjust the Touch screen 4. Touch the screen or press the button, to
controls, or allow the system to distract select the Media system; or if the Media
the driver, while the vehicle is moving. system is already switched on, touch to
Always run the engine during prolonged select the current media source menu.
use of the Touch screen. Failure to do Note: When the system is active, current
so may discharge the vehicle's battery; information for the media being played is
preventing the engine from starting. displayed.
Avoid spilling or splashing liquids onto 5. Clock: The clock can be adjusted via the
the Touch screen. System option, in the General settings
Note: The Touch screen display and the number menu.
of pages will vary, depending on the 6. Touch to select the Climate system. See
specification of the vehicle. 83, AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL.
1. Press to select the HOME menu screen. 7. Screen title.
2. Press to select the General settings menu 8. Touch to select the audio source.
screen, see 80, GENERAL SETTINGS, or if 9. Touch the screen or press the button, to
Park assist is fitted, see 126, PARK ASSIST. select the Telephone system. See 163,
3. Status icons: When a phone is connected, TELEPHONE SYSTEM OVERVIEW.
the battery level and network signal strength 10. Touch the screen or press the button, to
is displayed. Also, when selected, TA select the Navigation system. The current
(Traffic announcements). destination route, or the NAV MENU screen
will be displayed. See 169, THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM.

79
L
Touch screen

11. Touch the arrow or swipe the screen, to GENERAL SETTINGS

select the next page, which contains the
The General settings menu screen is divided
Extra features available on the vehicle. See
into categories. Touch to display the list of
80, EXTRA FEATURES.
settings for the required system:
12. Touch to select the General settings menu
• System
screen.
• Display
13. Number of pages indicator: A solid dot
indicates the screen selected. • Media
14. Press to turn the Touch screen on/off, or, • Bluetooth
if Surround cameras are fitted, the screen • Phone
can be turned off in Extra features. • Navigation
15. Press to mute the sound, or, if Parking aids • Climate
are fitted, see 122, USING THE PARKING
Note: The list will vary, depending on the
AID.
specification of the vehicle.
TOUCH SCREEN USE
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Do not use excessive pressure when
The System settings screen is divided into
selecting items on the Touch screen.
categories and is selected via the General
Definitions for the various button taps and touch settings menu:
screen gestures used in this handbook:
• Language: Select the language required.
• Touch: Briefly touch the screen's surface
• Time & Date: Select to change the time and
with your fingertip.
date.
• Touch and hold: Touch the screen's surface
• Volume settings.
for an extended period of time.
• Beep: Turn ON/OFF.
• Swipe: Move your fingertip over the
screen's surface in a fast linear movement. • Animations: Turn ON/OFF.
• Drag: Touch an object and move it with your • Automatic text scrolling: Turn ON/OFF.
fingertip over the screen's surface, without • Screensaver: Turn ON/OFF.
losing contact.
• Dynamic Home Menu: Turn ON/OFF.
• Delete all personal data.
TOUCH SCREEN CARE
Note: The list will vary, depending on the
Do not use abrasive cleaners on the
specification of the vehicle.
Touch screen. For approved cleaning
products, contact a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer. EXTRA FEATURES
Touch the required Extra feature to display that
Extra feature information or settings screen:
• Timed climate, see 86, TIMED CLIMATE.

80
 R
Touch screen

• Cameras, see 130, SURROUND CAMERA 3. Valet mode activated is displayed to

SYSTEM. indicate that the PIN has been accepted.
• ECO Data: The ECO Data system is designed The loadspace is now securely locked in Valet
to help the driver maximise fuel economy mode and the Valet mode On screen is
by providing on-screen vehicle data. Touch displayed.
to select the ECO Data home screen. See
141, ECO PROGRAM. DESELECTING VALET MODE
• Valet mode, see 81, SELECTING VALET 1. When you re-enter the vehicle, select Valet
MODE. mode in Extra features.
• Ambient lighting: When selected, the 2. Enter your memorable 4-digit PIN and touch
ambient lighting in the vehicle can be the OK soft key.
changed.
Valet mode deactivated is displayed to indicate
• Wade sensing: When selected, this screen that the PIN has been accepted.
provides information for the driver while
• The loadspace will return to the previously
wading through water. See 146, WADE
set security requirement.
SENSING CONTROLS.
• The Touch screen will be enabled.
• 4 x 4i: When selected, this provides
information for off-road driving. Note: If the PIN is forgotten, Valet mode can
only be deactivated by a Dealer/Authorised
• WiFi hotspot, see 166, INCONTROL WI-FI.
Repairer.
• Screen off: Touch to turn the screen off.
Note: The number of Extra features will vary,
depending on the specification of the vehicle.

SELECTING VALET MODE

Valet mode allows the vehicle to be driven and
locked by a parking attendant, without giving
access to the loadspace. Valet mode also
prevents operation of the Touch screen, to
prevent access to telephone numbers or
navigation addresses.
Each time Valet mode is used, a Personal
Identification Number (PIN) must be entered.
1. Touch Valet mode in Extra features.
2. Enter a memorable 4-digit PIN. You will be
prompted to confirm the PIN. If you wish
to cancel the PIN, select Delete. If the PIN
is cancelled, or incorrectly entered, you will
be prompted to enter the PIN again.

81
L
Heating and ventilation

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

Note: When Eco Program is selected heating Note: The amber tell-tale indicators in the
and ventilation settings are automatically switches will illuminate when the function is
adjusted to reduce energy consumption. See selected.
141, ECO PROGRAM. Note: In low temperatures, it is advisable to
1. Temperature control, rotate to adjust. close the centre face-level vents, and direct air
2. Air distribution: Rotate to direct air flow to flow from the outer face-level vents towards the
the required areas. side windows. This will help to keep the
windows clear of ice.
3. Blower speed: Rotate to adjust air flow
speed through the vents.
4. Seat heaters: Press once to turn on high,
twice to turn on medium, and a third time
to turn on low. Press a forth time to turn
off.
5. Recirculation:
• Press briefly to turn on recirculation for
4 minutes.
• Press and hold to turn on continuous
recirculation.
• When recirculation is in operation,
press briefly to turn off.
6. Heated rear screen: Press to switch on/off.
7. Heated windscreen: Press to switch on/off.
8. Air conditioning: Press to switch on/off.

82
 R
Heating and ventilation

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Note: The Climate control system removes 1. Climate: To access the FRONT CLIMATE
moisture from the air and deposits the excess screen, touch Climate on the HOME menu
water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may form, screen. See 79, TOUCH SCREEN
but this is normal and is no cause for concern. CONTROLS.
Note: The LED indicator lamps, above the 2. Front Seats: Touch to select the Climate
switches, will illuminate when the function is seats settings screen.
selected. 3. Rear A/C: Touch to select the settings
Note: When the ECO program is selected, screen for the third row seats Climate
heating and ventilation settings are control. See 88, CLIMATE CONTROL FOR
automatically adjusted to reduce energy THIRD ROW SEATS.
consumption. See 141, ECO PROGRAM. 4. Timed Climate: Touch to select the TIMED
CLIMATE settings menu. See 86, TIMED
CLIMATE.

83
L
Heating and ventilation

5. Touch to switch the Climate control system 19. Blower speed control: In manual mode,
off. rotate to select the required fan speed for
6. Windscreen air distribution: Touch to switch the selected zone/s. The speed selected is
on/off. indicated by illuminated LEDs.
7. Air distribution: Touch the upper (face 20. AUTO: Press to turn fully automatic mode
distribution) or lower (body/feet on/off. Depending on the specification of
distribution) area to select. the vehicle, the various options for AUTO
mode can be set via the CLIMATE settings.
8. This indicates that the Rear A/C is locked.
To access the Rear A/C lock/unlock feature, 21. MAX A/C: Press to turn the maximum Air
touch Rear A/C. conditioning mode on/off.
9. Sync: Touch to synchronise the driver and Note: In low temperatures, it is advisable to
front passenger Climate zone settings. close the centre face-level vents, and direct air
flow from the outer face-level vents towards the
10. Touch to select the General settings menu,
side windows. This will help to keep the
then to access the Climate settings menu.
windows clear of ice.
11. Heated front seats or Climate front seats:
Instructional video - Climate control.
• If Heaters front seats are fitted: See 85,
HEATED SEATS.
• If Climate front seats are fitted: Press
the switch to select the Climate seats
settings menu screen. See 85,
CLIMATE SEATS.
12. Recirculation: Press for Timed recirculation AIR VENT OPERATION
(recirculation will operate for 4 mins), or
press and hold for continuous recirculation.
Press again to turn off.
Note: Prolonged use at low temperatures
may cause the windows to mist.
13. Heated rear screen: Press to turn on/off.
14. Heated front screen: Press to turn on/off.
15. A/C: Press to turn the Air conditioning
system on/off.
16. Temperature controls for either the driver The vents can be opened using the following
or passenger: Rotate to change the procedure:
temperature. The individual set temperature 1. To open the vent, rotate the thumb wheel
is displayed in the centre of the controls. fully upwards, from the bottom (closed)
17. Press to turn maximum defrost for the position to the (top) open position.
windscreen on/off. 2. After the vent has been opened using the
18. Press to select the FRONT CLIMATE screen. thumb wheel, the direction control can be
used to adjust the direction of air flow.

84
 R
Heating and ventilation

Note: The vent can only be fully closed again Press a second time to set the Heated rear seat
using the thumbwheel. The vent can be closed, at the medium setting; 2 LED indicators
regardless of the position of the directional illuminate.
control. Press a third time to set the Heated rear seat at
Do not insert or attach items to the the lowest setting; 1 LED indicator illuminates.
vents, for example, pens, air fresheners, Press a fourth time to switch off.
etc..
Do not use excessive force while CLIMATE SEATS
operating the vent control or the thumb
Note: The Climate seats will only operate when
wheel.
the engine is running.
If the Climate seat/s are operating when the ECO
HEATED SEATS program is selected, the Climate seat/s will
Note: Heated seats consume a great amount of switch off automatically. The Climate seat/s can
battery power. They will only operate when the be switched on again, but this may affect the
engine is running. vehicle's fuel economy.
If the Heated seat/s are operating when the ECO Press the relevant Climate front seat button to
program is selected, the Heated seat/s will enable. A pop-up menu will appear on the Touch
switch off automatically. The Heated seat/s can screen.
be switched on again, but this may affect the
Heated ventilation
vehicle's fuel economy.
• Touch the up arrow icon to switch heated
Front Heated Seats
ventilation on at the maximum setting (3
Press the relevant Heated front seat button to red bars).
switch the required Heater seat on at the
• Touch the down arrow icon once or twice
maximum setting; the 3 LED indicators in the
to reduce the ventilation setting (2 and 1
button illuminate.
red bars).
Press a second time to set the Heated front seat
• Touch the down arrow icon a third time to
at the medium setting; 2 LED indicators
switch seat ventilation off.
illuminate.
Cooled ventilation
Press a third time to set the Heated front seat
at the lowest setting; 1 LED indicator • Touch the down arrow icon to switch cooled
illuminates. ventilation on at the maximum setting (3
blue bars).
Press a fourth time to switch off.
• Touch the up arrow icon once or twice to
Rear Heated Seats
reduce the ventilation setting (2 and 1 blue
If fitted, the Heated rear seats (non-climate) are bars).
operated using the switches located on the rear
• Touch the up arrow icon a third time to
of the centre console.
switch seat ventilation off.
Press the relevant Heated rear seat button to
switch the required Heated seat on at the
maximum setting; the 3 LED indicators in the
button illuminate.

85
L
Heating and ventilation

Seat zone selection • If the coolant temperature is at, or above,

Constant selection of the Seat zone soft key will its required temperature.
scroll through 3 choices of seat zone; full seat,
cushion, or seatback only. TIMED CLIMATE TOUCH SCREEN
CONTROLS
TIMED CLIMATE The Touch screen can be used to either preset
The Timed climate system, when in operation, activation times or to operate the system
provides a comfortable temperature inside the manually.
cabin in advance of using the vehicle, or When the system is operating, the LED in the
maintains a temperature when leaving the Climate control AUTO button flashes.
vehicle for a short period of time.
Note: The system will cease operation if the
The Timed climate system has control options engine is started.
for either timed or manual setting via the Touch
screen, or it can be operated remotely by using
the Timed climate remote.
Dependent on the external ambient temperature,
the Timed climate system will automatically
choose to draw in fresh air to cool the cabin, or
to operate the auxiliary heater to warm it.
Also, in low ambient temperatures, the auxiliary
heater helps to boost the temperature of the
engine's coolant for improved heater and
starting performance.
Note: When the heater is operating, exhaust
fumes from the heater may be visible exiting
from under the front of the vehicle. This is
normal and is not a cause for concern. To set a Timed climate program:
Do not operate the Timed climate • Select Timed Climate from the Climate
system when refuelling the vehicle. screen or from the Extra features page.
Doing so may cause fuel vapours to • Select either 7 Day Timer (1) or Single
combust, causing a fire/explosion. Event (2). When selected, touch SET (3).
Do not operate the Timed climate 7 Day timer: Select the day, then select the start
system while the vehicle is in an times (hours and minutes) for each of the 2
enclosed space. Doing so can cause a settings, using the arrows. These times can also
build up of highly toxic fumes, which be set for All week.
may cause unconsciousness or death.
Single Event: Set the start time and touch SET.
Timed climate may not operate, or will switch
Note: The time format, 12/24 hour clock, is
off automatically, in the following scenarios:
determined by the time settings currently
• If the fuel level is low. selected in the System settings menu. See 80,
• If the vehicle’s battery charge is low. SYSTEM SETTINGS.

86
 R
Heating and ventilation

A current heating cycle will be cancelled if the • Illuminates red for 2 seconds when the OFF
engine is started. Any programmed heating button is pressed, to indicate that the
cycle may be cancelled by touching the relevant program has stopped.
soft key (1 or 2) on the timer setup menu. • Flashes green or red for 2 seconds then
stops when the ON or OFF buttons are
TIMED CLIMATE REMOTE CONTROLS pressed, to indicate that no action has been
The Timed climate remote control has an taken.
approximate range of 100 metres (110 yards). • Illuminates orange for 2 seconds before
There is no need to point the antenna at the showing green or red, to indicate that the
vehicle. remote battery is low.
• Flashes orange for 5 seconds to indicate
that no action has been taken and the
remote battery should be replaced.
Additional remotes
Extra remote controls can be programmed to
operate the heater. A maximum of 3 remote
controls can be programmed to each vehicle.
Contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer to
purchase extra remote controls and have them
programmed to the vehicle.

1. ON button. REPLACING THE REMOTE BATTERIES

2. OFF button.
3. LED (operation indicator).
4. Antenna.
Note: Avoid touching the antenna when
operating the ON or OFF buttons.
Press and hold the ON button for approximately
2 seconds. The LED will illuminate to confirm
that an automatic heating programme has been
initiated. The LED flashes once every 2 seconds With the back of the remote control facing
to indicate that the heater is active. upwards, use a coin or a similar implement to
The heating program will continue for 20-30 rotate the battery cover. Lift the cover off to
minutes, when it will switch off automatically reveal the battery compartment. Remove the
to prevent the vehicle's battery from old battery and, making sure the correct polarity
discharging. It also turns off automatically if the is maintained, insert a replacement 3.3 volt,
engine is started. CR1/3N battery. Replace the cover and rotate it
The LED indicator signals various states and to lock.
conditions for the heater as follows:

87
L
Heating and ventilation

Note: Avoid touching the new battery.

Moisture/oil from fingers can reduce battery life
and corrode the contacts.

CLIMATE CONTROL FOR THIRD ROW

SEATS
The third row seat climate control provides fan
controlled chilled air through the rear side vents.

Rotate the control to adjust the fan speed.

Third row seat climate can also be controlled
and switch on/off via the front climate control
touch screen. Touch the Rear A/C soft key to
view the options.

88
 R
Storage compartments

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

1. Under seat storage tray: To access the tray, 2. Bag hook.

lift the handle to release and then pull 3. Glovebox: Pull the handle to open.
forwards. Note, there is a tray under each
4. Armrest and cubby box: Pull the release
front seat.
lever and then raise the armrest to access
Do not exceed the maximum storage the storage area.
weight of 1.5 kg (3 lbs).

89
L
Storage compartments

To avoid personal injury, keep hands

and fingers clear from the front and
rear edges of the armrest during the
opening and closing of the cubby box.
5. Cup holders: Slide back the cover to reveal
the cup holders.
Do not drink, or use the drinks holders
when driving.
6. Rear armrest storage and cup holders:
Press the release button to access the
storage compartment.
7. Storage areas.
Make sure that any items stored in the
vehicle are secure and cannot move.
If the vehicle is involved in an
accident, or subject to a sudden
braking or direction change, loose
items can cause serious injury.

90
 R
Storage compartments

AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS

There are 12V power sockets and 5V USB Note: Not fitted if the vehicle has the third
charge sockets fitted to this vehicle. row seat air conditioning control.
Remove the cover to access a 12V power 6. 12V power socket, located in the loadspace.
socket. 7. 5V USB charge socket, located in the
Note: The 12V power sockets can be used to loadspace on vehicles with third row seats.
power approved accessories that use a 8. 12V power socket, located on the rear of
maximum of 120 Watts. the centre console.
Lift the cover to access a 5V USB charge socket. 9. 5V USB charge socket or 12V power socket,
12V and 5V socket locations: located on the rear of the centre console.
1. 12V power socket, located on the centre Note: Socket locations are dependent on the
console. Depending on the vehicle specification of the vehicle.
specification, a 5V USB charge socket may Only use Land Rover approved
be fitted. accessories. Using any other equipment
2. 5V USB charge socket, located on the may damage the vehicle's electrical
passenger side fascia. system and/or cause the battery to
3. 12V power socket, located inside the front discharge. If you are in any doubt,
centre console cubby box. contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
4. 5V USB charge socket, located on the rear The engine should be running when
of the centre console. using accessories for long periods.
Failure to do so can discharge the
5. 5V USB charge socket, located in the
battery.
loadspace on vehicles with third row seats.

91
L
Load carrying

LOAD CARRYING
Never allow passengers to travel in the
loadspace under any circumstances.
All vehicle occupants should be seated
correctly and wear a seat belt at all
times when the vehicle is in motion.
Always make sure objects carried
within the vehicle are secured
properly.

LOADSPACE COVER
Do not store the loadspace cover loose
in the vehicle. During an accident or
sudden manoeuvre, the loadspace
cover could cause serious injury or
death.
Never place objects on top of the
loadspace cover. During an accident
or sudden manoeuver, loose objects
can cause serious injury or death.

1. Using the handle, pull the cover to unroll.

2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
areas, moulded into the loadspace sides.
To retract the loadspace cover, disengage
the ends from the recessed areas and allow
the cover to retract into its housing.
3. To remove the cover, turn the release lever
to unlock the assembly and disengage the
pins from the sockets.
Note: Turn the release lever until resistance
is felt and then pull further to release.
To avoid injury, the loadspace cover
must NOT be left in the installed
position when the third row seats are
occupied.

92
 R
Load carrying

Do not attempt to raise the second row LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

seats into the upright position, or tip
All items carried in the luggage area
them forward for third row access, while
should be properly secured.
the loadspace cover is stowed behind
the second row seats, as damage will
result.
4. To refit the cover assembly, engage the left
side into the recessed area, then engage the
right side, push down into place until a
audible click is heard.

ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS

A loaded roof rack can reduce the
stability of the vehicle, particularly
when cornering and during crosswinds.
Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack
is not recommended.
Fit only a roof rack system that is designed for
use with your vehicle. For further information,
consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The maximum load for a Land Rover approved
roof rack system is 75 kg (165 lb) while driving
on-road. Off-road driving reduces the limit to
50 kg (110 lb). The weight of the approved roof
rack system is not calculated as part of the load.
If an alternative roof rack system is used, the
weight of that system must be included as part
of the load weight.
Loads must be evenly distributed without
overhanging the rack. After travelling 50 km (30
miles), check the security of the roof rack and
any load.

1. Bag hooks: The bag hooks should only be

used for light weight items.
2. Fixed lashing eyes: Use to assist in safely
securing large items.

93
L
Load carrying

3. Adjustable lashing eyes: First turn the

locking button counter-clockwise to unlock.
Press the button and slide to the required
position in the adjusting rail. Release the
button to latch into position. Move the
lashing eye slightly until you hear a click.
The lashing eye is now secured. Turn the
button clockwise to lock.
Note: A range of approved luggage retention
accessories is available from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

94
 R
Towing

TOWING WEIGHTS TOW BALL OPTIONS

See 250, WEIGHTS, for details of the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW), Gross Train Weight
(GTW), axle weights and maximum payload.
• If the vehicle is fully laden, see 250,
WEIGHTS for nose load limitations.
• If it is necessary to increase the nose weight
up to a maximum of 175 kg (385 lb), the
vehicle's load should be reduced
accordingly. This is to make sure that the
GVW and maximum rear axle load are not
exceeded.
Europe only: When towing, the maximum
permissible GVW can be increased by a
maximum of 100 kg (220 lb), provided that the
road speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph) or
less.
Note: When calculating rear axle loading,
remember that the trailer's nose weight, the
load in the vehicle's luggage area, weight on
the rails/roof rack, and the weight of rear seat
passengers must all be added together.

Tow ball options for 5 seat vehicles and 7 seat

vehicles without a spare wheel:
1. Electrically deployable powered tow bar.
See 99, POWERED TOW BAR.
2. Flange mounted, bolt on tow ball.
3. Quick release, detachable tow bar. See 98,
FITTING THE DETACHABLE TOW BAR.
4. Receiver for hitch (drawbar). See 100,
TRAILER HITCH (Australia only).

95
L
Towing

Note: TSA will not operate when Dynamic

Stability Control (DSC) is switched off.

HITCH GUIDANCE
Hitch guidance is a user selectable Touch screen
feature that can aid the process of guiding the
vehicle to a trailer tow hitch. Use Hitch guidance
while reversing the vehicle to a trailer hitch.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select Reverse gear (R). Dependent on the
vehicle's specification, the Touch screen
will automatically display selectable icons
or a menu list. See 130, SURROUND
CAMERA SYSTEM or see 123, REAR
CAMERA.
2. Touch the Rear camera system's Hitch
assist icon, or for Surround camera's, tick
Hitch guidance on the Touch screen to
enable the guidance lines to be displayed.
3. Reverse the vehicle towards the trailer.
Tow ball options for 7 seat vehicles with a spare 4. As the vehicle closes to within 600 mm (2
wheel: ft) of the trailer's tow hitch, an automated
1. Quick release, detachable tow bar. See 98, zoom feature is operated to enlarge the
FITTING THE DETACHABLE TOW BAR. view.
2. Flange mounted, bolt on tow ball. 5. Continue the manoeuvre carefully until the
3. Receiver for hitch (drawbar). See 100, vehicle and trailer are as close as required.
TRAILER HITCH (Australia only).
TOW ASSIST
TRAILER STABILITY ASSIST (TSA) Note: Trailer guidance requires a connected
When a trailer is attached, TSA will automatically trailer to be fitted with a tracking target sticker,
detect when trailer sway is developing. It will which must be attached according to specific
then gradually reduce the vehicle's speed by instructions. Ask your Dealer/Authorised
cutting engine power and applying the brakes Repairer for details.
to help regain control.
TSA will not operate in the event of the
trailer jack-knifing.
The ability of TSA may be reduced when
travelling on slippery surfaces.

96
 R
Towing

Note: This feature may not operate with all

trailer designs.
Trailer guidance aids trailer reversing, by
displaying guide lines on the Touch screen.
Trailer guidance becomes active when a
trailer/caravan is attached to the vehicle and the
trailer's electrical plug is attached to the
vehicle's socket.
Note: The driver's door must be opened and
closed after the trailer/caravan is connected to
the electrical socket, before the system will
detect the connection.
The screen will display a choice for connection.
Select YES to move to the setup screen. Select
NO to return to the previous screen.
Note: If the connection is not detected, setup
can be manually prompted by touching the Tow
Assist soft key on the Camera menu.
On first use, the setup screens take the user
through a series of configuration options for
the connected trailer. Information, such as
trailer hitch length, number of axles and camera
preference, is required to finalise setup. Once
completed, the details are stored for future use.
When a new or existing trailer configuration is
selected, Trailer guidance automatically displays
on the Touch screen when Reverse gear (R) is
selected. Coloured lines are displayed to indicate
the predicted path of both the trailer and vehicle.

97
L
Towing

FITTING THE DETACHABLE TOW BAR

Fit the Detachable tow bar as follows: 5. Remove the protective cover from the key
1. Remove the protective cover from the slot.
vehicle mounting and stow it in the tow bar 6. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to lock
stowage area. the tow bar, then remove the key and refit
2. The tow bar can only be installed when the the protective cover. Store the key in a safe
locking lever is in the unlocked position (red place.
showing). Do not exceed the maximum nose
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and weight for the detachable tow ball. See
push firmly upwards until the tow bar locks 250, WEIGHTS.
into position. When the detachable tow bar is not required for
4. Turn the locking lever towards you until immediate use, it should be removed and
green is showing. stowed in the appropriate place.

98
 R
Towing

REMOVING THE DETACHABLE TOW

BAR
Remove the Detachable tow bar as follows:
1. Insert the key and turn it counter-clockwise
to unlock.
2. Remove the key, then supporting the tow
bar, press and turn the locking lever away
from you, to release.
3. Remove the tow bar and stow it in the
dedicated stowage area under the loadspace
floor. Where this is not provided, the tow
bar should be stowed in the bag provided.
Never leave the detachable tow bar
loose in the vehicle. It could become
a projectile in the event of heavy
braking or an accident.

POWERED TOW BAR

Before activating the Powered tow bar, make
sure that:
1. Powered tow bar button: Press to deploy
• Any trailer is unhitched. or stow the powered tow bar.
• Any trailer electrical connections are • The LED by the side of the button will
disconnected. flash slowly while the powered tow bar
• The vehicle is stationary. is being deployed or stowed, an audible
• The tailgate is open. tone will also sound.
• The vehicle's transmission is in Park (P) or • Once deployed, the LED will stop
Neutral (N). flashing and will be solidly lit.
If not carried out, any of the above conditions • Once stowed, the LED will stop flashing
will stop the tow bar from operating. Also a and will be solidly lit for 2 seconds and
short warning tone will sound if the tow bar will then extinguish.
button is pressed. • To stop movement of the powered tow
bar at any time, press the powered tow
bar button. Press the button again to
fully deploy or stow the tow bar.

99
L
Towing

• If during deployment of the powered When selecting a drawbar for the receiver, the
tow bar an obstruction occurs, the tow following dimensions must be adhered to.
bar movement will stop. The LED will
flash faster, accompanied by a 2 second
warning tone. When the obstruction has
been cleared, press the tow bar button
to reset the tow bar.
• Do not tow when the powered tow bar
is not fully deployed. If this does occur,
a warning tone will sound for 10
seconds.
• In the event of an unexpected operation,
press the tow bar button to reset the
tow bar. During the reset operation, the
powered tow bar will fully stow and
then fully deploy.
Make sure the powered tow bar is fully
deployed before connecting a
trailer/caravan.
Consult a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the
2. Trailer light test button: Press to start a 3 latest information.
minute sequence for vehicle and trailer light
5 seat vehicles and 7 seat vehicles without a
testing.
spare wheel
• For the test to operate, the vehicle's
1. The maximum recommended drawbar
lights should be turned off, the ignition
length is 204 mm (8 ins).
should be off and the transmission
should be in Park (P) or Neutral (N). 2. To achieve the maximum ball height, a
drawbar with a rise of 75 mm (3 ins) is
• The vehicle's lights and the trailer's
recommended.
lights will operate at the same time so
that a visual check can be made of all 3. To achieve the maximum ball height, a
of the lights. drawbar with a drop of 12.5 mm (0.5 ins)
is recommended.
• The 3 minute sequence can be stopped
at any time, by pressing the button 7 seat vehicles with a spare wheel
again, by turning on the vehicle's lights 1. The maximum recommended drawbar
or the ignition, or by selecting a gear. length is 154 mm (6 ins).
2. To achieve the maximum ball height, a
TRAILER HITCH (Australia only) drawbar with a rise of 50 mm (2 ins) is
Never leave the tow bar loose in the recommended.
vehicle. It could become a projectile 3. To achieve the maximum ball height, a
in the event of heavy braking or an drawbar with a drop of 37.5 mm (1.5 ins)
accident. is recommended.

100
 R
Towing

Note: These dimensions have been calculated When a trailer's electrical connection is made
with a ball centre to drawbar plate height of 50 and the vehicle’s direction indicators are used,
mm (2 ins). If a different ball size is used, then the trailer's warning indicator will flash in time
the dimensions need to be adjusted accordingly. with the direction indicators. See 56, TRAILER
Consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the DIRECTION INDICATORS (GREEN).
latest information. If when a direction indicator is used the symbol
does not flash, the trailer's connection should
TRAILER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION be checked and appropriate action taken to
Attach only approved electrical make sure the trailer's direction indicators are
connectors, which are in good condition, functioning.
to the trailer's socket.

Function Minimum load Maximum load

Brake lamps 1.75 amps (21 Watt) 5 amps (60 Watt)
Direction indicators* 1.75 amps (21 Watt) 5 amps (60 Watt)*
Side markers/Tail lamps** - 10 amps (120 Watt)**
Reverse lamps - 5 amps (60 Watt)
Fog lamp - 5 amps (60 Watt)
Permanent battery feed - 15 amps (180 Watt)
Ignition feed - 15 amps (180 Watt)

* For each side.

** Total for both sides. ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Electric trailer brake Do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW), maximum rear axle
If your vehicle has provision for an electric weight, maximum trailer weight, or
trailer brake module, the following connections nose weight. Exceeding any of these
are provided near the driving position: limits could cause instability and loss
• Permanent feed (maximum 30 amp). of control.
• Brake signal (12 volt nominal when the Do not loop the breakaway cable or
vehicle is braking) (maximum 2 amp). safety chain over the tow ball as it may
• Illumination supplied (maximum 2 amp). slide off.
• Electric brake connection to towing socket • To maintain vehicle stability, the trailer nose
(maximum 30 amp). load should be set at approximately 7% of
the caravan/trailer gross weight (and a
minimum of 4%).
• When towing a trailer with more than one
axle, the trailer should be loaded to achieve
even weight distribution between axles.

101
L
Towing

• When calculating the laden weight of the Note: A reduction in the performance of the air
trailer, remember to include the weight of conditioning system is a normal function under
the trailer, plus the weight of the load. high load towing conditions.
• If the load can be divided between the Note: Engine power output always reduces with
vehicle and trailer, loading more weight into increased altitude. At 1000 metres above sea
the vehicle will generally improve stability. level and for every additional 1000 metres,
Do not exceed the vehicle's weight limits. deduct 10% from the Gross Train Weight
• Increase the rear tyre pressures on the (GTW). See 250, WEIGHTS.
towing vehicle to those for maximum The Touch screen can display a rear view to
vehicle loading conditions. assist with the reversing of the vehicle with a
• Make sure that a suitable breakaway cable, trailer attached. See 130, SURROUND CAMERA
safety chain or secondary coupling is used. SYSTEM and also 96, TOW ASSIST.
Refer to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions for guidance. TOW BAR MOUNTED ACCESSORIES
• Always connect the breakaway cable or Before fitting a tow bar mounted
safety chain to the provided connection accessory, make sure it has been
point. Do not loop it over the tow ball. approved for use on Land Rover
• Make sure that the tow ball is secure. vehicles.
The use of unsuitable equipment can
• Check the operation of all trailer lights.
result in severe damage to the towing
TOWING A TRAILER bracket.
Never exceed the maximum weights Before fitting an accessory to the tow bar,
for either the vehicle, or the trailer. observe the following guidelines:
Doing so can cause accelerated wear
and damage to the vehicle. It can also
adversely affect vehicle stability and
braking, which in turn can lead to a
loss of control and an increased
braking distance, resulting in a rollover
or crash.
To preserve handling and stability, only
fit Land Rover approved towing
accessories.
Never use towing eyes or lashing
points to tow a trailer. They have not
been designed for this purpose and
doing so may cause them to fail,
resulting in injury or death.

102
 R
Towing

1. The attached accessory must not protrude

more than 700 mm (27.5 ins) from the tow
ball.
2. The centre of gravity of the mounted
equipment and load combined should not
exceed a distance of 390 mm (15.5 ins)
from the ball. The maximum weight at this
distance must not exceed 82.4 kg (182 lb).
Note: The forces exerted by trailer nose load
and tow ball mounted accessories are different
in nature and, therefore, a separate limit applies
to both.
Note: Only use a Land Rover approved bicycle
rack catering for a maximum of 4 bicycles.

103
L
Towing

TOW BAR DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING POINTS

5 seat vehicles and 7 seat vehicles without a spare wheel

Ref. Dimension Millimetres Inches

1 Fixing points 3 0.1
2 Fixing points 10 0.4
3 Fixing points 17 0.7

104
 R
Towing

Ref. Dimension Millimetres Inches

4 Fixing point to the centre of the tow ball 573 22.6
5 Fixing points 245 9.6
6 Centre of tow ball to fixing point 348 13.7
7 Fixing points 142 5.6
8 Fixing points 40 1.6
9 Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 101 4
10 Wheel centre to the centre of the tow ball 1029 40.5

Note: Dimensions refer to towing equipment

officially released by Land Rover.

105
L
Towing

7 seat vehicles with a spare wheel

Ref. Dimension Millimetres Inches

1 Fixing points 3 0.1
2 Fixing points 10 0.4
3 Fixing points 17 0.7

106
 R
Towing

Ref. Dimension Millimetres Inches

4 Fixing point to the centre of the tow ball 573 22.5
5 Fixing points 244 9.6
6 Centre of tow ball to fixing point 423 16.6
7 Fixing points 142 5.6
8 Fixing points 40 1.6
9 Fixing points 47 1.8
10 Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 101 4
11 Wheel centre to the centre of the tow ball 1104 43.5

Note: Dimensions refer to towing equipment

officially released by Land Rover.

107
L
Starting the engine

STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Make sure Park (P) is selected for vehicles
with an automatic transmission or neutral
Never start the engine, or leave it
for a manual transmission vehicle. Apply
running, when the vehicle is in an
the parking brake.
enclosed space. Exhaust gases are
poisonous and can cause 2. Press and release the engine START/STOP
unconsciousness and death if inhaled. button.
If the engine fails to start, do not While the vehicle is moving:
continue cranking as this will discharge It is not advisable to switch off the
the battery. It may also damage the engine while the vehicle is moving.
catalytic converter due to unburnt fuel However, if a situation arises where
passing through the exhaust. engine switch off is urgent, the following
Note: The Smart key may not be detected if it procedure applies:
is placed within a metal container, or if it is 1. Press and hold the engine START/STOP
shielded by a device with a back-lit LCD screen, button for longer than 2 seconds, or
such as a smart phone, laptop (including when 2. Press and release the engine START/STOP
inside laptop bag), games console, etc. Keep button twice within 3 seconds. With either
the Smart key clear of such devices when method, Engine Stop Button Pressed is
attempting Keyless entry or Keyless starting. displayed in the Message centre.
To start the engine:
1. Make sure a valid Smart key is inside the SWITCHING ON THE IGNITION
vehicle. To switch on the ignition without starting the
2. Make sure Park (P) or Neutral (N) is engine:
selected. 1. With a valid Smart key inside the vehicle:
3. Automatic transmission: Press the brake • On automatic transmission vehicles,
pedal firmly. make sure the brake pedal is NOT
Manual transmission: Press the clutch pedal pressed.
firmly.
• On manual transmission vehicles, make
4. Press and release the engine START/STOP sure the clutch pedal is NOT pressed.
button. See 290, DRIVER CONTROLS.
2. Press and hold the engine START/STOP
Note: For vehicles with a diesel engine, the button until the warning lamps illuminate
delay period before cranking begins will be in the Instrument panel. See 290, DRIVER
longer in low ambient temperatures due to CONTROLS.
extended glow plug operation. During this
3. Release the engine START/STOP button.
extended delay, the brake pedal must
remain pressed. If the brake pedal (auto transmission)
or the clutch pedal (manual
Once the engine has started, the brake pedal
transmission) is applied when the engine
can be released, if it is safe to do so.
START/STOP button is pressed, the
engine will start.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
While the vehicle is stationary:

108
 R
Starting the engine

ROLLING RE-START Note: The steering column has a recessed

area to aid placement of the Smart key.
Note: The engine START/STOP button will be
inhibited for 2 seconds after the engine has been 2. Automatic transmission: Press the brake
switched off. pedal firmly.
Manual transmission: Press the clutch pedal
A rolling restart can be initiated by selecting
firmly.
Neutral (N) and pressing the engine
START/STOP button. 3. Press and release the engine START/STOP
button.
KEYLESS START BACKUP Once the engine has started, the pedal can be
If the vehicle has been unlocked using the released, if it is safe to do so.
emergency key blade or the Smart key is not If the Smart key is not recognised, or the engine
detected by the vehicle, it will be necessary to still fails to start, consult a Dealer/Authorised
use the Keyless start backup procedure to Repairer.
disarm the alarm and start the engine.
The Keyless start backup procedure can only
be used when one of the following messages
is displayed in the Message centre:
• Smart Key Not Recognised, or Reposition
or Place As Shown and Press Start Button.

1. Position the Smart key flat against the

underside of the steering column with the
buttons facing downwards.

109
L
Intelligent stop/start

INTELLIGENT STOP/START The following conditions will prevent an

automatic engine stop:
The Intelligent stop/start system is designed to
improve fuel efficiency and is automatically • An automatic transmission shift paddle has
activated when the ignition is turned on. Unless been used to select a gear.
it is required to support other vehicle systems, • The external temperature is less than
the engine will turn off if the vehicle is stopped, approximately 0°C (32°F).
for example, at traffic lights. When the brake • The external temperature is more than
pedal is released and a drive gear is selected, approximately 40°C (104°F).
the engine will restart automatically.
• The engine has not reached operating
During operation of the Intelligent stop/start temperature.
system, a warning lamp will illuminate. See 56,
INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN). • The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

To activate an automatic engine stop: • The climate control system demand requires
the engine to be running (for example, in
• Stop the vehicle from a speed greater than Defrost mode).
4 km/h (2.5 mph) and apply sufficient brake
pressure to make sure the vehicle is • The battery charge is low.
stationary. For manual transmissions, • The bonnet is opened.
neutral must also be selected and the clutch • Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.
pedal fully released.
To activate an automatic engine restart: DEACTIVATING INTELLIGENT STOP/
• Release the brake pedal with Drive (D) or START
Sport (S) selected. For manual
transmissions, the engine will restart when
the clutch pedal is fully pressed, prior to
engaging a gear.
The engine will also restart if one of the
following occurs:
• Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.
• The accelerator pedal is pressed.
• An automatic transmission shift paddle is
To switch the system off, press the Intelligent
used to select a gear.
stop/start switch.
• Reverse (R) gear is selected.
Note: The engine will restart automatically if the
• Climate control system demand increases. switch is pressed while an automatic engine
• The vehicle’s speed exceeds approximately stop is in progress.
1 km/h (0.5 mph). To confirm that the system is off, the message
• Battery charge becomes low. Stop/Start Off is momentarily displayed in the
• Brake vacuum has been reduced (for Message centre.
example, using the brake pedal repeatedly
with the engine off).

110
 R
Intelligent stop/start

Note: The intelligent stop/start system will

automatically reactivate the next time the
ignition is turned on.
If the Intelligent stop/start switch is pressed
while there is a fault, the message Stop/Start
Not Available is displayed.

DRIVER EXIT
Note: The Driver exit feature is only available
when Intelligent stop/start is enabled.
To prevent the vehicle from being inadvertently
left in a driveable condition, the vehicle will
detect when a driver is not present, and
automatically turn off the ignition.
If Drive (D) or Sport (S) is selected, the Driver
exit feature will turn the vehicle's ignition off if
the following conditions exist:
• The driver's seat belt is unbuckled.
• The brake pedal is released.
If Neutral (N) or Park (P) is selected, the Driver
exit feature will turn the vehicle's ignition off if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled.
Once the vehicle's ignition has been turned off,
the vehicle can be locked. For more information,
see 14, SINGLE LOCKING.

111
L
Gearbox

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The rotary gear selector rotates in either To achieve rapid acceleration (kick-down)
direction. At engine start-up, the gear selector while in D, quickly press the accelerator
elevates out of its parked position. pedal to its full travel. When the accelerator
pedal is relaxed, normal automatic gear
The CommandShift™ and gear selector status
changing will resume.
will be displayed in the Message centre.
Note: Before selecting D, R, N or P, make
1. To select Drive ( D), Reverse (R), Neutral
sure the vehicle is stationary and the brakes
(N) or Park (P), apply the brake pedal, then
are applied.
rotate the gear selector to the required
position. The related LED indicator by the Note: If pressure is applied to the gear
gear selector will illuminate. selector before the brake pedal is applied,
While in D, the gear changing is fully the selected gear may not be available. In
automatic. The shift points are determined this situation, remove the pressure from the
by the accelerator pedal position and the gear selector, make sure the brake pedal is
vehicle's current speed. applied and select the required gear, as
described.

112
 R
Gearbox

2. To select Sport (S) mode from D, press the WARNING: Before exiting the vehicle,
gear selector down and rotate to S. The always make sure the gear selector is
related LED by the gear selector will in the P position, the engine is turned
illuminate. off, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is
The transmission will stay in the lower gears applied and the Smart key is removed
for longer, improving mid-range from the vehicle.
performance. Never select P while the vehicle is in
To deselect S mode, rotate the gear selector motion. Doing so can result in serious
back to D. transmission damage.
3. CommandShift™ gear selector paddles: Never select R while the vehicle is in
Allows manual gear selection, while the forward motion. Doing so can result in
selector is in either the D or S positions. serious transmission damage.
CommandShift ™ can be configured to work
Never select a forward gear while the
in S only, or in S and D from the Driving
vehicle is moving backwards. Doing so
Features menu, which is accessed via the
can result in serious transmission
Vehicle Set-up menu in the Instrument
damage.
panel. See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU. Lightly pull the left paddle for Do not rev the engine or allow it to run
down-shifts or lightly pull the right paddle above normal idle speed while selecting
for up-shifts. D or R, or while the vehicle is stationary
TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT with any gear selected. Doing so can
SELECTED will appear briefly in the result in serious transmission and/or
Message centre when CommandShift™ is engine damage.
first selected. Do not allow the vehicle to remain
CommandShift™ can be effective when stationary with a drive gear selected and
rapid acceleration and engine braking are the engine running. Always select N and
required. apply the EPB if the engine is to idle for
A gear shift indicator warning lamp will a prolonged period. The vehicle may
illuminate briefly at the recommended move unexpectedly with any other gear
(up-shift) gear change point. See 56, GEAR position selected.
SHIFT (GREEN). Do not use N for vehicle recovery. See
Note: If continued use of the 240, RECOVERY METHOD.
CommandShift™ gear selector paddles is
required, select D or S. ROTARY GEAR SELECTOR
4. To exit the CommandShift™ mode and P should normally be selected before switching
return to S mode, lightly pull and hold the off the engine. If any other gear is selected at
up-shift (+) paddle for approximately 1 turn off, the selector will move to P before
second. To return to D mode, move the retracting into the centre console.
rotary gear selector back to the D position.
If the engine is switched off with N selected, the
system will wait for 10 minutes before selecting
P. This delay allows the vehicle enough time to
be conveyed through a car wash.

113
L
Gearbox

IF THE SELECTOR FAILS TO ELEVATE

If the drive selector is obstructed, remove the
obstruction and then start the engine. The
selector should elevate as normal.
If the selector still fails to elevate, even if there
is no obstruction, a fault in the system is
indicated. The selector can still be used in the
lowered position. Make sure P is selected before
engine switch off. Have the fault rectified at the
earliest opportunity.

TRANSMISSION FAULT
In the event that the transmission develops a
fault, a warning message may be displayed in
the Message centre and only limited gears may
become available. You should seek qualified
assistance immediately.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Lift the collar (1) when selecting Reverse (R)

gear.
Never attempt to engage Reverse (R)
gear while the vehicle is in forward
motion. This may result in serious
transmission damage and costly repairs.
A gear shift indicator warning lamp will
illuminate briefly at the recommended (up-shift)
gear change point. See 56, GEAR SHIFT
(GREEN).

114
 R
Stability control

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) In some driving conditions it may be appropriate

to disable DSC to improve traction. These
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is
conditions include:
unable to compensate for driver
misjudgement. It remains the driver's • Rocking the vehicle out of a hollow or deep
responsibility to drive with due care rut.
and attention, in a manner which is • Pulling away in deep snow, or when on a
safe for the vehicle, its occupants and loose surface.
the other road users. • Driving through deep sand or mud.
This vehicle is not designed for
cornering at the same speed as
conventional passenger cars any more
than a low-slung sports car is designed
to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. If at all possible, avoid
sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate the vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover. To disable DSC, press and briefly hold the DSC
OFF switch. The DSC OFF warning lamp will
DSC is enabled automatically at the start of each illuminate. See 115, DYNAMIC STABILITY
ignition cycle. CONTROL (DSC). Deactivating DSC also reduces
DSC maintains vehicle stability, even in critical the level of Electronic Traction Control (ETC)
driving situations, when accelerating and when intervention and may lead to an increase in
starting from a standstill. Additionally, it wheel spin.
identifies unstable driving behaviour, such as
understeer and oversteer and helps to keep the SWITCHING DSC ON
vehicle under control by manipulating the engine
output and applying the brakes at individual If DSC has been switched off, press and briefly
wheels. Some noise may be generated when hold the DSC OFF switch to re-enable DSC.
the brakes are applied. Alternatively, select a new Terrain response
special program.
SWITCHING DSC OFF Note: DSC is automatically disabled when the
ignition is switched off.
Safety may be reduced by
inappropriately disabling DSC. In the
majority of driving situations, and
particularly on-road, it is
recommended that you do not disable
DSC.
DSC must be switched off when traction
devices are fitted. See 226, USING SNOW
CHAINS.

115
L
Traction control

ELECTRONIC TRACTION CONTROL

(ETC)
ETC operates in conjunction with Dynamic
Stability Control (DSC) and is designed to assist
when one or more wheels have lost traction;
wheel spin, for example.
If a wheel loses traction, ETC will operate the
brake on that wheel and may also manipulate
the engine output, until the wheel regains
traction. The amber DSC warning lamp in the
Instrument panel will flash to inform the driver
that ETC is operating.

116
 R
Suspension

ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS
The Adaptive dynamics continuously monitors
road and driver inputs. It detects rough road
and off-road conditions, optimises the vehicle's
suspension settings to suit each surface type
and adjusts control for greater ride comfort.
Adaptive dynamics is also linked to the Terrain
response dynamic program, modifying the
suspension settings for a more sporting
character.
If ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT is displayed in
the Message centre, the vehicle can still be
driven. The fault may be temporary. If the fault
persists, seek qualified assistance as soon as
possible.

117
L
Brakes

IMPORTANT INFORMATION EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST (EBA)

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal If the driver rapidly applies the brakes, the EBA
while the vehicle is in motion. system will automatically boost the braking
Never allow the vehicle to coast force to its maximum, in order to bring the
(freewheel) with the engine turned off. vehicle to a halt as quickly as possible. If the
The engine must be running to provide driver applies the brakes slowly, but driving
full braking assistance. The brakes will conditions mean that the Anti-lock Braking
still function with the engine off, but System (ABS) operates on the front wheels, the
far more pressure will be required to EBA system will increase the braking force in
operate them. order to apply ABS control to the rear wheels.
If the red brake warning indicator The EBA system stops operating as soon as the
illuminates, safely bring the vehicle to brake pedal is released.
a stop, as quickly as possible and seek A fault with the EBA system is indicated by the
qualified assistance. amber brake warning lamp illuminating and an
Never place non-approved floor associated warning message. See 54, BRAKE
matting or any other obstructions under (AMBER). Drive with care, avoiding heavy brake
the brake pedal. This restricts pedal application and seek qualified assistance.
travel and braking efficiency.
Driving through heavy rain or water can have ELECTRONIC BRAKE FORCE
an adverse effect on braking efficiency. Under DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
such circumstances, it is recommended that The EBD system controls the balance of braking
you lightly apply the brakes intermittently, to forces supplied to the front and rear wheels, in
dry the brakes. order to maintain maximum braking efficiency.
If the vehicle has a light load (only the driver in
STEEP SLOPES the vehicle, for example), the EBD system will
If the vehicle is stationary on a steep, slippery reduce the braking force applied to the rear
slope, it may begin to slide even with the brakes wheels. If the vehicle is heavily laden, the EBD
applied. This is because without wheel rotation, system will allow greater braking force to the
the ABS cannot determine vehicle movement. rear wheels.
To counteract this, briefly release the brakes to A fault with the EBD system is indicated by the
allow some wheel rotation. Then re-apply the red brake warning lamp illuminating and an
brakes to allow ABS to gain control. associated warning message. See 53, BRAKE
(RED). Gently and safely stop the vehicle and
seek qualified assistance.

118
 R
Brakes

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING When a collision risk is detected, a Forward

(AEB) collision warning is displayed in the message
centre. If avoiding action is not taken and a
The AEB system is a driving aid only. collision is not avoidable, the brakes will
It remains the driver's responsibility automatically be applied. After the vehicle has
to drive with due care and attention, in stopped, the brakes will only be applied for a
a manner that is safe for the vehicle, few seconds.
its occupants and the other road users.
The driver should observe all road If the AEB system has started to engage, the
signs, road markings and potential driver can override it's operation via steering or
emergency braking situations, and act accelerator inputs, causing the system to
appropriately. disengage. This is to make sure that the driver
remains in full control of the vehicle.
Seat belts should be worn by all
vehicle occupants, for every trip, no Note: The efficiency of the system is dependent
matter how short. Failure to do so will on the condition of the road surface and the
greatly increase the risk of death or condition of the vehicle's tyres, braking system
serious injury in the event of an and vehicle speed.
accident. AEB will not operates if:
Note: The AEB system is an option in some • The vehicle is negotiating a tight corner.
markets. • Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is switched
Note: The fitment of the AEB system is market off.
and model dependent. • The cameras are dirty or obstructed.
The AEB system uses the forward-facing • The vehicle's speed is below 5 km/h (3
cameras, located above the rear-view mirror, mph) or above 80 km/h (50 mph).
to identify a collision risk. AEB and Forward
• When visibility is impaired due to severe
collision warning are enabled every time the
weather conditions (for example, heavy rain,
vehicle is switched on but may be disabled via
fog, snow, etc.).
the instrument panel menu. See 49,
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU. Note: On initial vehicle start-up, the AEB system
may require an initialization period before it is
Note: In order for the AEB system to work
fully functional. This is indicated by a warning
correctly, make sure that the windscreen is kept
message in the message centre. During this
clean and the camera's line of sight is not
period the efficiency of the AEB system is
obstructed by labels, stickers or any other
limited.
objects.
It is recommended that AEB is deactivated
AEB is provided to mitigate the severity, and in
when:
some instances avoid a rear-end collision
between the host vehicle and other vehicles that • The vehicle is driven off-road.
are in its forward path.

119
L
Brakes

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) 2. With the vehicle stationary, pull up and
release the EPB switch. This will apply the
Do not rely on the Electric Parking
EPB. The parking brake warning lamp will
Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle
illuminate to indicate that the EPB is applied.
stationary if the brake warning lamp is
See 53, PARKING BRAKE (RED).
illuminated or the EPB warning lamp
is flashing. Seek qualified assistance If the system detects a fault while the EPB is
urgently. operating, the red parking brake warning lamp
will flash, accompanied by a warning in the
The EPB system operates on the rear
Message centre.
wheels; therefore, secure parking of the
vehicle is dependent on being on a hard Note: The red parking brake warning lamp will
and stable surface. continue to be illuminated for at least 10
seconds after the ignition has been turned off.
Do not rely on the EPB to operate
effectively, if the rear wheels have been If the system detects a fault with the EPB
immersed in mud or water. system, the amber brake warning lamp will
illuminate accompanied by a warning in the
Note: If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
Message centre. See 54, BRAKE (AMBER).
conditions (e.g., wading, deep mud, etc.), extra
maintenance and adjustment of the EPB will be If the EPB is operated when the vehicle's speed
required. Consult a Dealer/Authorised Repairer is less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the vehicle will be
for more information. brought to an abrupt stop. The stop lamps will
not be illuminated.
Driving the vehicle with the EPB applied,
or repeated use of the EPB to slow the
vehicle, may cause serious damage to
the brake system.
In an emergency, with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph), pulling up on the
EPB switch and holding, gives a gradual
reduction in the speed. The brake warning lamp
will illuminate accompanied by a warning tone
and a warning message in the Message centre.
The stop lamps will illuminate. See 53, BRAKE
(RED).
Note: Automatic release of the EPB is only
possible when the driver’s door is fully closed
or the driver’s seat belt is buckled.

1. With the ignition turned on, press the brake To delay the automatic release, hold the EPB
pedal, then press down and release the EPB switch in the applied position and release it at
switch. This will release the EPB. the desired point. The EPB system gradually
releases to assist in a smooth drive away.

120
 R
Brakes

Vehicles with automatic transmission

The EPB is automatically applied when Park (P)
is selected.
If the vehicle is stationary with the EPB applied
and the transmission is engaged in Drive (D) or
Reverse (R), pressing the accelerator pedal will
release the EPB and allow the vehicle to move
off.
Note: At the start of a journey, EPB release
times may be extended when changing from P
or Neutral (N). This is to allow for increased
gear engagement times.
When shifting from P with the EPB applied, the
EPB will automatically release to allow a smooth
drive away.
Vehicles with manual transmission
The EPB will be applied automatically if the
ignition is switched off and the vehicle's speed
is below 3 km/h (2 mph).
To prevent this automatic operation, when the
vehicle is stationary, press and hold the EPB
switch in the release position. Within 5 seconds,
switch off the ignition and continue to hold the
EPB switch for a further 2 seconds.
If the vehicle is stationary with the engine
running and the EPB applied, pressing the
accelerator pedal and releasing the clutch pedal
to engage a gear, will release the EPB
automatically and allow the vehicle to move off.
Note: Automatic release will only operate in first,
second and reverse gears.

121
L
Parking aids

USING THE PARKING AID

1. Parking aid button. If accessories, e.g., tow bar, are fitted

2. Parking aid sensor detection zones. to the rear of the vehicle, particular care
must be taken when reversing. The rear
3. 360° Park Distance Control sensor detection
sensors will only indicate the distance
zones.
from the bumper to the obstacle.
Parking aids and 360° Park Distance
Note: If a trailer is connected to a Land Rover
Control sensors will not detect moving
approved trailer socket, the rear sensors will be
objects, such as children and animals,
disabled.
until they are dangerously close.
Always use extreme caution when The Parking aid and 360° Park Distance Control
manoeuvring. systems assist the driver while manoeuvring
the vehicle in confined spaces. When active,
The Parking aid and 360° Park Distance
object tracking along the front, side, and rear
Control sensors may not detect some
of the vehicle will be displayed on the Touch
obstructions, for example narrow posts
screen.
or small objects close to the ground.
The Parking aid system is automatically
activated when reverse gear is selected.

122
 R
Parking aids

The indicator on the Parking aid button will REAR CAMERA

illuminate to inform the driver that the system
It remains the driver's responsibility
is active. To switch the Parking aid system off,
to detect obstacles and estimate the
press the button.
vehicle's distance from them when
When the Parking aid system is switched off, reversing.
the system will remain off until the next ignition
Some overhanging objects or barriers
cycle, reverse gear is selected, or the Parking
which could cause damage to the
aid button is pressed again.
vehicle, may not be detected by the
Note: If the system does not detect an object camera.
likely to come into close proximity with the
The camera must be kept clean and free
vehicle, it will not display any tracking
from debris or obstructions, for
information in the Touch screen.
example, ice, frost, snow, leaves, mud
When in reverse gear, both the front, side and or insects. Failure to keep the camera
rear sensors are active, enabling complete clean may result in miscalculation or
sensor detection around the whole perimeter false indications.
of the vehicle. When in a forward gear, only the
If the vehicle is fitted with a rear camera, this
front and side sensors are active.
has priority over the Parking aids display.
When objects are detected, the Parking aid
system will emit a warning tone which increases
in frequency as the vehicle gets closer to an
object. The tone becomes constant when the
obstacle is within 300 mm (12 ins).
Note: The warning tone will stop when the
distance between the vehicle and the object
remains constant.
The Parking aid and 360° Park Distance Control
sensors operate at speeds up to 16 km/h (10
mph).

PARKING AID SYSTEM FAULT The rear camera is located on the tailgate (see
illustration).
If a system fault is detected, a long high-pitched
When reverse gear is selected, the screen
tone will sound, the switch indicator will flash.
automatically displays a wide angle, colour
Also a graphic and the message Parking Aid is
image from the rear of your vehicle. Overlaid
not available. Please consult your dealer will
on the image are reversing guidelines and an
be displayed on the Touch screen. Contact a
indication of which sensors are active.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as possible.

123
L
Parking aids

Touch to enable/disable Hitch assist

guidance lines. Use this feature to
aid the process of guiding the
vehicle to a towing hitch. A single
line is displayed as the reversing
guideline. See 96, HITCH
GUIDANCE.
For vehicles fitted with a Surround camera
system:

1. Dotted line: The safe working width of the

vehicle (including exterior mirrors).
2. Solid line: The projected path based on
current steering wheel position.
3. Parking sensor activation: A coloured area
appears, to indicate which rear sensor(s)
has been activated.
4. Tailgate access guideline: Do not reverse
beyond this point if tailgate access is
required.
To cancel the Rear camera display at any time,
push the HOME menu button or touch the back
soft key.
1. Hitch Assist, select OFF or ON. See 96,
To adjust the camera settings while in reverse,
HITCH GUIDANCE.
touch anywhere on the Touch screen to display
the user options. 2. Parking Guidance, select OFF or ON.
For vehicles fitted with only a rear camera, touch 3. Parking Aid Graphics, select OFF or ON.
the icon for the feature required and then the 4. PDC Plan View, select OFF or ON.
back icon: The Rear camera display on the Touch screen
Touch to enable/disable the Park will discontinue when either of the following
assist guidance lines. apply:
• A forward gear is selected for longer than
Touch to enable/disable the sensor/s 5 seconds.
active graphics. • A forward gear is selected and/or vehicle
speed is greater than 18 km/h (11 mph).

124
 R
Parking aids

REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTION The system can be enabled or disabled via the
Instrument panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT
PANEL MENU. When RTD is disabled, an amber
dot (3) will be displayed in both exterior mirrors.

REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTION

SENSORS
The RTD system will automatically disable if
any of the sensors become partially or
completely obscured. The amber warning
indicator dot will illuminate in the exterior
mirrors and the message Reverse Traffic
Sensor Blocked appears in the Message centre.
Check that there is nothing obscuring the rear
bumper and it is clear from ice, frost, snow,
mud and dirt.
If a fault with a radar sensor is detected, an
The Reverse Traffic Detection (RTD) amber warning indicator dot will illuminate in
system is a supplement to, not a the exterior mirrors and the message Reverse
replacement for, safe driving, good Traffic Detection System Not Available is
observation and use of the exterior and displayed in the Message centre.
rear-view mirrors. Note: Even if the detected fault only affects the
Note: RTD is automatically disabled when a radar sensor on 1 side of the vehicle, the whole
trailer is connected and when Park assist is system is disabled. If the fault is temporary, the
active. system will operate correctly once the engine
has been switched off and then on again.
In addition to the functionality provided by the
rear view camera, the RTD system provides a If a fault occurs, consult a Dealer/Authorised
warning to the driver of any moving vehicle, at Repairer.
either side, that may pose an accident risk
during a reversing manoeuvre.
An amber warning icon (1) will flash in the
relevant exterior mirror and an audible warning
will be emitted to indicate the presence of a
moving vehicle. The rear view camera screen
or the parking aid screen will also show a
warning icon (2) on the relevant side(s) of the
screen. To switch between the rear view camera
and the parking aid screen, touch the camera
image or the Cameras icon accordingly.

125
L
Park assist

PARK ASSIST

Park assist is an aid to manoeuvring the vehicle Park assist sensors may not detect
in and out of parking spaces, and parking bays. moving objects, such as children and
Park assist takes control of the vehicle's animals, until they are dangerously
steering system to manoeuvre the vehicle. close. Always use extreme caution
The driver must maintain full control of when manoeuvring and always use
the accelerator and brake throughout the your mirrors.
parking manoeuvre. Park assist is a driving aid only. It
Note: A Park assist manoeuvre can be cancelled remains the driver's responsibility to
at any point, by holding/turning the steering drive with due care and attention
wheel or by pressing the Park assist button. during parking manoeuvres.
Park assist comprises 3 different features: Park assist sensors may not detect some
obstructions, e.g., narrow posts, small
1. Parallel parking: For reversing into a parking
objects close to the ground, mesh fences
space that is parallel to the vehicle.
and, in some circumstances, bicycles or
2. Perpendicular parking: For reversing into a motor cycles parked alongside the kerb.
parking space that is at 90° to the vehicle.
All sensors must be kept clean and free
3. Parking exit: For exiting from a parallel from debris or obstructions, e.g., leaves,
parking space. mud, snow, ice, frost or insects. Failure
All Park assist instructions are displayed in the to keep the sensors clean may result in
Message centre. sensor miscalculation or false
indications.

126
 R
Park assist

Park assist must not be used if: 4. A fourth press turns the system off; the
- A temporary spare wheel is in use. indicator will extinguish.
- A sensor is damaged or the bumper is When selected, all instructions for the 3 Park
damaged sufficiently to affect a sensor assist options are displayed in the Message
mounting point. centre. Always take action when the text or
- A sensor is obstructed by items audio alerts an instruction.
attached to the vehicle, e.g., bumper
covers, a bicycle rack, a trailer, stickers,
etc.
USING PARK ASSIST
- The vehicle is being used to transport For assistance when parking, select Parallel or
a load that extends beyond the vehicle's Perpendicular park.
perimeter, for example, a trailer. As the vehicle is driven forwards, the size of a
Note: All of the doors and the tailgate must be potential parking space is assessed.
securely closed when using Park assist. Note: For Park assist to search effectively,
Note: During any Park assist manoeuvre, the maintain a distance of 0.5 m to 1.5 m (1.6 ft to
Parking aid system will remain active and will 4.9 ft) between the vehicle and the row of
sound when objects are detected near the parked vehicles/obstacles between which you
vehicle. wish to park.
Note: When first activated, Park assist searches
SELECTING PARK ASSIST for a space on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To search for a space on the driver’s side, signal
a turn in that direction (using the direction
indicator).
Note: The Park assist auto searching feature
becomes active when the vehicle's speed is less
than 30 km/h (18 mph). When Park assist is
activated, a previous space may already have
been located. To obtain a previous space on the
other side, signal a turn in that direction.
A short press of the Park assist button will turn When a suitable space is found, a short
the system on. The indicator on the Park assist confirmation tone is given and a message is
switch will illuminate. displayed in the Message centre.
The Park assist button can be used to scroll Note: If Park assist senses that other vehicles
through the 3 Park assist options: are too close, on either side, to perform a
1. A first press of the button turns the system parking manoeuvre, a space will be rejected,
on, and selects Parallel park. even if it is large enough for the vehicle. The
driver retains the option to switch Park assist
2. A second press of the button selects
off and attempt the manoeuvre manually.
Perpendicular park.
For assistance in exiting a parking space, select
3. A third press of the button selects Parking
Parking exit.
exit.

127
L
Park assist

For Parking exit to operate correctly, your PARK ASSIST LIMITATIONS

vehicle must be parked in a space where other
Park assist is a supplement to, and not
vehicles or objects are either:
a replacement for, good observation
• Parked in front of your vehicle. and a safe driving style. It is the
• Parked in front and behind your vehicle. driver's responsibility, at all times, to
Note: The Parking exit feature will only operate make sure that reversing manoeuvres
when your vehicle has been parallel parked. are carried out safely.
Parking exit will not manoeuvre your vehicle Park assist may provide inaccurate results if:
from a perpendicular parking space. • The size or shape of the parking space
Do not perform a Parking exit changes after it was measured.
manoeuvre until the message Drive • There is an irregular kerb alongside the
forward with care is displayed in the parking space, or the kerb is covered with
Message centre. leaves, snow etc.
For all 3 Park assist features, follow the • The vehicle is being used to transport a load
instructions in the Message centre until the that extends beyond the perimeter of the
parking or exiting manoeuvre has been vehicle.
completed.
• The vehicle had a repair or alteration that
Although the vehicle takes control during was not approved by a Dealer/Authorised
the parking or exiting manoeuvre, the Repairer.
driver must maintain full control of the
• The vehicle has been fitted with
accelerator and brake throughout.
non-approved wheels or tyres or there is
Note: If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 significant tyre wear.
mph) during the manoeuvre, Park assist will
• One of the parked vehicles has an
display a message until the vehicle's speed
attachment at a raised height such as a flat
decreases to less than 5 km/h (3 mph). If the
bed truck, snow plough or cherry picker.
vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h (4 mph) Park
assist will deactivate. • The parking space is located on a corner or
curve.
If a system fault is detected, a continuous tone
will sound and a message will be displayed in • The sensors are dirty or covered in mud,
the Message centre. Consult a Dealer/Authorised ice or snow.
Repairer. • The weather is foggy, raining or snowing.
Instructional video - Using park assist. • The road surface is bumpy such as gravel.
• A tow bar or trailer hitch is fitted.
• A trailer is connected.
Note: If a trailer is connected to a Land
Rover approved trailer socket, the Park
assist system will be disabled.
• It encounters an obstruction that is thin or
wedge shaped.

128
 R
Park assist

• It encounters an obstruction that is elevated

and/or protruding, such as ledges or tree
branches.
• It encounters an obstruction with corners
and sharp edges.

PARK ASSIST TROUBLESHOOTING

Park assist is not searching for a parking
space
• The system may not be activated.
• The vehicle may be travelling at a speed
above 30 km/h (18 mph).
• The sensors may be covered or partly
obscured by dirt, mud, ice or snow.
Park assist does not offer a certain parking
space
• The sensors may be covered or partly
obscured by dirt, mud, ice or snow.
• The space may not be large enough or there
may not be enough space on the opposite
side of the vehicle for the front to swing out
during the manoeuvre.
• The vehicle may have been driven too far
away (more than 1.5 metres [5 feet]) from
a row of parked vehicles.
• The vehicle may have been driven too close
(within 41 cm [16 inches]) to a row of
parked vehicles.
• The vehicle may have been driven in
reverse. Park assist will only search for a
parking space when the vehicle is travelling
in a forward direction.
• The approach angle may not be suitable.
Park assist has not positioned the vehicle
accurately within the space
One or more of the system limitations criteria
may have been met. See 128, PARK ASSIST
LIMITATIONS.

129
L
Cameras

SURROUND CAMERA SYSTEM

It remains the driver's responsibility • Hitch Assist, select OFF or ON.

to detect obstacles and estimate the • Parking Guidance, select OFF or ON.
vehicle's distance from them when
• Parking Aid Graphics, select OFF or ON.
manoeuvring the vehicle.
• PDC Plan View, select OFF or ON.
To turn on the Surround camera
7. Touch to select Trailer assist. Before towing,
system, press the camera button on
select to add a trailer to the system or select
the left side of the touch screen or
a trailer already entered into the system. To
select Cameras in Extra features.
add a trailer, follow the on-screen
See 80, EXTRA FEATURES.
instructions.
To view the camera menu screen touch the
8. Touch to select Parking aids. See 122,
camera icon (9).
USING THE PARKING AID.
1. Left side split screen image.
9. Touch to select Surround cameras.
2. Camera selection arrow (not selected).
A maximum of 2 views can we displayed at one
3. Camera selection arrow (camera selected). time (instead of the 360° view). To change a
4. 360° view: Touch to display a birds-eye camera view if 2 views selected, one of the
view of the vehicle and it's immediate views has to be deselected first.
surroundings using all 4 cameras.
When shown, touch to enlarge to
5. Right side split screen image. full screen or a wider view image.
6. Touch to select the Camera settings menu.
General information:

130
 R
Cameras

The 4 surround cameras are located on the

centre of the lower front grill, on the tailgate
and underneath each of the exterior mirrors.
• The quality of the camera views may vary
in different lighting conditions.
• To maintain optimum performance, the
cameras should be kept free from ice, frost
and dirt. See 197, SENSORS AND
CAMERAS.
Camera shortcuts
Press the Camera hard button for
the following shortcut options:

• When in Reverse (R):

• Press once to select the Rear Junction
view.
• Press twice to select the T Junction
View.
• Press a third time to return to the Rear
Junction view.
• When in a forward gear, at speeds below
10 km/h (6 mph):
• Press once to select the T Junction
View.
• Press twice to select the Rear Junction
view.
• Press a third time to return to the T
Junction View.
• When in Neutral (N) or Park (P):
• Press once to select the Plan View.
• Press twice to select the T Junction
View.
• Press a third time to select the Rear
Junction view.

131
L
Automatic speed limiter (ASL)

ASL CONTROLS 2. SET+: Press to set or increase the speed

limit. The set speed limit will be displayed
ASL allows a speed limit to be set that the driver
in the Message centre.
does not wish to exceed. When a speed has
been set, the engine will respond normally up 3. Press (-) to decrease the speed limit. The
to the set speed. Further accelerator pressure set speed limit will be displayed in the
will not increase the speed beyond the set speed Message centre.
unless sudden, rapid acceleration (kickdown) 4. RES: Press to resume ASL assistance. ASL
is applied. If kickdown is initiated, ASL will be will only resume if the vehicle's speed is
suspended. ASL will reactivate once the less than the set speed and greater than 32
vehicle's speed drops below the set speed. km/h (20 mph). If these criteria are not met,
In certain conditions, such as a steep a message will be displayed in the Message
downhill gradient, the vehicle's speed centre.
may exceed the set speed limit. This 5. CAN: Press to temporarily suspend ASL
is because engine braking is unable to assistance. ASL can also be temporarily
maintain or reduce the vehicle's speed. suspended by applying sudden, rapid
acceleration (kickdown).

1. LIM: Press to switch between Cruise control

and ASL. The ASL indicator will illuminate
when ASL is active. The Cruise control and
ASL systems cannot be used
simultaneously.
When the vehicle's ignition is switched
on, the previous state, either Cruise
control or ASL, will automatically be
recalled and made active. The set speed
will not be recalled.
Note: ASL operates at all vehicle speeds. A
vehicle speed can be set from upwards of
32 km/h (20 mph).

132
 R
Cruise control

USING CRUISE CONTROL Note: Dependent on the vehicle's

specification, the set speed will be displayed
In certain conditions, such as a steep
as a marker on the speedometer or a
gradient, the vehicle's speed may
numeric display in the Message centre. The
exceed the set cruising speed. This is
set speed can also be displayed in the
because engine braking is unable to
Head-Up Display (HUD), if enabled.
maintain or reduce the vehicle's speed.
The cruising speed can also be increased
Driver intervention may be required.
using the accelerator. When the desired
Note: Cruise control is not available when using speed is reached, press the button to set
Hill Descent Control (HDC) or when a Terrain and maintain the new speed and then
response special program has been selected, release the accelerator.
except for the Grass/Gravel/Snow program.
Note: Cruise control can only be engaged
Note: Do not use Cruise control when driving at speeds above 30 km/h (18 mph).
off-road.
3. Press (-) to decrease the set speed.
The Cruise control system is operated by
4. RES: Press to resume the set speed.
controls mounted on the steering wheel. The
driver can also intervene at any time, by use of RES should be used only if the driver is
the brake or accelerator pedals. aware of the set speed and intends to
return to it.
5. CAN: Press to cancel but retain the set
speed in the memory.
Cruise control will also be cancelled if the
brake pedal is pressed, the gear selector is
moved to Neutral (N), or if HDC or Dynamic
Stability Control (DSC) are activated.
Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to
override Cruise control for a period of more than
5 minutes, Cruise control will be cancelled.

1. LIM: Press to switch between ASL and

Cruise control. The cruise control warning
lamp will illuminate to confirm Cruise
control is operational. See 56, CRUISE
CONTROL (GREEN).
2. SET+: Press to set the speed or to increase
the set speed.

133
L
Adaptive cruise control

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL • Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,
OVERVIEW metal badges or objects, including vehicle
front protectors, which may prevent the
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is radar sensor from operating.
designed to maintain a gap from the vehicle
ahead, or a set road speed if there is no slower
vehicle ahead. A speed may be set at between
USING ACC
32 km/h (20 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). The system is operated by controls mounted
The set speed will be displayed in the Message on the steering wheel. The driver can also
centre. intervene at any time, by the use of the brake
or accelerator pedals.
The system acts by regulating the speed of the
vehicle, using engine control and the brakes.
ACC is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, ACC
will not react to:
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
The ACC system uses a radar sensor, which
projects a beam directly forward of the vehicle,
to detect objects ahead.
The radar sensor is mounted at the front of the
vehicle, behind the duct in the lower cooling 1. LIM: Press to switch between ASL and ACC.
aperture, to provide a clear view forward for the The ACC warning lamp will illuminate to
radar beam. confirm ACC is operational. See 56,
• Use ACC only when conditions are CRUISE CONTROL (GREEN).
favourable, i.e., main roads with traffic 2. SET +: Press to set the vehicle's current
moving in lanes. speed as the set speed. While ACC is
• Do not use during abrupt or sharp turns, enabled, further pressing of the button will
e.g., traffic islands, junctions, areas with raise the set speed above the vehicle's
many parked vehicles or areas shared with current speed. The speed of the vehicle will
pedestrians. gradually increase to reach the new set
• Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, speed.
heavy rain, spray or snow. 3. RES: Press to resume the ACC set speed
• Do not use on icy or slippery roads. after it has been disengaged.
• It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, 4. CAN: Press to cancel but retain the set
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle speed in the memory.
at all times. 5. Press (-) to decrease the set speed. The
speed of the vehicle will gradually decrease
to reach the new set speed.

134
 R
Adaptive cruise control

6. Press to decrease the Follow mode gap. See Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC.
135, ENTERING FOLLOW MODE. If ACC predicts that its maximum braking level
7. Press to increase the Follow mode gap. will not be sufficient, then an audible warning
will sound while ACC continues to brake.
ENTERING FOLLOW MODE DRIVER INTERVENE will be displayed in the
Message centre. Take immediate action.
When in Follow mode, the vehicle may
not decelerate automatically to a stop, When in Follow mode, the vehicle will
nor will the vehicle always decelerate automatically return to the set speed when the
quickly enough to avoid a collision. road ahead is clear, for instance when:
Note: Follow mode is an integral function of • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
ACC. You cannot disengage Follow mode and above the set speed, or changes lane.
still use Cruise control to maintain your speed. • You change lane to either side or enter an
Once a set speed has been selected, the driver exit lane.
can release the accelerator and the set road The driver should intervene, if appropriate.
speed will be maintained. If a direction indicator is used, ACC will reduce
If a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a the gap to the vehicle ahead so as to respond
slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, your more quickly to the anticipated manoeuvre. If
vehicle's speed will adjust automatically until a manoeuvre is not actioned, the previous gap
the gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds to the will be restored after a few seconds. Enhanced
gap setting. The vehicle is now in follow mode. response may not occur if ACC detects that it
The Follow mode warning lamp will illuminate is inappropriate, i.e., you are already too close
to confirm Follow mode is operational (see 55, to the vehicle ahead or you are already in
FOLLOW MODE (AMBER)). another lane.
The Message centre will display the gap set in
the form of a vehicle with a varying number of CHANGING THE FOLLOW MODE SET
bars in front of it. GAP
The vehicle will then maintain the constant time It is the driver’s responsibility to select
gap to the vehicle ahead until: a gap appropriate to the driving
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed conditions.
above the set speed. 4 gap settings are available. The selected gap
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out setting is displayed in the Message centre when
of view. the gap adjustment buttons are operated.

• A new gap setting is chosen. Each gap is indicated by an additional bar in

front of the vehicle icon in the Message centre.
If necessary, the vehicle's brakes will be After the ignition is switched on, the default gap
automatically applied, slowing the vehicle and (gap 3) will be automatically selected ready for
maintaining the gap to the vehicle in front. ACC operation.
The maximum braking which is applied by ACC If the Terrain response, Grass-Gravel-Snow
is limited and can be overridden by the driver mode is selected, then the longest gap (gap 4)
applying the brakes, if required. will initially be selected.

135
L
Adaptive cruise control

OVERRIDING THE SPEED AND At very low speed, Queue assist may stop for
FOLLOW MODE stationary objects, e.g., when the vehicle ahead
changes lane to reveal a stationary object. The
Whenever the driver is overriding the vehicle's radar cannot always distinguish
ACC by pressing the accelerator pedal, between a stationary vehicle and a fixed object
the ACC will not automatically apply like a road sign, drain cover or temporary
the brakes to maintain separation from barrier. This may cause unexpected braking or
any vehicle ahead. cancellation, and the driver should intervene if
The set speed and gap can be overridden by appropriate.
pressing the accelerator pedal while cruising at
a constant speed or in Follow mode. If the ACC AUTO OFF
vehicle is in Follow mode when the ACC is
ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory
overridden, the Follow mode warning lamp will
when:
go out and CRUISE OVERRIDE will be displayed
in the Message centre. When the accelerator is • The CANCEL button is pressed.
released, the ACC function will operate again • The brake pedal is pressed.
and the vehicle's speed will decrease to the set • Neutral (N) is selected.
speed, or a lower speed if Follow mode is active.
• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) activates.
QUEUE ASSIST • Electronic Traction Control (ETC) activates.
Queue assist is an enhancement of Adaptive • Hill Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
Cruise Control (ACC) and, when active, will • Certain Terrain response modes are
follow a vehicle ahead to a standstill. It is selected, i.e., Sand and Mud ruts.
intended for use in lines of traffic on major • The difference between the vehicle's current
roads, where minimal steering is required. speed and the set speed is too great.
If a vehicle ahead slows to a halt, Queue assist • The accelerator pedal is used to accelerate
will bring the vehicle to a stop and hold it beyond the set speed for too long a period,
stationary. i.e., more than 5 minutes. See 136,
While the vehicle is held stationary, Queue assist OVERRIDING THE SPEED AND FOLLOW
will request the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to MODE.
apply if: • Maximum vehicle speed is reached.
• The driver cancels Queue assist. • Maximum engine revolution speed is
• The vehicle is stopped for more than 2 reached. 5000 rpm for a diesel engine and
minutes. 7000 rpm for a petrol engine.
• Driver intention to exit the vehicle is ACC will disengage, and clear the memory
detected. when:
• A malfunction is detected. • The ignition system is switched off.
As the vehicle ahead moves away, a brief press • A fault occurs in the ACC system.
on the accelerator will resume ACC operation.

136
 R
Adaptive cruise control

RESUMING THE SPEED AND FOLLOW Note: When engaged, the accelerator pedal rests
MODE in the raised position. Fully release the pedal to
allow normal ACC operation.
RES should only be used if the driver is
aware of the set speed and intends to Note: When braking is applied by ACC, the
return to it. vehicle's brake lamps will illuminate.
By pressing the RES button after ACC has been Note: When Intelligent stop/start is fitted, it may
cancelled (e.g. after braking), ACC will become operate during a Queue assist stop. Press the
active again provided that the set speed memory accelerator pedal for longer than normal to
has not been erased. The original set speed will restart the engine and move off.
be resumed (unless a vehicle ahead causes the
Follow mode to become active) and the set
speed will be displayed in the Message centre.
Queue assist may be resumed above 10 km/h
(6 mph).
Note: When the set speed is resumed, the rate
of acceleration is influenced by the previously
set Follow mode gap. A closer set gap will
promote greater acceleration.
Note: When resuming a set speed while in a
curve, acceleration is reduced. A more severe
curve will reduce acceleration further.
Remember that ACC and Queue assist are
primarily for use when minimal steering is
required.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ACC

During some situations, ACC may provide the
driver with an indication that intervention is
required.
An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
the message DRIVER INTERVENE in the
Message centre, if ACC detects:
• A failure has occurred while the system is
active.
• That using maximum ACC braking only is
not sufficient.
Note: ACC only operates when the gear selector
is in Drive (D) or Sport (S).

137
L
Adaptive cruise control

DETECTION BEAM ISSUES 3. There may be issues with the detection of

vehicles in front when going into and
coming out of a bend.
4. When moving around a stationary vehicle.
This may cause uncertainty as to which
vehicle should be followed.
5. When the vehicle ahead turns out of your
lane. This may cause uncertainty as to
which vehicle should be followed.
In these situations ACC may operate
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.

ACC MALFUNCTION
If a fault occurs while ACC or Follow mode is
operational, ACC will switch off and cannot be
used until the fault is cleared. The message
DRIVER INTERVENE is displayed briefly in the
Message centre and is then replaced by the
message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE.
If a fault with ACC or any related system occurs
at any other time, the message CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE will be displayed. It will not be
possible to activate ACC in any mode.
Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the radar
sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.
Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised
badges may also affect ACC operation.
If this occurs in ACC cruise/Follow mode, the
audible alarm sounds and the message DRIVER
INTERVENE is displayed briefly. The message
RADAR SENSOR BLOCKED will then be
Detection issues can occur: displayed.

1. When driving on a different line to the Note: The same messages may also be
vehicle in front. displayed while driving on open roads with few
objects for the radar to detect.
2. When a vehicle edges into your lane. The
vehicle will only be detected once it has Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
moved fully into your lane. return to normal operation. If the obstruction
is present when ACC is inactive (e.g., on initial
starting or with ACC switched off), the message
RADAR SENSOR BLOCKED will be displayed.

138
 R
Adaptive cruise control

Tyres other than those recommended for your FWD ALERT <----> is displayed in the Message
vehicle may have different circumferences. This centre.
can affect the correct operation of ACC. Note: The Forward alert set gap is retained when
the ignition is switched off.
FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION
The system may not react to slow ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKE
moving vehicles. ASSIST
Forward alert uses the same radar The system may not react to slow
sensor as Adaptive cruise control. The moving vehicles and will not react to
same performance limitations apply, stationary vehicles or vehicles travelling
see 134, ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL in the opposite direction.
OVERVIEW.
Warnings may not appear if the distance
Forward alert can be enabled/disabled via the to the vehicle ahead is very small, or if
Driving Features in the Instrument panel menu. steering wheel or pedal movements are
See 49, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU. large (e.g. to avoid a collision).
The warning lamp in the Instrument panel The system utilises the same radar
illuminates when Forward alert is enabled. See sensor as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
56, FORWARD ALERT (GREEN). and Forward alert - the same limitations
Forward alert provides limited detection and of performance apply.
warning of objects close ahead while the vehicle When ACC is fitted, Advanced emergency brake
is moving forwards. If a vehicle or object ahead assist is available at speeds above
is within the user defined sensitivity area, a approximately 7 km/h (5 mph) and will function
warning tone will sound and the FORWARD even if Forward alert and ACC are switched off.
ALERT message will be displayed in the It improves braking response during emergency
Message centre. Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) braking, when a moving vehicle is detected
will be activated. See 118, EMERGENCY BRAKE close ahead.
ASSIST (EBA).
If the risk of collision increases after the
The driver must take appropriate action FORWARD ALERT warning is displayed,
immediately. Advanced emergency brake assist is activated.
Sensitivity of the function can be adjusted only The brakes are automatically applied gently in
when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is preparation for rapid braking (this may be
disengaged. Adjust as follows: noticeable). If the brake pedal is then pressed
• Using the steering wheel ACC buttons, press quickly, full braking is implemented, even if only
the gap decrease button to display the light pressure is applied to the pedal. See 118,
current setting in the Message centre and EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST (EBA).
then press again to decrease the sensitivity Note: Braking performance will only be
of the alert. improved if the driver applies the brakes.
• Press the gap increase button to display the
current setting in the Message centre and
then press again to increase the sensitivity
of the alert.

139
L
Adaptive cruise control

If there is a fault with the system, FORWARD If the radar sensor is blocked, by snow or heavy
ALERT UNAVAILABLE is displayed in the rain, for example, or there is a fault with the
Message centre. The vehicle can still be driven system, IEB Not Available is displayed in the
and the braking system will still operate, but Message centre. The vehicle can still be driven
without Advanced emergency brake assistance. and the braking system will still operate, but
Consult a Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have without IEB. If the radar sensor is not
the fault rectified. considered to be blocked, consult a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING
The system may not react to slow
moving vehicles.
The system will not react to stationary
vehicles or vehicles that are not
travelling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
Warnings and automatic braking may
not occur if the distance to the vehicle
ahead is very small, or if the steering
wheel and pedal movements are large
(e.g., to avoid a collision).
Intelligent emergency braking uses the
same radar sensor as Adaptive cruise
control and Forward alert. The same
limitations of performance apply. See
134, ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
OVERVIEW.
When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is fitted,
Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) is available
at all speeds and will function even if ACC and
Forward alert are switched off. The purpose of
IEB is to reduce the impact speed with a slower
vehicle ahead when a collision becomes
unavoidable.
If an imminent risk of a collision occurs, an
audible warning is given. If a collision becomes
unavoidable, IEB will apply the brakes at up to
maximum pressure. After IEB has activated, IEB
System Was Activated is displayed in the
Message centre and the system is inhibited from
further operation until reset by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

140
 R
Driving programs

ECO PROGRAM Note: The ECO-data system only monitors driver

inputs. Any automatic inputs from the vehicle,
This program encourages a more efficient
for example, throttle and brake force applied by
driving style and modifies vehicle settings to
the Adaptive cruise control system will not be
improve fuel economy.
measured. Data not being measured and
recorded will be greyed out in the Instrument
panel.
Instructional video - ECO Program.

Press the button to turn the ECO program

on/off, a message will appear in the Message
centre.
When selected, engine and transmission TERRAIN RESPONSE OPERATION
settings are automatically changed to promote
an efficient driving style and to save fuel. Before venturing off-road, it is essential that
inexperienced drivers become fully familiar with
An instantaneous driving style rating is provided the vehicle's controls. In particular, the Hill
via the trip computer display. This rates driving Descent Control (HDC) and Terrain response
style against efficient driving principles. See systems. Basic guidance for off-road driving
50, USING THE TRIP COMPUTER. can be found in the Land Rover Off-Road
Heating and ventilation settings are modified by Driving handbook. This is a free download at:
making small changes to the rate of heating and www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
cooling. Certain features are switched off or Information relating to the suitability of each
modified to reduce energy consumption. Feature Terrain response program on different types of
settings can be changed as desired, once ECO surface, can be found in the 4x4i section of the
program is active. For more information refer Extra features menu.
to the Heating and ventilation section of the
handbook.
Additional vehicle efficiency data and tips are
available in ECO-Data on the Extra features
page.
Note: The ECO-data system will only begin
displaying averaged data after the vehicle has
travelled 1 km (0.6 miles).
Note: The ECO-data system may not measure
or record data when in some Terrain response Use the buttons to move through the program
modes, and/or if Hill Descent Control (HDC) is selections. The currently selected program icon
selected. will be displayed in the Message centre and the
relevant LED indicator will illuminate.

141
L
Driving programs

Note: Changing between the special programs Note: For deep snow and gravel, it is
will alter various vehicle settings, e.g., engine recommended that the Sand program is
revs while at the current accelerator pedal selected.
position may alter, or the steering feel might Note: If the vehicle is unable to gain traction in
change. These changes are not dramatic but deep snow, switching Dynamic Stability Control
will be noticeable. (DSC) off may help. DSC should be switched
It is advisable to experiment with the available on again, as soon as the difficulty is overcome.
settings in an environment that will not affect
other road users. MUD/RUTS
This program should be used for
GENERAL PROGRAM (SPECIAL
crossing terrain that is muddy,
PROGRAMS OFF) rutted, soft or uneven.
This program is compatible with all
on and off-road conditions. If not SAND
already active, it should be selected
This program should be used for
before driving on surfaces which are
terrain which is predominantly soft,
similar to a hard road surface. Dry
dry sand or deep gravel.
cobbles, tarmac, dry wooden planks,
etc., all fall into this category. Note: If the vehicle is unable to gain traction in
extremely soft, dry sand, switching DSC off may
This program should be selected once the need
help. DSC should be switched on again as soon
for a special program has passed. Once the
as the difficulty is overcome.
special program has been deselected, all of the
vehicle's systems will return to their normal If the sand to be crossed is damp/wet, and
settings, except for HDC. HDC will remain active sufficiently deep enough to cause the wheels to
if it was selected manually. sink into the surface, the Mud-Ruts program
should be used.
This general program also allows the Active
Driveline system (if fitted) to automatically
switch between 2 wheel drive and 4 wheel drive, DYNAMIC
dependent on driving conditions. This status This program is associated with a
can be viewed in the 4x4i section of the Extra driving style, rather than a type of
features menu. terrain and optimises traction,
Note: Permanent 4 wheel drive is maintained handling and driveability, for
in all other Terrain response programs. maximum feedback and
responsiveness. Select this program
GRASS/GRAVEL/SNOW to exploit the vehicle’s full on-road
potential.
This program should be used where
a firm surface is covered with loose
or slippery material.

142
 R
Driving programs

DRIVER OVERRIDE OPTIONS

Hill Descent Control (HDC) is automatically
engaged for some Terrain response programs.
If required, HDC can be deselected or engaged
independently of Terrain response. See 144,
HDC CONTROLS.
The HDC status will be displayed in the Message
centre whether it is engaged, or disengaged, by
the system or by the driver.
Although Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is
automatically engaged when a special program
is selected, it can be turned off, if required. See
115, SWITCHING DSC OFF.

SYSTEM DIFFICULTIES
Use of an incorrect program will impair
the vehicle's response to the terrain and
can reduce the life of the suspension and
drive systems.
If the system becomes partially inoperable for
any reason, it may not be possible to select a
special program.
If a participating vehicle system becomes
temporarily inoperable, the General program
will be automatically selected. Once the system
returns to normal operation, the previously
active program will be reactivated unless the
ignition has been turned off in the meantime.
If you try to select an inappropriate special
program, the relevant indicator will flash amber
and the Message centre will provide further
information. If the appropriate action is not
taken within 60 seconds, the warnings will cease
and the Message centre will show the active
program.
If the system becomes completely inoperable,
all of the special program indicators will be
switched off and a relevant message will be
displayed in the Message centre.

143
L
Hill descent control (HDC)

HDC CONTROLS Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the

ignition is switched off for more than 6
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is designed to
hours.
restrict the vehicle's speed to a set limit when
If the system's operation criteria have not
travelling downhill.
been met, the HDC warning lamp will flash
Do not attempt a steep descent if HDC to indicate that the system has been
is inoperative or warning messages selected but is not operating. See 56, HILL
are displayed. DESCENT CONTROL (GREEN).
A graphic will also be displayed in the
Message centre showing the HDC target
speed. When HDC is unable to operate, the
display will be grey. The graphic indicates
the range of target speeds available with the
currently selected gear.
If HDC is deselected while operating, the
warning lamp will extinguish and the system
will fade out, allowing the vehicle's speed
to gradually increase.
If HDC is already selected and the vehicle's
speed exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph), HDC is
suspended. The HDC indicator will flash and
a message will appear in the Message
centre.
If the brake pedal is pressed when HDC is
active, a pulsation might be felt through the
brake pedal. When the brake pedal is
released, HDC will resume.

1. HDC on/off: HDC can be selected at any 2. Increase the descent speed: The Cruise
speed, but will only operate at speeds of control (+) button will increase the HDC
less than 50 km/h (31 mph). descent speed in 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
For vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the increments. Press and hold the (+) button
HDC can be used in Drive (D), Reverse (R) for larger incremental increases, up to the
and all the CommandShift™ gears. When maximum permissible target speed.
in D, the vehicle will select the most Note: Each gear has a predetermined
appropriate gear. maximum speed.
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, the Note: The vehicle's speed will only increase
HDC can be used in 1st, 2nd and reverse on a slope steep enough to increase
gears. momentum. Use of the (+) switch may;
Note: HDC is automatically selected by therefore, not increase the vehicle's speed
some of the Terrain response special on a gentle slope.
programs.

144
 R
Hill descent control (HDC)

3. Decrease the descent speed: The Cruise Once the brakes have reached an acceptable
control (-) button will decrease the HDC temperature, the message will disappear (or the
descent speed in 1 km/h (0.6 mph) warning lamp will extinguish) and HDC will, if
increments. Press and hold the (-) button required, resume operation.
for larger incremental increases, down to
the minimum permissible target speed.
Note: Each gear has a predetermined
minimum speed.
If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC
FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
the Message centre and HDC assistance will
fade out.
If the fault is detected while the system is
operating, HDC assistance will fade out. Contact
a Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
possible.

GRADIENT RELEASE CONTROL (GRC)

With HDC activated, if the vehicle is stopped on
a slope using the brake pedal, GRC will become
active (except in the Terrain response Sand
program). During a hill ascent when the brake
pedal is released, GRC will automatically delay
and graduate the brake release, to allow the
vehicle to move smoothly away. When
descending a hill, a similar brake hold and
gradual release is employed to provide a smooth
transition into HDC control.
GRC operates in forward and reverse gears and
requires no driver intervention.

BRAKE TEMPERATURE
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system may
cause brake temperatures to exceed their preset
limits. If this occurs, the warning HDC
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE will be displayed
in the Message centre. HDC will then fade out
and become temporarily inactive.

145
L
Wade sensing

WADE SENSING CONTROLS Wade sensing is suspended if the vehicle's

speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph), or the gradient
Wade sensing should not be used
exceeds 10°. Wade sensing will automatically
during off-road driving, as rapid
reactivate if the vehicle's speed drops back
increases in water depth cannot be
down to 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle's speed
detected in time to deliver a warning
exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds,
message to the driver.
Wade sensing will automatically switch off.
When entering water from a steep
Note: Wade sensing will not operate if the
gradient, the water level may rise
vehicle is fitted with fixed side steps. However,
rapidly.
the system will operate with side tubes or
The Wade sensing system cannot deployable side steps if they are in the retracted
detect the true level of water if a layer position.
of ice or snow exists on the surface.
Note: The Parking aid, Park assist and Intelligent
Parking aid will not operate when Wade stop/start systems are all disabled when Wade
sensing is active. sensing is operating.
The wade sensing sensors are located
on the underside of the exterior mirrors.
The sensors, and the area below the
sensors, must be kept clean and free
from snow, ice, mud and other debris.
Failure to keep the sensors clean may
result in sensor miscalculation.
If the exterior mirrors are in the fold
position, Wade sensing will operate but
will give false readings.
Note: The exterior mirrors must be in the
normal (unfolded) position when using the
Wade sensing system.
Wade sensing aids the driver while driving
through water. Wade sensing can be turned on
and off from the Touch screen in 4x4i or Wade
sensing in the Extra features. When selected,
the Touch screen will display the current water
depth and the maximum wading depth. The
system will warn the driver as the maximum
depth for wading approaches. Warnings take
the form of messages on the Touch screen, the
Instrument panel, and a series of warning tones.
If system limitations are exceeded, the Touch
screen view will grey out and the water depth
will not be displayed.

146
 R
Driving aids

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION • Speed alert: When the vehicle's speed is

greater than (or equal to) the detected speed
The Traffic sign recognition system is
limit, a flashing red ring, around the
a driving aid only. It remains the
displayed speed limit sign, will be displayed
driver's responsibility to drive with due
in the Message centre.
care and attention, in a manner which
Speed alert can be switched on/off, or the
is safe for the vehicle, its occupants
settings can be adjusted to display 3
and the other road users. The driver
different settings:
should still observe all other road
signs, road markings and situations • When the vehicle's speed equals the
that are not detected or recognised by detected speed limit.
the Traffic sign recognition system. • When the vehicle's speed is 10 km/h or
The Traffic sign recognition system uses the 5 mph* above the detected speed limit.
forward-facing camera, located in the base of • When the vehicle's speed is 20 km/h or
the rear-view mirror. This detects speed signs, 10 mph* above the detected speed
no overtaking signs and variable overhead speed limit.
signs and displays symbols of the detected Note: *Dependent on the Instrument panel
signs in the Message centre. Traffic signs with being configured to display in km/h or mph.
extra information (for example, reduced speed
limits for wet road conditions) will also be • No overtaking zone: When a no overtaking
detected and compared with the vehicle’s sign has been detected, the system will also
systems (for example, rain sensor, wipers, etc.) display a corresponding sign in the
and may also be displayed in the Message Message centre.
centre. Speed limit information from the Note: The Traffic sign recognition system will
Navigation system will be displayed for roads not detect road markings or situations with no
with no signage. signage, for example, railway crossings, etc.
Note: If Navigation is not available, or the Traffic sign recognition limitations
Off-road navigation is selected, the Traffic sign The system may provide false information or
recognition system will use the camera only. function incorrectly in the following conditions:
Note: Make sure the windscreen area in front • Travelling in adverse weather conditions.
of the rear-view mirror is kept clean and free of For example, heavy fog, rain, snow, etc.
obstructions, for example, stickers, debris, mud,
• Concealed or covered signage.
snow, ice, etc.
• Driving towards very bright lights/lamps.
The Traffic sign recognition system can be
switched on and off via Driving Features in the • The windscreen area in front of the camera
Instrument panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT is covered by a sticker, misted over, dirty,
PANEL MENU. The system will operate up to a covered in snow or mud, etc.
maximum speed of 250 km/h (155 mph). • Navigation information is incorrect.
The 3 basic functions of the Traffic sign • Travelling in an area not covered by the
recognition system are as follows: Navigation system.
• Speed limit detection: A corresponding sign • Non-conforming road signs.
will be displayed in the Message centre.

147
L
Driving aids

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING Note: Make sure the windscreen area in front
of the rear-view mirror is kept clean and free of
The Lane departure warning system is
obstructions, for example, stickers, debris, mud,
a driving aid only. It remains the
snow, ice, etc.
driver's responsibility to drive with due
care and attention, in a manner which If the vehicle crosses either of the lane markings
is safe for the vehicle, its occupants that it is travelling within, without activation of
and the other road users. The driver the appropriate indicator, then the Lane
should still observe all other road departure warning system will alert the driver
signs, road markings and situations via one of the methods below:
that are not detected or recognised by • Steering wheel vibration (haptic feedback).
the Lane departure warning system. • Graphical displays in the Message centre.
Note: The Lane departure warning system will
only provide warnings to the driver. It will not
assist in changing the direction of the vehicle
or operate any of the vehicle's systems.
Note: The Lane departure warning system will
not detect unmarked edges of the road.
The sensitivity of the Lane departure warning
system can be adjusted between High or
Press the button to disable/enable the Lane Normal sensitivity via Driving Features in the
departure warning system. Instrument panel menu.
When enabled, an indicator lamp will illuminate When set at Normal sensitivity, the Lane
in the Message centre to confirm. The status of departure warning system will suppress any
the system is also shown by the changes of the warnings, if driver intervention is detected, as
lane icon colours and the vehicle's position icon listed below:
within the indicator lamp. • Operation of the accelerator pedal.
The Lane departure warning system can also • Significant movement of the steering wheel.
be switched off/on via Driving Features in the • Operation of the brakes.
Instrument panel menu. See 49, INSTRUMENT
• Activation of the appropriate indicator.
PANEL MENU.
When set at High sensitivity, the Lane departure
Note: When the ignition is switched on, the Lane
warning system will not suppress any warnings,
departure warning system will remain at the
if driver intervention is detected (unless the
previous on or off status and also retain the
appropriate indicator is activated).
previous settings.
If the Lane departure warning system detects a
The Lane departure warning system uses the
fault or is not available, then the General
forward-facing camera, located in the base of
warning/information message (amber) will be
the rear-view mirror.
displayed in the Message centre. See 53,
GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATION MESSAGE
(AMBER).

148
 R
Driving aids

Lane departure warning limitations

• When set at High sensitivity, the vehicle’s
speed needs to be between 50 km/h (30
mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph)*.
• When set at Normal sensitivity, the vehicle’s
speed needs to be between 60 km/h (40
mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph)*.
Note: *Dependent on the Instrument panel
being configured to display in km/h or mph.
• The lane in use must be wider than 2.5 m
(8.2 ft).
• No warning given if the correct indicator is
active.
• Not active in off-road conditions.
• Not available when the sand or mud-ruts,
Terrain response programs are selected.
The performance of the Lane departure warning
system may also be affected in the following
conditions:
• Adverse driving conditions. For example
heavy fog, rain, snow, etc.
• Worn, damaged or temporary lane
markings, for example, road works, etc.
• Tight deviations of the roads and their
gradients.
• Driving towards very bright lights/lamps.
• Driving very close to another vehicle.

149
L
Media

MEDIA CONTROLS

In the interest of safety, only operate, • iPod*

adjust or view the system when it is • AUX
safe to do so.
Note: *Only a connected portable media or
Sustained exposure to high sound Bluetooth® device will appear on the
levels (greater than 85 decibels) can Source list. Therefore, before selecting a
damage your hearing. device, the source media device has to be
1. Press to select the RADIO menu screen or connected or paired (Bluetooth) to the
the media screen for the last selected media vehicle.
source. 3. Press to select the Media system.
2. Media source: Press to select the media 4. Touch to select the General settings menu
source list. Touch the required media screen. For the audio settings, select Audio.
source from the list: See 151, AUDIO SETTINGS.
• FM Radio 5. Press to switch the Audio system on/off,
• AM Radio rotate to adjust the volume level.
• DAB Radio Note: The Media system will operate with
• Bluetooth* the ignition on or off, but will switch off
when the ignition is switched off. Switch
• USB*
the Media system on again, if required.

150
 R
Media

AUDIO STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS • Speed dependent volume.

• Radio: These setting options are dependent
on the radio source selected. See 152, AM/
FM RADIO CONTROLS or 153, DAB RADIO
CONTROLS.
To adjust the balance and fade settings, touch
Balance/Fade.

1. Press to increase the volume for any

source.
2. Press to decrease the volume for any
source.
3. Skip/scan backwards: Press to skip back to
the beginning of the current track being
played, or press and hold to scan
backwards through the current track being
played. Playback resumes when the button Touch the arrow soft keys (1) to move the
is released. sound focal point to the desired area of the
4. Skip/scan forwards: Press to skip forwards vehicle. Alternatively, touch the sound focal
to the start of the next track, or press and point (2) and 'drag' it to the required position.
hold to scan forwards through the current To return to the default setting, touch the sound
track being played. Playback resumes when focal point (2).
the button is released.
5. MODE: Press repeatedly to scroll through
all of the available, or connected, media
sources.
1. Touch the symbol to move from the
AUDIO SETTINGS Bass/Mid/Treble screen to the
To view the Audio settings menu, select Audio Balance/Fade screen.
from the General settings menu. 2. Touch the symbol to move from the
Audio settings contains the following options: Balance/Fade screen to the
Bass/Mid/Treble screen.
• Traffic Announcement. Turn on/off.
• Sound: Select to view the following options:
• Balance/Fade.
• Bass/Mid/Treble.

151
L
Media

AM/FM RADIO CONTROLS

1. Stations: Touch to select the Station list for • Touch to tune to the station stored on
the chosen radio source. that preset.
2. Source: Touch to select the media source • Touch and hold to store the current
list. See 150, MEDIA CONTROLS. station on that preset.
3. Status icons: Displays TA and TP (if • Use the seek buttons on the steering
selected). wheel to change to the next or previous
4. Seek down: Touch to auto-seek down the preset station.
frequency to the next radio station. 10. Touch to scroll through the preset stations.
Note: In some markets, additional buttons 11. Touch to select the General settings menu.
are available to enable manual tuning. Select Audio and then Radio, where the
5. The selected station name and frequency. following features can be
activated/deactivated:
6. Seek up: Touch to auto-seek up the
frequency to the next radio station. • Manual tune.
Note: In some markets, additional buttons • Radiotext (FM only).
are available to enable manual tuning. • Alternative Frequency (FM only).
7. Waveband image (if available). • Regionalization (FM only).
8. Information from the selected station. Note: Settings options may vary, depending
9. Station presets: on the market.

152
 R
Media

DAB RADIO CONTROLS

1. Stations: Touch to select the Station list for 11. Information from the selected station.
the selected waveband. 12. Station presets:
2. Source: Touch to select the media source • Touch and release to tune to the radio
list. station stored on that preset.
3. Status icons: Showing the connected • Touch and hold to store the current
phone's network, phone battery level and radio station on that preset.
network signal strength, also TA and TP (if
• Use the seek buttons on the steering
selected).
wheel to change to the next or previous
4. Seek down: Touch to auto-seek down the preset radio station.
frequency to the next radio station.
13. Touch to scroll through the preset stations.
5. Seek down: Touch to auto-seek down the
14. Touch to select the General settings menu.
frequency to the next radio ensemble.
Select Audio and then Radio, where the
6. The selected radio ensemble name. following features can be
7. The selected radio station name. activated/deactivated:
8. Seek up: Touch to auto-seek up the • Radiotext.
frequency to the next radio ensemble. • Alternative Frequency.
9. Seek up: Touch to auto-seek up the • DAB L-Band.
frequency to the next radio station.
10. Waveband image (if available).

153
L
Media

Instructional video - DAB radio. Note: Some MP3 players have their own file
system that is not supported by this system. To
use your MP3 player, you must set it to USB
Removable Device or Mass Storage Device
mode. Only music that has been added to the
device in this mode can be played.
For a list of compatible Bluetooth® wireless
technology devices, please refer to the Land
PORTABLE MEDIA CONNECTIONS
Rover website at: www.landrover.com.
Portable media devices can be connected to the
The Bluetooth® wireless technology devices
media hub, located in the cubby box.
listed have been tested for compatibility with
Compatible portable devices include:
Land Rover vehicles. Performance will vary,
• USB mass storage devices (e.g., a memory based on the device’s software version and the
stick). Devices must use FAT or FAT32 file battery's condition. Devices are warranted by
format. their manufacturer, not Jaguar Land Rover.
• iPod (iPod Classic, iPod Touch, iPhone and
iPod Nano are supported - full functionality
for older devices cannot be guaranteed).
iPod Shuffle functionality cannot be
guaranteed.
• Auxiliary (AUX) device (personal audio, MP3
players, all iPods).
Note: Auxiliary devices have no Touch
screen control.
If you are connecting an iPod, mass storage or
Bluetooth® wireless technology device, use the
Touch screen to operate and search for the
device.
Please disconnect your iPod when
leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in the iPod battery discharging.
Note: The Audio system will play MP3, WMA
and AAC files.
To maximise playback quality, it is
recommended that lossless compression is
used for any media files on USB or iPod. Failing
this, it is recommended that compressed files
utilise a minimum bitrate of 192 kb/s (a higher
bitrate is strongly recommended).
Note: iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer
Inc., registered in the US and other countries.

154
 R
Media

CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICE Note: The Navigation system, Voice and

various telephone features will not function
Read the manufacturer's instructions for
if the SD card is not correctly inserted into
any device, before it is connected to the
the slot.
Audio system. Make sure the device is
The SD card slot should only be used for
suitable and complies with any
the SD card supplied for the vehicle to
instructions regarding connection and
support Navigation, Voice and various
operation. Failure to do so may result in
telephone features. No other SD cards
damage to the vehicle’s Audio system
should be used, because the Media system
or the auxiliary device.
will not play music, or display saved images
from an SD card.
Note: The installation of any additional
content, or the modification of existing
content of the SD card supplied for the
vehicle, may render the SD card unusable
in the Media system.
2. USB socket.
3. 3.5 mm AUX socket.
There is a USB socket or sockets (depending
on vehicle specification), located in the
loadspace if third row seats are fitted. These
sockets are not connected to the Media system
and should only be used for charging a phone
or device.
Do not plug non-audio devices into the
USB port.
Note: Use the cable supplied with your media
device to connect to the USB socket.
Note: A USB hub cannot be used to connect
more than one USB device to the audio unit.
Connect the device into the appropriate socket: Note: Devices connected to the USB ports will
1. SD card slot: Insert the SD card, until it be charged, but devices that are fully discharged
clicks into place. will not play.

155
L
Media

Note: In some cases, if an iPhone is connected

via a USB cable for music and also to a
Bluetooth® wireless technology device for other
phone functions, the audio will stream through
only the last connected port. For example, if a
Bluetooth® wireless technology device is the
last connection made to the iPhone and the USB
(iPod) lead is connected, no audio will be heard
through the speakers via the USB (iPod) lead.
Track title and time information will still be
shown on the display. Audio output from the
speakers will only be obtained if the user
chooses audio mode on the Bluetooth®
wireless technology device. To address this
issue, disconnect and reconnect your device's
USB cable or open the iPod application on the
iPhone, select the Bluetooth icon and select
Dock Connector on the pop-up.
When an iPod is connected, playback will
continue from the point at which it was last
playing, provided the iPod battery is in a good
state of charge.
Note: Options, such as Repeat and Shuffle,
relate to the device currently playing; they will
not apply to any subsequent device.
The 3.5 mm AUX socket allows extra equipment
(e.g., personal stereos MP3 player, hand-held
navigation unit, etc.) to be connected to the
Audio system.
Note: iPod shuffle may be connected via the
AUX socket.

156
 R
Media

PORTABLE MEDIA CONTROLS

The following portable devices can be used on 4. Status icons: Showing the connected
the Media system: iPod, USB, AUX and phone's network, phone battery level and
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices. network signal strength, also TA and TP (if
Note: Auxiliary devices have no Touch screen selected).
controls. 5. Information relating to the music or audio
1. Track list: Touch to select the list of tracks being played.
from the connected device. 6. Image display:
2. Browse: Touch to select the menu screen • If available, the album art for the current
for the required music or audio source track being played will be displayed.
subject list for the connected device: The image will also appear on the Media
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, etc. soft key on the HOME page.
3. Source: Touch to select the media source • When a video (from a connected USB
menu screen. source only) is about to be played, an
Note: The media source has to be image from the video is displayed.
connected to the vehicle before it will appear 7. Progress bar: Drag the spot or touch the
in the media source list. line to move forwards or backwards through
the track.

157
L
Media

8. Touch to select the General settings menu CONNECTING MULTIPLE DEVICES

screen. Audio or Bluetooth settings can
Do not plug non-audio devices into the
then be selected.
USB port.
9. Continuous play: Touch to play the current
You can connect multiple devices
track continuously.
simultaneously to the portable media interface
10. Skip/scan forwards: Touch to skip forwards and switch between them via the Source
to the start of the next track, or, touch and selector. Select iPod, USB, Bluetooth or AUX,
hold to scan forwards through the current to switch between modes.
track being played. Playback resumes when
The device docked first will remain the active
the soft key is released.
device until you choose to change.
11. Pause/play: Touch to pause playback; touch
If, after changing to the newly-docked device,
again to resume playback.
you change back to the first device, play will
12. Skip/scan backwards: Touch to skip back resume at the point you left it (USB and iPod
to the beginning of the current track being only).
played, or, touch and hold to scan
Note: You cannot use a USB hub to connect
backwards through the current track being
more than one USB device to the audio unit.
played. Playback resumes when the soft key
is released. Note: Devices connected to the iPod and USB
ports will be charged, but devices that are fully
13. Shuffle: Touch to play random tracks from
discharged will not play.
the current MP3 folder, USB folder or iPod
playlist.
PAIRING AND CONNECTING A
PLAYING A PORTABLE DEVICE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
If you are using a USB mass storage device or For information on pairing and connecting a
an approved iPod, you can control playback Bluetooth device, see 161, PAIRING AND
using the Touch screen controls. CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH® PHONE OR
DEVICE.
If you are using a Bluetooth® wireless
technology device, you can control playback For further information on Bluetooth® wireless
using the Touch screen, but some controls are technology, see 161, BLUETOOTH®
unavailable. INFORMATION.
If you are using any portable media device via
the AUX socket, then you must control playback
from the device itself.
Land Rover does not recommend the
use of a Hard Disc Drive via the USB link
while the vehicle is in motion. These
devices are not designed for in-car use
and may be damaged.

158
 R
Media

LICENSING

Manufactured under licence from Dolby

Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are
registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under licence, under U.S. Patent

#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS
2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes
software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

159
L
Voice control

USING VOICE CONTROL Note: As the commands are listed before the
system is ready to listen, it is important to wait
Note: The Voice system has been designed to
for the voice symbol to appear, before saying a
recognise a number of languages. However,
command.
Land Rover cannot guarantee the system will
be compatible with every accent group within Say Cancel (at any time) to cancel the current
those languages. Please speak to a voice command.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer about testing the
Voice system for compatibility with a particular NAVIGATION POI VOICE COMMANDS
accent group. To request the display of Points Of Interest
Note: The Voice system will not operate unless (POIs), say Find next with 1 of the following
the SD card supplied with the vehicle is inserted POI categories:
correctly into the SD card slot. See 155, • Find next (Petrol station/Petrol).
CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICE.
• Find next (Parking/Car park).
• Find next (Land Rover [Dealer]).
• Find next (Hospital).
• Find next (Golf course).
• Find next (Tourist information office).
• Find next (Restaurant).
• Find next (Shopping centre).
• Find next (Hotel/Motel).
• Find next (say a Brand name) of the POI
category.
To start a voice session, briefly press the voice Note: The word Find next must be followed
button on the steering wheel. The Teleprompter immediately by a category.
list appears on the Touch screen. To cancel a
voice session, press and hold the voice button.
Note: Briefly press the voice button during a
voice session, to interrupt audible feedback.
Wait for the tone to sound before giving the next
command.
Teleprompter list: This list provides feedback
and available commands for each stage of the
voice session.
Voice symbol: This indicates that a
command is available. Wait for the
symbol to appear and a tone to
sound before saying a command.

160
 R
Bluetooth®

BLUETOOTH® INFORMATION Note: The Bluetooth® wireless technology

devices listed, have been tested for compatibility
Bluetooth® is the name for short-range Radio
with Land Rover vehicles. Performance will vary,
Frequency (RF) technology that allows
based on the phone’s software version, battery
electronic devices to communicate wirelessly
condition, coverage, and your network provider.
with each other.
Phones are warranted by their manufacturer,
The Land Rover Bluetooth wireless technology not Land Rover.
system supports Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile
(HFP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
PAIRING AND CONNECTING A
(A2DP), Audio Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Message Access Profile (MAP). BLUETOOTH® PHONE OR DEVICE
Note: HFP and A2DP/AVRCP profiles can be A paired phone or device can be connected for
connected independently, so a phone can be different uses; phone or music. Pairing is
connected via one, while a media device can be normally only required once.
connected via the other, at the same time. When the ignition is switched on, the vehicle
Before making use of the vehicle’s Bluetooth automatically tries to re-connect to a previously
wireless technology phone system, your paired Bluetooth® phone or device, if it is
Bluetooth® wireless technology device must within range of the vehicle.
be paired and connected to the vehicle's system. If not automatically connected, or to connect a
This is done using one of two methods; via your new phone or device, follow one of the following
phone to the vehicle (preferred method) or from pairing methods:
the Touch screen to your phone. If one of these Pairing using the phone or device (preferred
methods is not successful, try the other option. method):
Each time the ignition is switched on, the 1. Switch the ignition on and make sure the
system will attempt to connect with the last Touch screen is active.
connected phone.
2. Select General settings, then Bluetooth.
As mobile phones have a wide range of audio
3. From the list, select Make system
and echo characteristics, it may take a few
discoverable.
seconds for the vehicle's system to adapt and
deliver optimum audio performance. To achieve 4. Switch on your phone or device’s
this, it may be necessary to reduce the Bluetooth® wireless technology device
in-vehicle volume and ventilation fan speed connection. Using your phone or device,
slightly. search for and select your vehicle's
Bluetooth connection (see your phone or
device’s operating instructions for more
TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY
information).
Please refer to the Owners section of the Land
5. A Passkey number appears on the phone
Rover website at: www.landrover.com, for a
or device. If this number matches the
list of compatible phones.
number on the Touch screen, touch Yes,
or press Pair on the phone or device.

161
L
Bluetooth®

Pairing using the Touch screen CHANGING THE CONNECTED PHONE

1. Switch on your phone or device’s OR DEVICE
Bluetooth® wireless technology device Up to 4 mobile phones or devices can be paired
connection. Make sure that your phone or with the vehicle in the same way. However, only
device is in Bluetooth® wireless technology 2 can be connected and ready for use as a
device discoverable mode, sometimes phone or device at any one time (one for phone
referred to as find me mode (see your and one for media).
phone or device’s operating instructions for
more information). To connect a different paired phone to the
vehicle:
2. Switch the ignition on and make sure the
Touch screen is active. 1. From the PHONE menu screen, select
Change device. See 163, TELEPHONE
3. Select General settings. SYSTEM OVERVIEW.
4. From the displayed list, select Bluetooth. 2. A menu will appear. Select a paired device
5. The system searches for a phone or device from the list.
and, if found, the phone or device displays
on the screen. DELETING A PAIRED PHONE OR
If the phone or device is not found, NO
DEVICE
DEVICES FOUND displays.
To delete a phone or device from the system:
Note: The phone/device list can store up to
4 entries. 1. In General settings, select Bluetooth.
6. A Passkey number appears on the phone 2. From the list, select List of paired devices.
or device. If this number matches the 3. Select the phone or device to be deleted.
number on the Touch screen, touch Yes. 4. From the list, select Delete pairing to delete
7. Once a phone or device is paired, it appears the phone or device from the system.
on the connected device's list and on the
PHONE screen and it appears in the
Bluetooth, List of paired devices section.
Instructional video - Pairing a Bluetooth device
to the vehicle.

162
 R
Telephone

TELEPHONE SYSTEM OVERVIEW

For information on connecting a Bluetooth® 3. Contacts: Touch to select the connected

phone or device. See 161, PAIRING AND phone's Contacts list. Scroll through the list
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH® PHONE OR or use the alphas (A-C, D-F etc.) to find the
DEVICE. contact more quickly.
For information on mobile phone compatibility, 4. Call lists: Touch to access the connected
see 161, TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY. phone's Call lists.
Note: Some Telephone system features will not 5. Keypad: Touch to display the keypad.
operate unless the SD card supplied with the 6. Network signal strength icon.
vehicle is inserted correctly into the SD card
7. The connected phone's battery level icon.
slot. See 155, CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICE.
8. Status display: Displays the number or
1. Change device: Touch to search for a new,
contact selected.
or change to another paired phone or
device. 9. Keypad.
2. Messages: Touch to select the Messages 10. Name of the connected phone.
inbox, or to create a new message. 11. The connected phone's network provider.
12. Missed calls: Indicates any missed calls.
13. New messages: Indicates that a new
message/s has been received.

163
L
Telephone

14. Settings: Touch to display the General The functioning of cardiac pacemakers
settings menu. Select PHONE, for the or hearing aids may be impaired when
following options: the phone is in use. Check with a
• Announce incoming messages: Turn doctor or manufacturer whether any
on/off. such devices you or your passengers
are using, are sufficiently protected
• Refresh phonebook: Select to refresh
against high-frequency energy.
the connected phone's Phonebook.
The Health Industry Manufacturers' Association
15. Touch to make or answer a call (green
recommends that a minimum separation of 15
button), or touch to end a call (red button).
centimetres (6 inches) is maintained between
a wireless phone antenna and a pacemaker, to
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS avoid potential interference with the pacemaker.
These recommendations are consistent with
independent research by, and recommendations
of, Wireless Technology Research.

CALL VOLUME
The phone call's volume is operated by the
Audio system’s volume control.
If the Audio system is in use when a phone call
is active, the Audio system source is muted for
the duration of the call.

1. Press to answer an incoming call. Press to RECEIVING TEXT MESSAGES

make or end a call. When a pop-up screen appears with an
2. Press to increase the volume when in a call. incoming text message, touch the Show button.
3. Press to decrease the volume when in a call. A screen will appear with the following options:
• Reply: Touch to select a screen where a
TELEPHONE SAFETY reply can be entered and sent.
Switch off your telephone in areas with Note: This option is only available when the
a high explosion risk. This includes vehicle is stationary.
filling stations, fuel storage areas or • Template: Touch to select a list of replies
chemical factories, as well as places (e.g., Yes, No, Thank you!, I'll be arriving
where the air contains fuel vapour, a little late, etc.) Select the required reply.
chemicals or metal dust.
• Read Out: Touch for the message to be read
Always stow your mobile phone out as an audio message.
securely.

164
 R
InControl

INCONTROL OVERVIEW • A journey details download feature, to assist

if you need to claim business mileage
InControl™ uses Smartphone and in-vehicle
expenses.
mobile technology, to remotely connect your
vehicle to a number of services and convenience The InControl Remote Smartphone App can be
features. downloaded for Apple’s iPhone from the Apple
App Store, or for Android phones, from Google
InControl has 4 main features:
Play.
• InControl Remote.
Breakdown call
• InControl Secure.
Located in the overhead console.
• InControl Wi-Fi.
See 290, DRIVER CONTROLS.
• InControl Apps.
If InControl has not been pre-registered by your In the event of a breakdown, press and release
Dealer, or if you are not the first owner of the the button cover to reveal the button. The button
vehicle, you will need to visit: will be illuminated by a white LED. Press the
www.landroverincontrol.com/owner to create button for 2 seconds to call. Your location and
an account. Once your account has been the vehicle’s details will automatically be
created, follow the on-screen instructions to provided to Land Rover Assistance.
connect your account to your vehicle, and to When a call is initiated, the button will flash
activate Incontrol. amber and will be constantly illuminated amber
Note: 100% mobile connectivity cannot be during the call.
guaranteed in all locations. Push the button cover back into place, after use.
Note: It is the owner’s responsibility to remove SOS Emergency call
the vehicle from their InControl account when
Located in the overhead console.
ownership of the vehicle is transferred.
See 290, DRIVER CONTROLS.

INCONTROL REMOTE In the event that your personal safety or security

InControl Remote comprises the following: is at risk, press and release the button cover to
reveal the button. The button will be illuminated
• A Remote Smartphone App.
by a red LED. Press the button for 2 seconds
• A breakdown call feature. to call. Your location and the vehicle’s details
• An SOS Emergency call feature. will automatically be provided to the emergency
Remote Smartphone App services.

The Remote Smartphone App has a number of When a call is initiated, the button will flash
different features, including: amber. The button will be constantly illuminated
amber during a call.
• A remote fuel level and range check.
Push the button cover back into place after use.
• A vehicle locator, to help you find your
vehicle in a busy car park. Note: In the event that any of the vehicle’s
airbags are deployed, or a crash is detected, an
• Check to see if you have left any windows SOS Emergency call will be automatically
or doors open. triggered.

165
L
InControl

Note: If you are travelling in a different country, The SIM card reader utilizes a ‘Mini-SIM’
a call will still connect, however, the vehicle’s interface. If your SIM card is a different size, for
location and details may not be automatically example, ‘Micro-SIM’, an adaptor or
sent. replacement SIM card will be required.
Your Wi-Fi Hotspot IMEI number can be
INCONTROL SECURE accessed via the Wi-Fi hotspot router menu (see
InControl Secure provides a stolen vehicle Wi-Fi settings below). Your mobile network
tracking service. In the event that the vehicle provider may need this information in order to
has been tampered with, or moved without your activate a SIM card.
consent, you will be contacted by the InControl Note: If your SIM card has previously been used
Secure Monitoring Centre. Alternatively, use the in a mobile phone, or any other device, and a
InControl Remote Smartphone App, or the Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been
phone number on the InControl website, to set, remove the PIN before using the SIM card
contact the InControl Secure Monitoring Centre. in the vehicle.
When the vehicle is being serviced or repaired,
InControl must be set to Service mode. This
can be done by using the InControl Remote
Smartphone App, or via the InControl website.
If the vehicle is being transported, InControl
must be set to Transport mode. Again, this can
be done by using the InControl Remote
Smartphone App, or via the InControl website.
Failure to set Service mode or Transport mode
could trigger a false theft alert. To install a SIM card, press the button (1) to
release the SIM card holder (2). Insert the SIM
Note: When set, Service or Transport mode
card into the holder, as indicated (3).
should be updated every 10 hours, or more
frequently, if required. Fully close the SIM card holder.
Note: For further information, visit the InControl Note: The USB port (4) is for Service use only.
section of www.landrover.com. Make sure the SIM card is located
correctly in the card holder. Failure to
INCONTROL WI-FI do so may damage the SIM card or SIM
InControl Wi-Fi allows passengers to connect card reader.
to the internet using a high speed 3G Wi-Fi settings
connection. InControl Wi-Fi can be turned on and off using
A SIM card must be inserted into the SIM card the Touch screen. On the Extra features screen,
holder. The SIM card holder is located behind select WiFi Hotspot. For more information, see
a cover on the left side of the loadspace. 80, EXTRA FEATURES.

166
 R
InControl

The WiFi Hotspot screen also allows you to INCONTROL APPS

adjust basic system settings. More advanced
In the interests of safety, operate,
settings, including changing your security
adjust or view the system only when it
password and Access Point Name (APN)
is safe to do so.
configuration, can be carried out by accessing
the Wi-Fi hotspot router menu on your mobile Do not adjust the Touch screen
device. controls, or allow the system to distract
the driver, while the vehicle is moving.
To access the Wi-Fi hotspot router menu:
Driver distraction can lead to
• From the WiFi Hotspot screen, select Help. accidents, causing serious injury or
• The Wi-Fi hotspot router address will be death.
displayed on the Touch screen. Copy this InControl™ Apps allows you to view and operate
address into your mobile device’s Internet approved Smartphone apps through the
explorer browser. vehicle’s Touch screen.
The Wi-Fi hotspot router menu will now be Before using InControl Apps, you will need to
displayed on your mobile device. Log in using download the InControl Apps Smartphone App.
your InControl account details. For Apple’s iPhone®, this can be downloaded
Wi-Fi icons from the Apple App Store. For android phones,
this can be downloaded from Google Play.
Note: Not all Smartphones are compatible with
InControl Apps. Check the list of compatible
Smartphones and supported apps in the Owners
section of www.landrover.com.
Note: To establish a connection to the vehicle,
the Smartphone must be unlocked and
1. 3G mobile phone network connectivity.
connected to the USB port.
2. 2G mobile phone network connectivity.
Note: Make sure that all phone covers and cases
3. Connecting. are in the open position. Closed covers or cases
4. No mobile phone network connection. may cause the phone to become locked and;
therefore, prevent connection to InControl Apps.

1. Wi-Fi hotspot on.

2. Wi-Fi hotspot initialising.

167
L
InControl

Note: Apple, iPhone, is a trademark of Apple

Inc, registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

To initiate InControl Apps, connect your

Smartphone, using your Smartphone's USB
cable, to the USB port located in the centre
cubby box.
Note: iPhone users: When prompted by the
phone, you must give permission to allow the
App to open.
Note: Android phone users: When prompted by
the phone, you can give permission to always
allow the App to open.
Once connected, select InControl Apps from
the Touch screen’s HOME menu. You can
navigate to the InControl Apps feature on your
vehicle and any compatible apps will be
displayed on the vehicle’s Touch screen. You
can now open and operate these apps using the
vehicle's Touch screen.
Note: If the ignition or the engine is switched
off, the Bluetooth connection between the phone
and the vehicle will be disconnected. To
reconnect the phone to the vehicle via Bluetooth,
see 161, PAIRING AND CONNECTING A
BLUETOOTH® PHONE OR DEVICE.

168
 R
Navigation system

THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM • 2 roads are close and parallel.

Navigation instruction is by map and turn • The vehicle has been transported to another
information displayed on the Touch screen and destination.
can be complemented by voice guidance, if • The vehicle has been rotated on a turntable.
required. The system uses signals from Global • The vehicle's battery has been
Positioning System (GPS) satellites, combined disconnected.
with information from vehicle sensors and from
data stored on the SD card, to establish the true
position of the vehicle.
NAVIGATION SD CARD
Using this combination of data sources, the
vehicle's navigation computer enables you to
plan and follow a route map to your desired
destination.
The Touch screen is used to control navigation
via menus, text screens and map displays.
Operate the system only when it is safe
to do so.
Note: The Navigation system fitted to your
vehicle does not support speed camera alerts.
The requirements of national Road Traffic
Regulations always apply.
Observation of traffic signs and local traffic
regulations always take priority.
The Navigation system serves solely as an aid
to navigation. In particular, the Navigation
system cannot be used as an aid to orientation
when visibility is poor.
The Navigation SD card reader is located in the
GPS signals may occasionally be interrupted front centre cubby box. Make sure the SD card
due to physical barriers, such as tunnels and is located correctly in the card reader before
roads, under raised highways. operating the Navigation system.
However, direction and speed sensors on the For updates to the Navigation system's maps,
vehicle will minimise any adverse effect on the visit
Navigation system. Normal operation will www.landrover.com/map-updates/incontrol-touch/,
resume once the obstruction has been passed. or contact your Land Rover Dealer.
Under certain conditions, it is possible for the Note: If for any reason the SD card is ejected
vehicle's position shown on the screen to be while the Navigation system is in operation, the
incorrect. This may happen when: Navigation system will not operate until the
• Driving on a spiral ramp in a building. vehicle's ignition is switched off and the vehicle
• Driving on, or beneath, elevated roads. is restarted.

169
L
Navigation system

USING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

In the interests of safety, only operate,
adjust or view the system when it is
safe to do so.
The Navigation system is not a
substitute for driving safely, with due
care and attention. Drivers should not
assume that a feature will correct
errors in judgement when driving. It is
the driver's responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times, relative to the
prevailing conditions. It is also the
driver's responsibility to determine the
safety of the route suggested by the
Navigation system. The Navigation
system may not function properly in all
circumstances.
Do not allow the system to distract the
driver while the vehicle is moving.
Driver distraction can lead to accidents
causing serious injury or death.
To access the Navigation system, press the
Navigation button or touch the Navigation area
on the HOME screen.
This will show the current vehicle position.
Touch the Nav menu soft key to display the NAV
MENU screen.
At this point, the first time user should set up
personal preferences in the Nav set-up area.
These settings are applied, whenever the
Navigation system is used.

170
 R
Navigation system

MAIN MENU

1. Where To?: Touch for a list of options for

setting a destination. See 173, WHERE TO?.
2. Map View: Touch to view the map screen.
3. Favourites: Touch to view the list of stored
destinations.
4. Settings: Touch to view the General
settings or Navigation menu. See 172,
SETTINGS.
5. Stop Guidance: Touch to cancel the current
route guidance.
6. Emergency: Touch to see a list of
emergency services. See 174, EMERGENCY.
7. Information: Touch to display the following:
Traffic, Where am I, and Trip computer.

171
L
Navigation system

MAP SCREEN

1. Touch to select the NAV MENU. 11. Indicates the vehicle's position on the set
2. Touch to select the Route menu. route.
3. Touch to set a selected destination. 12. The route that has been set.
4. Touch to show information for a Point of
Interest (POI), or for traffic information. SETTINGS
5. Touch to reduce the map size. Touch the Settings icon on the NAV MENU
screen, or on the map screen, to view the
6. Drag the indicator along the scale to enlarge following options:
or reduce the map size, or touch the line for
the position required. • Speed limit warning.
7. Touch to enlarge the map size. Note: When the Speed limit warning feature
is in operation, it will only register the
8. Touch to change between estimated time official speed limit for the road; it will not
to destination and distance to destination. register any temporary speed limits (e.g.,
9. Next manoeuvre icon and the distance to speed limits for: road works, congestion,
the next manoeuvre. Touch to hear voice fog, etc.). Also, speed limits shown are only
guidance for the next manoeuvre. accurate up to the last map update.
10. Touch to view the General settings or • Guidance. See 173, SETTINGS - GUIDANCE.
Navigation menu. See 172, SETTINGS.

172
 R
Navigation system

• POI list sorting. • Others.

• GPS: Select to set the coordinate format. • Avoid (only available when under guidance).
• Map Display Mode: Select to set Day,
Night, or Automatic as an option. WHERE TO?
• Map View: Select 2D or 3D. To set route guidance, select Where To? on the
• Orientation. NAV MENU to view the following options:
• Current Street. • Address: Touch to view the following
options:
• Auto Zoom.
• Spell City.
• Show POI Icons.
• Enter Post Code.
• POI icon list (only available when Show POI
Icons is selected). • Enter Country.
• TMC Incidents. • Recent: Select to view a list of recent
destinations; touch the required destination
• Speed and Flow. from the list.
• 3D City Models. • Point of interest (POI): Select to view the
• 3D Landmarks. POI list of locations and public places.
• Digital Terrain Model. • Favourites: Select to view a list favourite
• Park Areas. destinations.
• Railroads. • Go Home: Select to enter the destination as
a home address, or to select a preset home
• City Areas.
address destination.
• River Names.
• Intersection: Select and enter the area
• System Information. required (City, Town, etc.) followed by 2
street names, to find an Intersection
SETTINGS - GUIDANCE destination.
Touch the Guidance option on the Settings • GEO Coordinate: Select to enter a known
menu, to view the following options: GEO Coordinate as a destination.
• Play Voice Guidance Prompts. A GEO Coordinate can be obtained from a
handheld GPS receiver, a map, or the
• Lane Recommendation.
Navigation system.
• Junction View.
• Point on Map: Use to select a destination
• TMC Route Mode. directly from the map screen. By selecting
• TMC Avoidance Types: Select to turn the a street segment or icon, you can quickly
following ON/OFF: enter a destination without the need to input
• Accidents. the city name or street.
• Closures. • City Centre: Select to enter the name of a
city. The Navigation system will calculate a
• Traffic flow. route to the centre of the City entered.
• Lane Restrictions.

173
L
Navigation system

• Closest Cities: Select to view a list of the To search for any of the emergency services
Closest cities. listed above:
• Phone Number: Select and enter a known 1. Select the emergency service required.
phone number as a destination. 2. Use one of the following categories to find
the emergency service:
POINTS OF INTEREST (POI) • Name.
To set a destination from the selection of POIs: • Distance.
In Where To?, touch Point of Interest to view
the following list: 3. Select the required emergency service from
the list and touch Yes to confirm the
• All Categories. destination.
• Gas Stations. 4. If you are already on a route guidance, the
• Restaurants. system will ask you to select one of the
• Hotels. following:
• ATM / banking. • Cancel previous route.
• Spell name. • Add as first destination.
The POI search area selection can also be • Add as last destination.
changed by selecting the Change Search Area
soft key; the following options are listed: TO SET A SELECTED DESTINATION
• Around Me. Once a destination has been selected, there are
• Near Destination (this is only available 4 options:
during a route guidance). • Yes: Select to accept the selected
• In a City. destination and start guidance.
• Along Route (this is only available during • Options: When calculating a route, various
a route guidance). options can be selected.
Before accepting the requested route, touch
When the required POI has been found, touch
Options to view the following list of the
to select it as a destination.
options:
• Fast.
EMERGENCY
• Short.
On the NAV MENU screen, select Emergency
to see the following list of emergency options: • Economical.
• Hospital: Search and route to a hospital • Route Alternative.
close to your current location. • Round Trip.
• Police: Search and route to a police station Select the required option from the list.
close to your current location. • Avoid: When calculating a route, a road type
• Location: Select to show details of your to avoid can be set.
current location. Before accepting the requested route, touch
Avoid to view a list of options to avoid.
• Save: Select to save your location as a
Select the required option from the list.
favourite.

174
 R
Navigation system

• Save: When calculating a route, the The Data for Mexico includes certain data from
destination can be saved as a favourite. Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía.
Before accepting the requested route, touch
Save to save the route to your Favourites.

SOFT KEY ICONS

Touch this icon to edit text or delete
the text from the list.

Touch this icon to change the order

of text in a list. Use the up and down
arrows to move the text to the
required position. Touch the icon
again to register the new position.

NAVIGATION TERMS AND

CONDITIONS
The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal,
internal use only and not for resale. It is
protected by copyright, and is subject to the
following terms and conditions which are agreed
to by you, on the one hand, and Jaguar Land
Rover Automotive PLC (“Jaguar Land Rover”)
and its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. © 2014 HERE. All
rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer
for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources
Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information. ©United States Postal
Service® 2014. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States
Postal Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.

175
L
Navigation system

Terms and Conditions • No Warranty: This Data is provided to you

• Personal Use Only: You agree to use this “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Data together with the provided Jaguar Land risk. Jaguar Land Rover and its licensors
Rover navigation system for the solely (and their licensors and suppliers) make no
personal, non-commercial purposes for guarantees, representations or warranties
which you were licensed, and not for service of any kind, express or implied, arising by
bureau, time-sharing or other similar law or otherwise, including but not limited
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
restrictions set forth in the following effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise particular purpose, usefulness, use or
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, results to be obtained from this Data, or
disassemble, create any derivative works that the Data or server will be uninterrupted
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this or error-free.
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it • Disclaimer of Warranty: Jaguar Land Rover
in any form, for any purpose, except to the Automotive PLC AND ITS LICENSORS
extent permitted by mandatory laws. (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
• Restrictions: Except where you have been SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
specifically licensed to do so by Jaguar EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,
Land Rover, and without limiting the PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
this Data with any products, systems, or OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
applications installed or otherwise Territories and Countries do not allow
connected to or in communication with certain warranty exclusions, so to that
vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, extent the above exclusion may not apply
positioning, dispatch, real time route to you.
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may
lead to incorrect results.

176
 R
Navigation system

• Disclaimer of Liability: Jaguar Land Rover • Export Control: Jaguar Land Rover
Automotive PLC AND ITS LICENSORS Automotive PLC shall not export from
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO product thereof except in compliance with,
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, and with all licenses and approvals required
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF under, applicable export laws, rules and
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE regulations, including but not limited to the
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING laws, rules and regulations administered by
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM U.S. Department of Commerce and the
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF Department of Commerce. To the extent
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR that any such export laws, rules or
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, regulations prohibit HERE from complying
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR with any of its obligations hereunder to
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE be excused and shall not constitute a breach
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE of this Agreement.
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE • Entire Agreement: These terms and
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN conditions constitute the entire agreement
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED between Jaguar Land Rover Automotive
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF Jaguar Land PLC (and its licensors, including their
Rover Automotive PLC OR ITS LICENSORS licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY to the subject matter hereof, and
OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, supersedes in their entirety any and all
Territories and Countries do not allow written or oral agreements previously
certain liability exclusions or damages existing between us with respect to such
limitations, so to that extent the above may subject matter.
not apply to you.
• Governing Law: The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the Netherlands, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the Netherlands for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.

177
L
Navigation system

• Government End Users: If the Data is being

acquired by or on behalf of the United
States government or any other entity
seeking or applying rights similar to those
customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial
item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.
(“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance
with these End-User Terms, and each copy
of Data delivered or otherwise furnished
shall be marked and embedded as
appropriate with the following “Notice of
Use,” and shall be treated in accordance
with such Notice:
Notice of use
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
c/o Nokia 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago,
Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined in
FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User
Terms under which this Data was provided.
© 1987 - 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use the
legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer,
federal government agency, or any federal
official must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.

178
 R
Fuel and refuelling

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Note: Occasional, light, engine knock,

experienced while accelerating or climbing hills,
Avoid exposing the fuel gases to any
is acceptable.
potential sources of ignition, as the
resulting fire and explosion may cause If a heavy persistent engine knock is detected,
serious injuries and/or death. even when using fuel to the recommended
octane rating, or if you hear engine knock while
Switch off the engine when refuelling.
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult
Switch off any personal electronic your Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the
devices, such as mobile phones or problem corrected. Failure to do so is misuse
music players, when refuelling. of the vehicle, for which Jaguar Land Rover is
not responsible.
PETROL ENGINED VEHICLES If in doubt, seek advice from a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer in the territory
Use high quality fuel that meets the
concerned.
specification defined by EN228 (or the
national equivalent). Super Green Plus 98 RON unleaded fuel (where
available) may be used as an alternative to the
Do not use leaded fuels, fuels with lead
standard 95 RON unleaded fuel.
substitutes (e.g., manganese-based), or
fuel additives, as these may adversely
affect the emissions control systems, ETHANOL
and may affect warranty coverage. Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol (E5 and
Fuel system cleaning agents should not E10) may be used.
be used, unless approved by Land This vehicle is not suitable for fuels
Rover. containing more than 10% ethanol.
Do not use E85 fuels (85% ethanol
OCTANE RATING content), as serious engine and fuel
Jaguar Land Rover Limited requires the use of system damage will occur.
premium unleaded fuel with a minimum octane Make sure that the fuel has octane ratings no
rating of 95 RON, to contribute to optimum lower than those recommended for unleaded
performance, fuel economy and driveability. fuel. Most drivers will not notice any operating
If premium unleaded fuel is not available, you difference with fuel containing ethanol. If a
may use unleaded fuel with a lower octane difference is detected, the use of conventional
rating, down to a minimum of 91 RON , but this unleaded fuel should be resumed.
may reduce engine performance, increase fuel
consumption, cause audible engine knock and METHANOL
other driveability problems. Wherever possible, avoid using fuel
Do not use fuels with an octane rating containing methanol.
lower than 91 RON as severe engine Use of fuels containing methanol may cause
damage may occur. serious engine and fuel system damage, which
may not be covered under warranty.

179
L
Fuel and refuelling

METHYL TERTIARY BUTYL ETHER SULPHUR CONTENT

(MTBE) If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel
Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known Particulate Filter (DPF) After treatment
as MTBE can be used, provided that the ratio system, the maximum sulphur content
of MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed of the fuel must not exceed 0.005% (50
15%. MTBE is an ether-based compound parts per million), in accordance with
derived from petroleum, which has been EN590-EU4, or World Wide Fuel Charter
specified by several refiners as the substance (WWFC) Cat 3.
to enhance the octane rating of fuel. The sulphur content of diesel fuel used
in Land Rover vehicles not fitted with a
DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES DPF, should not exceed 0.3% (3 000
Use only high quality diesel fuel, according to parts per million).
EN590 or equivalent. In some countries, diesel fuel will contain higher
Land Rover vehicles are capable of levels of sulphur, which will require reduced
running with up to a 7% blend of service intervals to reduce the effects on engine
bio-diesel, in accordance with European and After treatment components. If in doubt,
Standard EN590. Jaguar Land Rover contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
Limited does not recommend use of a Using an incorrect specification of fuel
higher blend of bio-diesel. will cause serious damage to the engine
The quality and specification of diesel fuel varies and/or After treatment system, which
significantly, depending on geographical may not be covered by the vehicle's
location. Jaguar Land Rover strongly warranty. If in doubt, contact a
recommends the use of premium, or highest Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
quality available, fuel.
High quality fuel promotes a longer life for your
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
engine components. Lower grade fuel contains Avoid running out of fuel.
higher levels of sulphur, which is detrimental
to engine components. If low quality fuel is If the vehicle does run out of fuel, a minimum
used, light coloured smoke may be evident at of 4 litres (1 gallon) will be required to restart
the exhaust. the engine. The vehicle should be left with the
ignition on for 5 minutes after refuelling, before
Prolonged use of additives is not recommended.
attempting to restart the engine. The vehicle will
Do not add paraffin or petrol to diesel fuels.
need to be driven 1.5-5 km (1-3 miles), in order
If you inadvertently fill your vehicle with to reset the engine management and monitoring
petrol instead of diesel, do not attempt systems.
to start the engine. Contact your
Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel, seeking
Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately.
qualified assistance is advisable.
Jaguar Land Rover can accept no
responsibility for any damage caused by
running your vehicle with fuel other than
those stipulated.

180
 R
Fuel and refuelling

FUEL FILLER FLAP Filling station pumps are equipped with

automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage.
Take note of all warnings and
Fill the tank slowly until the filler nozzle
instructions given on the label affixed
automatically cuts off the supply. Do not attempt
to the inside of the filler flap.
to fill the tank beyond this point.
The fuel filler flap is located on the right side of
Note: Filling station pumps used for diesel
the vehicle, at the rear.
commercial vehicles, deliver fuel at a higher rate
1. If a locking fuel filler flap is fitted, make sure than normal. The higher fill rate can cause
the vehicle's alarm system is disarmed. premature cut-off and may cause fuel spillage;
Note: The fuel filler flap can be opened only therefore, it is recommended that only standard
when the vehicle's alarm is disarmed. light vehicle pumps are used.
2. Press the flap to unlatch it. Open the flap
until the hinge lock fully engages. DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION
After refuelling, tighten the cap until it clicks DEVICE
3 times. When the misfuelling device is
3. To close the filler flap, push the flap until activated, it may cause fuel to be
latched closed. discharged from the filler neck.
Note: The filler flap will only be locked closed Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the
when the vehicle is centrally locked. vehicle with the correct fuel. The diesel
misfuelling protection device only reduces the
FUEL FILLER risk of filling the vehicle with the incorrect fuel.
When refuelling, make sure that all of Diesel engine vehicles, in some markets, are
the windows, doors, and the sunroof equipped with a misfuelling protection device,
are fully closed, particularly if young incorporated into the fuel filler neck.
children or animals are in the vehicle. If the narrow filler nozzle fitted to pumps
Do not attempt to fill the tank to its delivering unleaded petrol is fully inserted into
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to the filler neck, the misfuel protection device will
be parked on a slope, in direct activate.
sunlight, or high ambient temperature, Note: The diesel misfuelling protection device
expansion of the fuel could cause may not activate if an unleaded petrol nozzle is
spillage. only partially inserted.
Do not operate the auxiliary heater Note: The filler spout on some fuel cans and
when refuelling the vehicle. Doing so older fuel pumps may trigger the misfuelling
may cause fuel vapours to combust, device.
causing a fire/explosion.
When activated, the yellow misfuel protector
Check the fuel pump information will be visible inside the filler neck. It will
carefully, to make sure you are putting prevent fuel flow into the tank. Before fuelling
the correct fuel into the vehicle. can continue with the correct fuel, the device
If the vehicle is filled with incorrect fuel, will need to be reset.
it is essential that you seek qualified
assistance before you start the engine.

181
L
Fuel and refuelling

The reset tool is located under the loadspace FUEL TANK CAPACITY
floor.
Avoid the risk of running out of fuel and never
intentionally drive the vehicle when the fuel
gauge indicates that the tank is empty. When
refuelling your vehicle after the fuel gauge reads
empty, you may not be able to add the fuel
quantity, as there will be a small reserve
remaining in the tank. See 250, CAPACITIES.

Reset the misfuel protection device as follows:

1. Insert the reset tool with the teeth
uppermost, as far as it will go into the filler
neck.
2. Locate the teeth by pushing down on the
top of the reset tool.
3. With the top of the tool pressed down and
the teeth engaged, slowly pull the tool out
of the filler neck to reset the device.
Do not twist the device, once the teeth
have engaged.
Note: The yellow part of the protection device
should no longer be visible in the filler neck.
Return the reset tool to the loadspace.

182
 R
Fuel and refuelling

FUEL CONSUMPTION Under normal use, a vehicle’s actual fuel

consumption figures may differ from those
The fuel consumption figures, shown below,
achieved through the test procedure, depending
have been calculated using a standard testing
on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,
procedure (the new EC test procedure from
environmental factors, vehicle load and
Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in
condition.
accordance with The Passenger Car Fuel
Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.
Variant Urban Extra-urban Combined C02 emissions
L/100 km (mpg) L/100 km (mpg) L/100 km (mpg) combined g/km
Diesel, 150 PS
Manual, 5 seats 6.90 (40.9)* 5.00 (56.5)* 5.69 (49.6)* 149
Automatic, 5 seats 7.20 (39.2)* 5.30 (53.3)* 5.99 (47.1)* 154
Manual, 7 seats 6.90 (40.9)* 5.20 (54.3)* 5.80 (48.7)* 159
Automatic, 7 seats 7.47 (37.8)* 5.48 (51.5)* 6.20 (45.5)* 164
Diesel, 190 PS
Manual, 5 seats 7.2 (39.2) 5.4 (52.3) 6.1 (46.3) 159
Automatic, 5 seats 7.1 (39.8) 5.5 (51.4) 6.1 (46.3) 162
Manual, 7 seats 7.0 (40.4) 5.6 (50.4) 6.1 (46.3) 161
Automatic, 7 seats 7.4 (38.2) 5.7 (49.6) 6.3 (44.8) 166
Petrol, GTDi
5 seat 10.6 (26.7) 6.5 (43.5) 8.0 (35.3) 191
7 seat 10.9 (25.9) 6.8 (41.5) 8.3 (34.0) 197

*Estimated figures.
EXTRA-URBAN CYCLE
URBAN CYCLE The extra-urban test cycle is carried out
The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold immediately after the urban test. Approximately
start and consists of a series of accelerations, half of the test comprises steady speed driving,
decelerations and periods of steady speed while the remainder consists of a series of
driving and engine idling. The maximum speed accelerations, decelerations and engine idling.
attained during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph)
with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph). and the average speed 63 km/h (39 mph). The
test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3
miles).

183
L
Fuel and refuelling

COMBINED
The combined figure is an average of the urban
and extra-urban test cycle results, which has
been weighted to take account of the different
distances covered during the two tests.
For additional information on fuel
consumption figures and exhaust
emissions, visit the Vehicle
Certification Agency (VCA) website
at:
http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/

184
 R
Maintenance

RUNNING-IN DAILY CHECKS

This vehicle is built using high-precision • Operation of the lamps, horn, direction
manufacturing methods, but the moving parts indicators, wipers, washers and warning
of the engine must still bed-in relative to one lamps.
another. The process occurs mainly in the first • Operation of the seat belts and brakes.
3 000 km (2 000 miles) of operation. These
• Look for fluid deposits underneath the
guidelines should be followed during this
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
running-in period to obtain optimum
Condensation drips from the Air
performance.
conditioning are normal.
• Avoid frequent cold starts, followed by
short-distance driving.
WEEKLY CHECKS
• Preferably take longer trips.
• Engine oil level.
• Do not use full throttle during starts and
• Engine coolant level.
normal driving.
• Brake/clutch fluid level.
• Avoid continuous operation at high engine
speed, and abrupt stops. • Power steering fluid level.
• Do not participate in track days, sports • Screen washer fluid level.
driving schools or similar. • Tyre pressures and condition.
• Do not operate the vehicle at higher engine • Operate the Air conditioning.
speeds, until the engine has reached normal Note: The engine oil level should be checked
operating temperature. more frequently if the vehicle is driven for
• Avoid labouring the engine by operating the prolonged periods at high speeds.
engine in too high a gear at low speeds.
ARDUOUS DRIVING CONDITIONS
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR When a vehicle is operated in extremely arduous
An upcoming service interval will be notified to conditions, more frequent attention must be
the driver via the Service interval indicator in paid to servicing requirements.
the Message centre. If the distance or time are Arduous driving conditions include:
exceeded, the display will show a negative value
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
(-) to indicate that a service is overdue. See 48,
INSTRUMENT PANEL. • Driving on rough and/or muddy roads.
• Frequent wading.
OWNER MAINTENANCE • Frequent driving at high speeds in high
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid ambient temperatures above 50ºC.
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be • Frequent driving in severe cold weather
reported to a qualified technician without below -40ºC.
delay.
• Frequent driving in mountainous conditions.
In addition to the routine maintenance, a
• Frequent trailer towing.
number of simple checks must be carried out
more frequently.

185
L
Maintenance

• Driving in areas using road salt or other DRIVING SHORT DISTANCES OR IN

corrosive materials on the driving surface. COLD WEATHER
Contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for If the vehicle is frequently driven short
advice. distances, or in cold weather conditions, then
the engine may not reach normal operating
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) temperature. This means that regeneration of
Diesel vehicles equipped with a particle filter the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) does not take
have more efficient emission control. The place and the filter is not efficiently cleaned.
particles in the exhaust gases are collected in When the filter reaches a condition when a filter
the filter during normal driving. regeneration is appropriate and the current drive
When a DPF message is displayed, style is not appropriate, a warning triangle in
accompanied by an amber warning lamp, the the Instrument panel illuminates and the
filter requires a regeneration cycle to clean itself. message DPF Full. See manual is displayed in
This requires the engine to have reached normal the Message centre. This is not indicating a fault
operating temperature. Regeneration takes place condition with the vehicle and no dealership
automatically at an interval of approximately support should be required. Start regeneration
300-900 km (190-560 miles) depending on of the filter by driving the vehicle, preferably on
driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes a main road or motorway. The vehicle should
10-20 minutes and is automatically requested then be driven for approximately 20 minutes or
by the engine control module if the vehicle is more.
driven steadily at vehicle speeds between 60 When regeneration is complete, the warning
km/h to 112 km/h (40 mph to 70 mph). It is text is cleared automatically.
possible that the regeneration process will occur Note: A small increase in fuel consumption may
at lower vehicle speeds, but the events may take be noticed temporarily during regeneration.
a little longer at a 50 km/h (30 mph) average
speed. ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: If regeneration is not successfully carried No modifications or additions should
out, the amber warning lamp will eventually be be made to the anti-theft system. Such
replaced by a red warning lamp. changes could cause the system to
Note: If diesel fuel with a high sulphur content malfunction.
is used regularly, when a DPF regeneration cycle
starts the exhaust will emit a cloud of smoke. AIRBAG SYSTEM
This is the sulphur deposit being burnt off and
The components that make up the
is no cause for concern. If possible, use only
airbag system are sensitive to
low sulphur diesel fuel.
electrical or physical interference,
If a DPF message is displayed, accompanied by either of which could easily damage
a red warning lamp, contact a Dealer/Authorised the system and cause inadvertent
Repairer as soon as possible. operation or a malfunction of the
airbag module.

186
 R
Maintenance

To prevent malfunction of the airbag system This symbol may be used on an

always consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer under bonnet label and is relevant
before fitting any of the following: to the air conditioning refrigerant
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile fluid. The symbol identifies
phone, 2-way radio or in-car entertainment extremely flammable chemicals that
system. have an extremely low flash point
and boiling point, and gases that
• Accessories attached to the front of the
catch fire in contact with air.
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the vehicle. ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
• Any modification involving the removal or (ROLLING ROADS)
repair of any wiring or component in the
It is essential that any dynamometer testing is
vicinity of any of the airbag system
carried out only by a qualified person, familiar
components, including the steering wheel,
with the dynamometer testing and safety
steering column, instrument or fascia
procedures practised by Dealers/Authorised
panels.
Repairers.
• Any modification to the fascia panels or
steering wheel.
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES If the vehicle has been driven recently,
do not touch exhaust and cooling
The fitting of non-approved parts and system components until the engine
accessories, or the carrying out of has cooled.
non-approved alterations or
Never leave the engine running in an
conversions, may be dangerous and
unventilated area - exhaust gases are
could affect the safety of the vehicle
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
and occupants and also invalidate the
terms and conditions of the vehicle Never work or allow any person to
warranty. place any part of their body beneath a
vehicle supported by a jack.
Jaguar Land Rover Limited will not
accept any liability for death, personal Keep your hands and clothing away
injury or damage to property which from drive belts, pulleys and fans.
may occur as a direct result of fitment Some fans may continue to operate
of non-approved accessories or the after the engine has stopped. They may
carrying out of non-approved also start to operate after the engine
conversions to Land Rover vehicles. is turned off and continue operating for
up to 10 minutes.
All replacement parts for the air
conditioning system should be new and Remove metal wristbands and
equivalent to the manufacturer's jewellery, before working in the engine
original equipment while complying compartment.
with the SAE Standards. Contact a
Dealer/Authorized Repairer for advice.

187
L
Maintenance

Do not touch electrical leads or OPENING THE BONNET

components while the engine is
running, or with the starter switch
(ignition) turned on.
Do not allow tools or metal parts of the
vehicle to make contact with the
battery leads or terminals.

POISONOUS FLUIDS
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds.
For your own safety, always read and obey all
instructions printed on labels and containers.

USED ENGINE OIL

Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
cancer of the skin. Always wash thoroughly after
contact.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water
courses or soil. Use authorised
waste disposal sites to dispose of 1. Pull the bonnet release lever, located in the
used oil and toxic chemicals. left-side front footwell.
2. Lift the bonnet safety catch, located below
the centre point of the bonnet, then raise
the bonnet.

CLOSING THE BONNET

Do not drive with the bonnet retained
by the safety catch alone.
1. Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages.
2. Using both hands, press the bonnet down
until the catches click.
3. Check that both catches are engaged by
trying to lift the front edge of the bonnet.

188
 R
Maintenance

UNDER BONNET COVERS - REMOVAL Right-side under bonnet cover

Left-side under bonnet cover

1. Pull the cover securing catch towards the

front of the vehicle, to release.
2. While still holding the cover securing catch,
lift up the edge of the cover to remove.

UNDER BONNET COVERS - REFITTING

1. Unscrew the turnbuckles clips Left-side under bonnet cover
counter-clockwise and remove.
Before refitting the under bonnet cover,
2. Lift the front edge of the cover and slide it make sure no pipes, cables or other
forwards to remove. items, have been trapped between the
cover and the casing.
1. Place the under bonnet cover over the
casing, making sure that all of the holes are
aligned.
2. Push the cover down firmly and screw the
turnbuckle clips clockwise to tighten.

189
L
Maintenance

Right-side under bonnet cover • If exhaust fumes are thought to be entering

1. Place the 2 locating lugs at the rear edge of the vehicle, have it investigated immediately.
the cover into the surrounding panel. Note: Running out of fuel can result in a misfire.
2. Press the cover down to engage the cover This can cause damage to the emission control
securing catch. system.

FUEL SYSTEM CHANGING A BULB

Under no circumstances should any If the lighting has just been switched
part of the fuel system be dismantled off, give the bulbs time to cool.
or renewed by anyone other than a Handling them when hot may cause
suitably qualified vehicle technician. personal injury.
Make sure sparks and naked lights are Always replace bulbs with the correct
kept away from the engine type and specification. If you are in any
compartment. doubt contact a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice. See 254, BULB
Wear protective clothing, including,
SPECIFICATION.
where practicable, gloves made from
an impervious material. Before attempting a bulb change, make
sure the ignition and affected lamp are
turned off. If the circuit remains live, a
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
short circuit can occur which may
Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission damage the vehicle's electrical system.
and evaporative control systems. In many
Not all bulbs are renewable. The following bulbs
countries it is unlawful to tamper, modify or
can be renewed:
renew such equipment and legal penalties apply
if the laws are flouted. • Halogen headlamps.
Dealers/Authorised Repairers are properly • Direction indicators.
equipped to perform repairs and to maintain • Reversing lamps.
these systems. All other exterior lamps and some interior lamps
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous are either LED (Light Emitting Diode) or Xenon
substances which can cause units and can only be renewed by a
unconsciousness and may even be Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
fatal. All replacement procedures require the removal
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. of components to gain access to the bulbs.
• Do not start or leave the engine running in Moving a headlamp unit should be
an enclosed unventilated area. undertaken only by a qualified
• Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate technician. If in doubt, consult a
open. Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
• Do not modify the exhaust system. Note: To change any bulb in a headlamp unit,
a cross head screwdriver and a 10 mm spanner
• Exhaust leaks should be repaired
is required.
immediately.

190
 R
Maintenance

XENON LAMPS
High voltage is required to ignite the
gas and metal vapour which are used
to power Xenon lamps. Contact with
this voltage can cause serious injury.
Replacement or maintenance of Xenon
lamps should only be carried out by
suitably qualified personnel.
Xenon lamp units operate at a very
high temperature. Make sure the lamp
units have cooled before attempting to
touch them.

191
L
Maintenance

HEADLAMP REMOVAL

Moving the left headlamp unit to access the 3. Remove the 4 grille fixings.
bulbs: 4. Remove the 2 retaining bolts.
1. Remove the 2 plastic fixings. The headlamp unit can be withdrawn by 45 mm
2. Pull the tube up, to release it from the air (1.8 inches).
box. This will allow more room for
manoeuvrability.

192
 R
Maintenance

Moving the right headlamp unit to access the

bulbs:
1. Remove the 4 grille fixings.
2. Remove the 2 retaining bolts.
The headlamp unit can be withdrawn by 45 mm
(1.8 inches).

193
L
Maintenance

HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENT Note: Note the orientation of any removed

components to aid refitting.

DIRECTION INDICATOR BULB

REPLACEMENT

To gain more room for accessibility, follow the

process for removing the headlamp unit. See
192, HEADLAMP REMOVAL.
1. At the back of the headlamp unit, rotate the 1. At the back of the headlamp unit, rotate the
appropriate bulb cover counter-clockwise appropriate bulb cover counter-clockwise
and then lightly pull to remove it. and then lightly pull to remove it.
2. Remove the low beam bulb holder from the 2. Release the sides of the bulb holder.
headlamp. 3. Pull the holder to remove it from the
3. Unclip the low beam bulb and remove it headlamp and access the indicator bulb.
from the bulb holder. Reverse the removal procedure to install a bulb
4. Rotate the DRL/high beam bulb unit holder/bulb unit.
counter-clockwise. Note: For Xenon headlamp units, the bulb cover
5. Remove the DRL/high beam bulb unit from for the direction indicator is located on the
the headlamp housing. inboard side.
Reverse the removal procedure to install a bulb Note: Note the orientation of any removed
holder/bulb unit. components to aid refitting.

194
 R
Maintenance

REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR AND

REVERSING LAMP BULB
REPLACEMENT

Replacing a reversing lamp bulb:

1. Remove the appropriate tailgate access
door.
2. Rotate the bulb holder downwards. Pull to
remove the holder from the lamp unit and
access the reversing bulb.
Reverse the removal procedure to install a bulb
holder/bulb unit.
Note: Note the orientation of any removed
components to aid refitting.
Replacing a rear direction indicator:
1. Remove the appropriate loadspace vent WIPERS SERVICE POSITION
door.
To avoid damage to the bonnet, do not
2. Rotate the rear lamp's retaining screw lift the wiper blades when they are in the
counter-clockwise, until fully released and normal parked position.
then remove. This allows the rear lamp unit
When replacing the wiper blades make
to be withdrawn.
sure the wiper arms do not make contact
3. At the back of the rear lamp unit, rotate the with the windscreen.
bulb holder counter-clockwise and pull to
Before changing a front wiper blade, the wiper
access the indicator bulb.
arms must be set in the 'service' position as
Reverse the removal procedure to install a bulb follows:
holder/bulb unit.
Note: The Smart key must remain in the vehicle
Note: Note the orientation of any removed while the wiper blades are being renewed.
components to aid refitting.
1. Make sure the ignition is turned off.

195
L
Maintenance

2. Turn the ignition on and then off again.

3. Immediately push the wiper control down
to start the single wipe operation and turn
the ignition on again.
The wipers will move to their service
position.
4. When the new parts have been fitted, turn
the ignition off. This will return the wipers
to the park position.

WINDOW RESET
If the battery is disconnected or the power
supply is interrupted, the windows must be
reset.
Once the power supply is restored, reset as
follows:
1. Close the window fully.
2. Release the switch, then lift it to the close
position and hold for 1 second.
3. Repeat the procedure on each window.

196
 R
Vehicle cleaning

THE EXTERIOR Do not apply polish to any unpainted

areas of bumper mouldings. It will
Following cleaning of the vehicle's
become ingrained in the textured finish.
exterior (particularly with a pressure
washer), it is recommended that the
vehicle is taken for a short drive to dry SENSORS AND CAMERAS
out the brakes. When washing the vehicle, do not aim
Remove any heavy deposits of mud and high pressure water jets directly at any
dirt with a hose, before washing the of the sensors and cameras. Do not use
vehicle. abrasive materials or hard/sharp objects
to clean the sensors and cameras. Only
Some high pressure cleaning systems
use approved vehicle shampoo.
are sufficiently powerful enough to
penetrate suspension joints, Park assist and Parking aid sensors should be
door/window seals and damage trim and kept clean to maintain accuracy and
door locks. Never aim the water jet performance.
directly at any cameras, the engine air If required, the cameras should be cleaned using
intakes, heater air intakes, body seals a cloth moistened with a small amount of
(doors, sunroof, windows etc.), or at any glass-cleaning product.
components which may be damaged
(lights, mirrors, exterior trim, UNDER BODY MAINTENANCE
suspension seals and gaiters, etc.).
Regularly flush the under body with plain water,
Make sure the pressure washer nozzle
and pay particular attention to areas where mud
is always at a distance of more than 300
and debris collect.
mm (12 ins) from any component of the
vehicle. If damage or corrosion are detected, have the
vehicle checked by your Dealer/Authorised
When lifting the wiper blades for
Repairer as soon as possible.
cleaning, use the Winter park position
to avoid damage to the vehicle. See 66,
WINTER PARK POSITION. AFTER OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Do not use a power wash system in the Make sure the vehicle's underside is cleaned as
engine bay area. soon as possible after driving off-road.
Following cleaning of the vehicle's
exterior (particularly with a pressure
washer), it is recommended that the
vehicle is taken for a short drive to dry
out the brakes.
Substances which are corrosive, such
as bird droppings, can damage the
vehicle’s paintwork and should be
removed as soon as possible.
Use only cleaning products approved for
use on vehicles.

197
L
Vehicle cleaning

Make sure the areas around air intakes FABRIC UPHOLSTERY

and the front grille are clean and clear
Never use soap, ammonia, bleach or
of debris. Pay particular attention to the
other cleaners intended for use on hard
lower grille and radiator. Failure to do
surfaces.
so may cause the engine to overheat,
leading to severe engine damage. Dynamica suede fabric should be cleaned
regularly. Do not rub vigorously and do not use
a steam machine. Dusting with a soft brush, a
ALLOY WHEELS
dry cloth or vacuum cleaner will be sufficient.
Only use approved wheel cleaning
Do not use printed absorbent cloths or paper
products.
as they may transfer colour to the fabric.

GLASS SURFACES
LEATHER UPHOLSTERY
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid
Use only cleaning products specifically
damaging the heating element. Do not scrape
designed for use on leather. Do not use
the glass or use any abrasive cleaning fluid.
solvents. Do not use chemical, alcohol,
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to or abrasive materials, as they will cause
damage. Wash with soapy water. Do not use rapid deterioration of the leather. The
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal scrapers use of products which are not approved
to remove ice. will invalidate your warranty.
To avoid damaging the protective coating, only If you are in any doubt as to which
clean the interior side of the sunroof glass with products to use, consult a
a soft cloth. Do not scrape the glass or use Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
abrasive cleaning fluids.
Leather should be cleaned and protected using
Land Rover approved leather cleaner.
REAR SCREEN
To prevent ingrained dirt and staining, inspect
To avoid damaging the heating elements when the seat upholstery regularly and clean every 1
cleaning the inside of the rear screen, use only to 2 months, as follows:
a soft damp cloth or chamois leather. Do not
1. Wipe off fine dust from the seat surfaces
use solvents or sharp objects to clean the glass.
using a clean, damp, non-coloured cloth.
Change frequently to a clean area of cloth
THE INTERIOR to avoid abrasive action on the leather
Some cleaning products contain surface. Avoid over-wetting the leather.
substances that are harmful and can 2. If this is not sufficient, use a cloth which
cause health problems if used has been dampened with warm, soapy water
incorrectly, and may cause damage to and then wrung out. Use only mild
the vehicle's interior. Make sure you non-caustic soap.
read the manufacturer’s instructions
carefully. 3. Use Land Rover approved leather cleaner
for heavily soiled areas. Dry off and rub with
a clean, soft cloth, changing surfaces
regularly.

198
 R
Vehicle cleaning

Use Land Rover approved leather cleaner Note: While cleaning the seat belt, take the
several times a year to maintain the leather’s opportunity to examine the webbing for
suppleness and appearance. The cleaner will damage/wear. Any wear or damage should be
nourish and moisturise and help to improve the reported to, and rectified by your
surface protection film against dust and Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
substances.
• Dark clothing may stain leather seats, just AIRBAG MODULE COVERS
like other upholstery products. Airbag covers should only be cleaned
• Sharp objects, such as belts, zipper using a slightly dampened cloth, and
fasteners, rivets, etc., can leave permanent a small amount of upholstery cleaner.
scratches and scratch marks on the leather Any substance which enters the
surface. mechanism can prevent correct
• Unless spillages, such as tea, coffee or ink, deployment of an airbag during an
are washed away immediately, permanent impact.
staining may have to be accepted.
• Do not use a cleaning product that is not CARPET AND MATS
specifically for use in a vehicle. While these Marks or stains can be removed by gentle
products may initially give impressive scrubbing with a weak solution of soap and
results, their use will lead to rapid warm water.
deterioration of the leather and will
For more stubborn stains a commercially
invalidate the warranty.
available carpet cleaner should be used.
If a valet service is used, make sure the
specialist concerned is aware of, and follows, INSTRUMENT PANEL, TOUCH SCREEN
these instructions precisely.
AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to dye
Do not use upholstery cleaner on
transfer, which can cause unsightly
electrical equipment such as fascia
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
switches.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible. When cleaning around electrical
equipment such as switches, make sure
SEAT BELTS fluids do not leak into any gaps around
the components or between panels or
Do not allow any water, cleaning trim.
products, or fabric from cloths to enter
the seat belt mechanism. Any • Clean with a lightly moistened cloth.
substance which enters the mechanism • Do not use chemical agents or domestic
may affect the performance of the seat cleaners.
belt in an impact. • Do not allow sharp, hard or abrasive objects
Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm water to make contact with screens.
and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow the • Avoid exposing screens to direct sunlight
seat belts to dry naturally while fully extended. for long periods.

199
L
Vehicle cleaning

• To prevent errors occurring, make sure only

1 finger at a time is in contact with the
Touch screen.
• Do not use excessive pressure.

BLOCKED WASHER JETS

Do not operate the washer jets during
unblocking or adjustment. Windscreen
washer fluid may cause irritation to the
eyes and skin. Always read and
observe the washer fluid
manufacturer’s instructions.
If a washer jet becomes blocked, use a thin
strand of wire to unblock the jet by inserting the
wire into the jet. Make sure the wire is
completely removed after unblocking.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE

Regularly inspect the paintwork for damage.
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep scratches,
in the paint/bodywork should be repaired
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly, and
if left untreated can result in expensive repairs.

200
 R
Fluid level checks

FLUID FILLER LOCATIONS

1. Brake fluid reservoir cap (right-hand drive). While working in the engine
Remove the right-side under bonnet cover compartment, always observe the
for access. See 189, UNDER BONNET safety precautions. See 187, SAFETY
COVERS - REMOVAL. IN THE GARAGE.
2. Brake fluid reservoir cap (left-hand drive). Do not start the engine, or drive the
Remove the left-side under bonnet cover vehicle, if there is a possibility that any
for access. See 189, UNDER BONNET leaked fluid will come into contact with
COVERS - REMOVAL. a hot surface, such as the exhaust.
3. Engine oil filler cap (petrol engine). Seek qualified assistance immediately.
4. Engine oil filler cap (diesel engine).
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
5. Oil level dipstick (diesel engine).
Check the engine oil weekly. If any
6. Oil level dipstick (petrol engine). significant or sudden drop in oil level is
7. Washer fluid reservoir filler cap. noted, seek qualified assistance.
8. Engine coolant reservoir filler cap. Never allow the oil level to fall below the
lower mark or notch on the dipstick.

201
L
Fluid level checks

If the message ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Is nearer to the upper mark or notch than
LOW is displayed, stop the engine as the lower, do not add oil.
soon as it is safe to do so and seek 2. Is nearer to the lower mark or notch than
qualified assistance. Do not start the the upper, add 0.5 litre (1 pint) of oil.
engine until the cause has been rectified.
3. Is below the lower mark or notch, add for
the diesel engine, 1.5 litres (2.6 pints) of oil
and for the petrol engine, 0.8 litre (1.4 pints)
of oil. Recheck the level after a further 5
minutes.

TOPPING UP THE OIL

Your vehicle's warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by using
oil that does not meet the required
specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause
excessive engine wear, a build up of
sludge and deposits, and increase
pollution. It could also lead to engine
failure. See 248, LUBRICANTS AND
1. Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L petrol engine. FLUIDS.
2. Engine oil dipstick - 2.2L diesel engine. Overfilling with oil could result in severe
Prior to checking the oil level make sure that: engine damage. Oil should be added in
small quantities and the level rechecked
• The vehicle is on level ground.
to make sure the engine is not overfilled.
• The engine oil is cold.
1. Remove the oil filler cap.
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level
2. Add oil to maintain the level between the
when the engine is hot, switch off the
MIN and MAX marks or notches on the
engine and let the vehicle stand for 5
dipstick.
minutes to allow the oil to drain back into
the sump. Do not start the engine. It is essential to use the correct
specification oil and to make sure the oil
The oil level can then be checked as follows:
is suitable for the climatic conditions in
1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade which the vehicle is to be operated.
clean with a lint-free cloth.
Note: The approximate quantity of oil
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw required to raise the level from MIN to MAX
again to check the oil level. on the petrol engine dipstick is 0.85 litres
As a general guide, if the oil level on the (1.5 pints) and on the diesel engine dipstick
dipstick: is 1.5 litres (2.6 pints).
3. Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.

202
 R
Fluid level checks

4. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes. Antifreeze is highly inflammable. Do
5. Refit the oil filler cap. not allow antifreeze to come into
contact with naked flames or other
sources of ignition (e.g., a hot engine)
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
- a fire may result.
Running the engine without coolant will
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be
cause serious engine damage.
fatal if swallowed. Keep containers
If persistent coolant loss is noticed, seek sealed and out of the reach of children.
qualified assistance immediately. If consumption is suspected, seek
The coolant reservoir level should be checked medical attention immediately.
at least weekly (more frequently in high mileage When travelling in territories where the
or arduous operating conditions). Always check water supply contains salt, always make
the level when the system is cold. sure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or
distilled) water. Topping up with salt
water will cause serious engine damage.
The use of non-approved antifreeze will
have an adverse effect on the engine
cooling system and; therefore, engine
durability.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately and wash the area
with a mixture of car shampoo and
Make sure the coolant level remains between water.
the MIN and MAX indicator marks on the side Antifreeze contains important corrosion
of the expansion tank. inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
If the level has dropped suddenly, or by a large must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
amount, arrange for the vehicle to be examined (not just in cold conditions). To make sure the
by a qualified technician as soon as possible. anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
TOPPING UP THE COOLANT checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of the distance
Never remove the coolant reservoir
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
filler cap when the engine is hot.
of the radiator and engine components. The
Escaping steam or scalding water could
specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution at
cause serious personal injury.
20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects against frost
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing down to -40°C (-40°F).
the pressure to escape before removing
1. Remove the coolant reservoir filler cap by
completely.
rotating counter-clockwise.

203
L
Fluid level checks

2. Top up to the MAX indicator mark on the If the quantity of fluid in the brake reservoir
side of the coolant reservoir. Use a mixture drops below the recommended level, a red
of 50% water and 50% antifreeze. See 248, warning lamp in the Instrument panel will
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS. illuminate. See 53, BRAKE (RED).
Note: In an emergency - and only if the Note: If the warning lamp illuminates while the
approved antifreeze is unavailable - top up vehicle is being driven, stop the vehicle as soon
the cooling system with clean water, but be as safety permits by gently applying the brakes.
aware of the resultant reduction in frost Check and top up the fluid level, if necessary.
protection. Do not top up or refill with With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid
conventional antifreeze formulations. If in level at least every week (more frequently in
doubt, consult a qualified technician. high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
3. Refit the coolant reservoir filler cap by
rotating clockwise, until the cap's ratchet
clicks.

CHECKING THE BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

LEVEL
Seek qualified assistance immediately
if brake pedal travel is unusually long,
or if there is any significant loss of
brake fluid. Driving under such
conditions could result in extended
stopping distances or complete brake
failure.
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of the reach
of children. If accidental consumption
of fluid is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with 1. Remove the relevant under bonnet cover.
plenty of clean water. See 201, FLUID FILLER LOCATIONS and
189, UNDER BONNET COVERS - REMOVAL.
Brake fluid is highly inflammable. Do
not allow brake fluid to come into 2. Clean the brake fluid reservoir and the filler
contact with naked flames or other cap before removing, to prevent dirt from
sources of ignition (e.g., a hot engine). entering the reservoir.

Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid 3. Remove the reservoir filler cap by rotating
level below the MIN mark. counter-clockwise.
4. Check the brake fluid reservoir level. The
level should be between the MIN and the
MAX marks.

204
 R
Fluid level checks

Note: The fluid level may drop slightly Only use approved washer fluid.
during normal use, as a result of brake pad
wear, but should not be allowed to drop Take care to avoid spillage, particularly
below the MIN mark. if an undiluted or high concentration is
being used. If spillage occurs, wash the
TOPPING UP THE BRAKE/CLUTCH affected area immediately with water.
FLUID The washer fluid reservoir supplies the front
and rear screen washer jets and the headlamp
Always use brake fluid which has the
washer jets.
correct specification. See 248,
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS. Check and top up the reservoir level at least
every week. Always top up with screen washer
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces.
fluid to prevent freezing.
Soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately and wash the area Operate the washer switches periodically to
with a mixture of car shampoo and check that the nozzles are clear and properly
water. directed.
Only use new fluid from an airtight
container (fluid from open containers or TOPPING UP THE WASHER FLUID
fluid previously bled from the system, Top up the washer fluid as follows:
will have absorbed moisture, which will 1. Clean the washer fluid reservoir filler cap
adversely affect performance, and must before removing, to prevent dirt from
not be used). entering the reservoir.
Do not top up the brake fluid to the 2. Remove the filler cap.
maximum mark unless the brake pads
3. Top up the reservoir until the fluid is visible
have been renewed. If unsure, seek
in the filler neck.
qualified assistance.
4. Replace the filler cap.
1. Top up the brake fluid reservoir to at least
the minimum mark.
2. Refit the brake fluid reservoir filler cap by
rotating clockwise.
3. Refit the under bonnet cover. See 189,
UNDER BONNET COVERS - REFITTING.

CHECKING THE WASHER FLUID LEVEL

Do not allow the screen washer fluid
to come into contact with naked flames
or sources of ignition.
If the vehicle is operated in
temperatures below 4°C (40°F), use a
washer fluid with frost protection.

205
L
Vehicle battery

BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS The cell plugs and vent pipe must be
in place at all times when the battery
Do not allow naked flames or other is connected to the vehicle. Make sure
sources of ignition near the battery, the vent pipe is clear of obstructions
as the battery may emit explosive and not kinked. Failure to do so may
gases. cause a pressure build up in the
Make sure when working near or battery, resulting in an explosion.
handling the battery, suitable eye Do not expose the battery to a naked
protection is worn, to protect the flame or spark as the battery produces
eyes from acid splashes. explosive, flammable gas.
To prevent risk of injury, do not Never jump start (boost), charge, or
allow children near the battery. try to start a vehicle with a frozen
battery. Doing so can result in an
explosion.
Be aware that the battery may emit Remove all metal jewellery before
explosive gases. working on, or near, the battery, and
never allow metal objects or vehicle
components to come into contact with
The battery contains acid which is the battery terminals. Metal objects
extremely corrosive and toxic. can cause sparks, and/or short circuits,
resulting in an explosion.
Do not allow the battery posts or
Consult the handbook for terminals to come into contact with
information, before handling the your skin. They contain lead and lead
battery. compounds which are toxic. Always
wash your hands thoroughly after
handling the battery.
BATTERY CARE
If battery electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, skin, or clothes you
should remove the affected clothing
and flush the skin/eyes with large
amounts of clean water. Seek medical
assistance immediately.
If swallowed, battery electrolyte can
be fatal, seek medical assistance
immediately.
Your vehicle is fitted with either an Absorbed
Do not connect any 12 volt equipment Glass Matt (AGM) (1) battery or a low
directly to the battery terminals. Doing maintenance (2) battery.
so may cause a spark, which can result
Note: AGM batteries are sealed for life and
in an explosion.
require no maintenance.

206
 R
Vehicle battery

Do not attempt to open or remove the Note: Before connecting jump leads make sure
top from an AGM battery. the battery connections on the disabled vehicle
In hot climates more frequent checks of the low are correct and that all electrical equipment has
maintenance battery electrolyte level and been switched off.
condition are required. Contact a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the battery
checked.

CONNECTING JUMP LEADS

Rotating parts of the engine can cause
serious injury. Take extreme care when
working near rotating parts of the
engine.
Before attempting to start the disabled
vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied, or suitably chock the
wheels. Make sure that Park is
selected or the manual gearbox is in
neutral.
Always wear appropriate eye protection
when working with batteries.
Never jump start, charge, or try to start
a vehicle with a frozen battery. Doing
so can result in an explosion.
During normal use, batteries emit
explosive gas sufficient to cause
severe explosions and capable of
causing serious injury - keep sparks 1. Connect the positive (Red) jump lead to the
and naked lights away from the engine recommended positive (+) boost terminal
compartment. on the donor vehicle.
Make sure there is no physical contact Note: Refer to the donor vehicle's handbook
between the donor and disabled vehicles for the recommended positive boost
other than the jump leads. terminal.
Make sure that the slave battery or 2. Connect the other end of the positive (Red)
starting aid is a 12 volt device. jump lead to the positive (+) terminal on the
Disconnect the jump leads prior to discharged battery.
operating any electrical equipment. 3. Connect the negative (Black) jump lead to
the recommended negative (-) boost
terminal of the donor vehicle.

207
L
Vehicle battery

Note: Refer to the donor vehicle's handbook 5. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead
for the recommended negative boost from the battery terminal of the vehicle.
terminal. 6. Switch off the starting aid.
4. Connect the other end of the negative 7. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead
(Black) jump lead to the earth point on the from the battery terminal of the vehicle.
disabled vehicle (as illustrated).
Note: Check that all cables are clear of any REMOVING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
moving components and that all 4
Special tools are required to refit the battery
connections are secure.
after removal, therefore battery removal and
5. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and refit should be carried out only by qualified
allow it to idle for a few minutes. personnel. Consult your Dealer/Authorised
6. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. Repairer.
Note: Do not switch on any electrical
circuits of the disabled vehicle until after CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
the jump leads are removed. If the vehicle's battery should require charging,
7. Allow both vehicles to idle for 2 minutes. the battery must be removed from the vehicle.
8. Switch off the donor vehicle. Consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

9. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead Battery disconnection, removal and
renewal should be carried out only by
from the previously disabled vehicle.
qualified personnel. Consult your
10. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
from the donor vehicle.
11. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead Used batteries must be disposed of
correctly as they contain a number
from the previously discharged battery.
of harmful substances. Seek advice
12. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead on disposal from your
from the donor vehicle. Dealer/Authorised Repairer and/or
your local authority.
CONNECTING A STARTING AID
To start the vehicle using a starting aid or a REPLACING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
slave battery, follow the instructions in the If the vehicle's battery should require replacing,
sequence given: the battery must be removed from the vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (Red) jump lead to the Consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
positive (+) battery terminal of the Battery disconnection, removal and
discharged battery. renewal should be carried out only by
2. Connect the negative (Black) jump lead to qualified personnel. Consult your
the vehicle's earth point. Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
3. Switch on the starting aid.
4. Start the engine and allow it to idle.

208
 R
Vehicle battery

Used batteries must be disposed of • Low Battery - Please Start Engine: Will be
correctly as they contain a number displayed on the Touch screen and in the
of harmful substances. Seek advice Message centre if the engine is not running.
on disposal from your After 3 minutes, the IPSM will begin
Dealer/Authorised Repairer and/or shutting down the vehicle's systems.
your local authority. Normal system operation will resume when
the engine is started.
EFFECTS OF DISCONNECTING Only start the engine, if it is safe to do
Disconnecting the battery can affect a number so.
of vehicle systems, especially if there is Note: If the message Low Battery - Please Start
insufficient battery power prior to disconnection. Engine is displayed, drive the vehicle for at least
For example, the alarm may trigger, depending 30 minutes in temperatures above 0°C (32°F),
on its state, when the battery was disconnected. or at least 60 minutes if temperatures are below
If the alarm does sound, use the Smart key in 0°C (32°F). This will allow the battery to recover
the normal way to disarm the security system. to an acceptable level. If normal system
The windows may need recalibrating to operate operation is not resumed when the engine is
correctly. switched back off, the battery may not have
been sufficiently charged. If safe to do so,
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM restart the engine. If problems still exist, contact
The Intelligent Power System Management your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
(IPSM) continuously monitors the condition of
the main vehicle battery. If excessive battery
discharge occurs, the system will begin to shut
down non-essential electrical systems in order
to protect the battery.
If the IPSM calculates that the battery's
condition is not within the set parameters, there
are 2 levels of action which can be taken. Both
levels have an accompanying message on the
Touch screen, and in the case of the low battery
warning, in the Message centre.
• Energy Management: Will be displayed on
the Touch screen if the engine is not
running, and system features are causing
excessive battery discharge. After 3 minutes
the IPSM will begin shutting down the
vehicle's systems. Normal system operation
will resume when the engine is started.

209
L
Fuses

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

210
 R
Fuses

When a fuse box lid is removed, take If the replacement fuse blows after
care to protect the box from moisture, fitment, the system should be checked
and refit the lid at the earliest by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
opportunity. Note: Land Rover recommend that relays should
Access can be gained to the fuses, as follows: only be renewed by qualified persons.
1. Engine compartment fuse box. The fuse removal tweezers are located in the
• To gain access to the fuse box: Remove passenger compartment fuse box. Press the
the 2 plastic fixings (see illustration) tweezers onto the head of a fuse and pull to
and pull the tube up to release it from remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
the air box. indicates that the fuse has blown and must be
renewed.
• Unlatch the tabs (arrowed) to release
the fuse box cover. There are some spare replacement fuses in the
passenger compartment fuse box. See the fuse
The engine compartment fuse numbers
box label for details.
and positions are shown on the inside
of the fuse box cover.
2. Passenger compartment fuse box (upper):
Open the glovebox and remove the panel
from the glovebox liner. A label on the panel
shows the circuits protected and the fuse
locations.
3. Passenger compartment fuse box (lower):
Remove the lower access panel.
4. Luggage compartment (loadspace) fuse
boxes: Rotate the latch and remove the
panel from the left side trim of the luggage
compartment. A label on the panel shows
the circuits protected and the fuse locations.

CHANGING A FUSE
Always turn off the ignition system and
the affected electrical circuit, before
replacing a fuse.
Fit Land Rover approved replacement
fuses of the same rating and type, or
fuses of a matching specification. Using
an incorrect fuse, may result in damage
to the vehicle's electrical system and can
result in a fire.

211
L
Fuses

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
1 5 Tan Starter motor sensor
2 5 Tan Voltage quality module
3* 80 - Cooling fans
4* 60 - Diesel - Glow plugs
5* 80 - Electric Power Assisted Steering (EPAS)
6 15 Blue Oxygen sensors
7 - - -
8 20 Yellow Diesel and Petrol - Engine management control unit
9 10 Red Diesel - Engine sensors
10 - - -
11 10 Red Diesel and Petrol - Engine sensors
12 15 Blue Diesel - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) bypass, Water in
fuel sensor
Petrol - Ignition coils
13 - - -
14 15 Blue Diesel - Engine sensors
Petrol - Oxygen sensors
15* 40 Green Starter motor
16* 100 - PTC heater
17* 60 - Passenger compartment fuse box
18* 60 - Passenger compartment fuse box
19* 60 - Luggage compartment fuse box
20* 60 - Luggage compartment fuse box
21* 60 - Voltage quality module
22* 30 Pink Front wipers
23* 40 Green Passenger compartment fuse box
24* 30 Pink Diesel auto - Starter motor
25* 40 Green Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

212
 R
Fuses

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected

number (Amps) colour
26* 40 Green Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
27* 40 Green Passenger compartment fuse box
28* 40 Green Heater blower motor
29* 30 Pink Electric trailer brake (Australia)
30 15 Blue Headlamp washer
31 15 Blue Horns
32 10 Red Air conditioning clutch
33 5 Tan Relay coils - Horn, Heated front screen, Fuel pump
34* 40 Green Heated front screen - left side
35* 40 Green Heated front screen - right side
36 5 Tan Relay coils - Engine Management System (EMS), Air
conditioning clutch, Starter motor pinion
37 20 Yellow Fuel pump
38 5 Tan Steering wheel module
39 5 Tan Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
40 5 Tan Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) - Right headlamp
41 5 Tan Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) - Left headlamp
42 5 Tan Headlamp control unit, Dynamic headlamp levelling control
unit
43 5 Tan Climate/Heated seat relay coils
44 10 Red Heated steering wheel
45 - - -

*Land Rover recommends that these fuses

should only be serviced by a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

213
L
Fuses

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
1 5 Tan Smart key receiver, Alarm sensor, Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
2 - - -
3 10 Red Front fog lamps
4 - - -
5 5 Tan Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
6 5 Tan Adaptive dynamics, Electric differential control module (E-diff)
7 - - -
8 25 Clear Passenger door module
9 - - -
10 5 Tan Heated washer jets
11 10 Red Trailer reverse lights
12 5 Tan Reverse lights
13 - - -
14 5 Tan Brake pedal switch
15 30 Green Heated rear screen
16 5 Tan Electric Power Assisted Steering (EPAS)
17 5 Tan Keyless entry control module
18 - - -
19 5 Tan Engine management control module
20 5 Tan Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
21 5 Tan Centre console switch, Outboard fascia switch
22 5 Tan Automatic transmission
23 - - -
24 - - -
25 - - -
26 - - -
27 - - -

214
 R
Fuses

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected

number (Amps) colour
28 - - -
29 - - -
30 - - -
31 5 Tan Rain sensor, Auxiliary lamp switch, Voltage quality module,
Humidity sensor
32 25 Clear Driver door module
33 - - -
34 10 Red Locking fuel flap
35 - - -
36 5 Tan Battery backed sounder
37 20 Yellow Keyless entry control module
38 15 Blue Front screen washer
39 25 Clear Left rear door module
40 5 Tan Driver door window switch
41 5 Tan Gateway module
42 30 Green Driver front seat
43 15 Blue Rear screen washer
44 25 Clear Right rear door module
45 30 Green Front passenger seat
46 - - -
47 20 Yellow Sunblind control unit
48 15 Blue Trailer connector power supply
49 - - -
50 - - -
51 5 Tan Steering wheel switches
52 20 Yellow Cigar lighter
53 20 Yellow Cubby box accessory power socket
54 - - -
55 20 Yellow Rear console accessory power socket

215
L
Fuses

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected

number (Amps) colour
56 10 Red Supplementary Restraint system (SRS)
57 10 Red Interior lamps
58 - - -
59 - - -
60 5 Tan Occupancy sensor, Passenger airbag disabling lamp
61 5 Tan Start control unit
62 - - -
63 20 Yellow Luggage compartment accessory power socket
64 - - -
65 - - -
66 5 Tan Diagnostics
67 15 Blue Trailer
68 - - -
69 15 Blue Automatic transmission

1. Fuse box 1
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX 2. Fuse box 2
3. Fuse box 3
4. Fuse box 4

216
 R
Fuses

Fuse box 1
Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
FA1 30 Green All Wheel Drive (AWD) - Disconnect and Efficient driveline
FA2 15 Blue Rear wiper relay
FA3 5 Tan All Wheel Drive (AWD) - Dynamic driveline
FA4 10 Red Telematics module
FA5 20 Yellow Heated driver seat module
FA6 20 Yellow Rear seat heater module (left side)
FA7 5 Tan Wade sensing module
FA8 - - -
FA9 - - -
FA10 20 Yellow Rear HEVAC control
FA11 30 Pink Trailer tow
FA12 - - -

Fuse box 2
Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
FB1 - - -
FB2 - - -
FB3 10 Red Instrument cluster
FB4 5 Tan Gateway module
FB5 5 Tan Auto High Beam Control Module (AHBCM)
FB6 5 Tan Proximity camera or Rearview camera
FB7 5 Tan Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
FB8 10 Red Head up display
FB9 - - -
FB10 - - -
FB11 - - -
FB12 20 Yellow Audio amplifier

217
L
Fuses

Fuse box 3
Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
FD1 20 Yellow Heated passenger seat module
FD2 20 Yellow Rear seat heater module (right side)
FD3 10 Red Rear and Glove box USB ports
FD4 - - -
FD5 30 Green Magnaride
FD6 25 Clear Power operated tailgate
FD7 5 Tan FBH receiver
FD8 - - -
FD9 5 Tan Comfort relay
FD10 - - -
FD11 - - -
FD12 - - -

Fuse box 4
Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected
number (Amps) colour
1 15 Blue Touch screen, Front integrated control panel
2 10 Red Audio amplifier
3 10 Red Gesture tailgate
4 10 Red Navigation, Television tuner, Audio video input/output panel
5 15 Blue Audio head unit
6 15 Blue Rear seat actuators
7 - - -
8 - - -
9 - - -
10 - - -
11 - - -
12 - - -

218
 R
Fuses

Fuse Rating Fuse Circuits protected

number (Amps) colour
13 - - -
14 - - -
15 15 Blue Front and rear integrated control panels-heating and
ventilation
16 20 Yellow Fuel fired booster heater

219
L
Tyres

TYRE MARKINGS

1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger The load index and speed rating on all
vehicle use. This index is not always shown. replacement tyres must be, at least,
2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to the same specification as the vehicle's
sidewall edge in millimetres. original equipment. If in doubt, consult
a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile,
gives the sidewall height as a percentage of 7. The speed rating denotes the maximum
the tread width. So, if the tread width is 205 speed at which the tyre should be used for
mm and the aspect ratio is 50, the sidewall extended periods. See 221, SPEED RATING.
height will be 102 mm. 8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,
4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply which can be used for tyre recalls and other
construction. checking processes. Most of this
information relates to the manufacturer,
5. The diameter of the wheel rim given in
place of manufacture, etc. The last 4
inches.
numbers are the date of manufacture. For
6. The load index for the tyre. This index is not example, if the number was 5111, the tyre
always shown. was made in the 51st week of 2011.
9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has been
designed with some capability for mud and
snow.

220
 R
Tyres

10. The number of plies in both the tread area TYRE CARE
and the sidewall area, indicates how many
Do not drive the vehicle if a tyre is
layers of rubber-coated material make up
damaged, excessively worn, or
the structure of the tyre. Information is also
incorrectly inflated.
provided on the type of materials used.
Avoid contaminating the tyres with
11. Wear rate indicator: A tyre rated at 400, for
vehicle fluids as they may cause
example, will last longer than a tyre rated
damage to the tyre.
at 200.
Avoid spinning the wheels. The forces
12. The traction rating grades a tyre's
released can damage the structure of
performance when stopping on a wet road
the tyre and cause it to fail.
surface. The higher the grade, the better the
braking performance. The grades, from If wheel spin is unavoidable due to a
highest to lowest are; AA, A, B and C. loss of traction (in deep snow for
example), do not exceed the 50 km/h
13. The maximum load which can be carried by
(30 mph) point on the speedometer.
the tyre.
Do not exceed the maximum pressure
14. Heat resistance grading: The tyre's
stated on the sidewall of the tyre.
resistance to heat is grade A, B or C, with
A indicating the greatest resistance to heat. Note: Tyre condition should be checked after
This grading is provided for a correctly the vehicle has been used off-road. As soon as
inflated tyre, which is being used within its the vehicle returns to a normal, hard, road
speed and loading limits. surface, stop and check for damage to the tyres.
15. The maximum inflation pressure for the All of the vehicle's tyres (including the spare)
tyre. See 224, AVOIDING FLAT SPOTS. should be checked regularly for damage, wear
and distortion. If you are in any doubt about the
condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately
SPEED RATING
by a tyre repair centre or a Dealer/Authorised
Rating Speed km/h (mph) Repairer.
Q 160 (99)
TYRE PRESSURES
R 170 (106)
All tyre pressures, including the spare,
S 180 (112) should be checked regularly using an
T 190 (118) accurate pressure gauge, when the
tyres are cold.
U 200 (124)
Pressure checks should be carried out
H 210 (130) only when the tyres are cold, and the
V 240 (149) vehicle has been stationary for more
than 3 hours. A hot tyre at, or below,
W 270 (168)
the recommended cold inflation
Y 300 (186) pressure, is dangerously
under-inflated.

221
L
Tyres

Never drive your vehicle if the tyre Check the tyres, including the spare, for
pressures are incorrect. Under-inflation condition and pressure on a weekly basis and
causes excessive flexing and uneven before long journeys.
tyre wear. This can lead to sudden tyre Dependent on the market, the tyre pressures
failure. Over-inflation causes harsh can be displayed in the Message centre using
ride, uneven tyre wear and poor the Vehicle Info and Tyre Pressure Check
handling. Instrument panel menus. See 49, INSTRUMENT
Do not drive the vehicle with a leaking PANEL MENU. The display will show 2 tyre
tyre. Even if the tyre appears to be pressures for each tyre. The upper figure is the
inflated, it could be dangerously present tyre pressure and the lower figure (in
under-inflated and will continue to brackets) is the recommended tyre pressure.
deflate. Renew the tyre or contact an Note: The tyre pressure units can be configured
approved repairer. to display as either psi, bar, or kPa via the
Under-inflation also reduces fuel Instrument Display menu.
efficiency and tyre tread life and may If tyre pressures are checked while the vehicle
affect the vehicle’s handling and is inside a protected covered area (e.g., a
stopping ability. garage) and subsequently driven in lower
If the vehicle has been parked in strong outdoor temperatures, tyre under-inflation could
sunlight, or used in high ambient occur.
temperatures, do not reduce the tyre A slight pressure loss occurs naturally with
pressures. Move the vehicle into the time. If this exceeds 14 kPa (0.14bar/2 psi) per
shade and allow the tyres to cool week, have the cause investigated and rectified
before rechecking the pressures. by qualified personnel.
If it is necessary to check the tyre pressures
when the tyres are warm, you should expect the
pressures to have increased by up to 30 - 40
kPa (0.3 - 0.4 bar/4 - 6 psi). Do not reduce the
tyre pressures to the cold inflation pressure
under these circumstances. Allow the tyres to
cool fully before adjusting the pressures.
The following procedure should be used to
check and adjust the tyre's pressures:
To avoid damaging the valves, do not
apply excessive force or sideways force
on the gauge/inflator.
1. Remove the valve cap.
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator
to the valve.

The tyre information label is located on the 3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge and
driver's side B pillar. add air, if required.

222
 R
Tyres

4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge 6. Repeat the process, adding or removing air
and re-attach it before reading the pressure. as required, until the correct tyre pressure
Failure to do so may result in an inaccurate is reached.
reading. 7. Refit the valve cap.
5. If the tyre pressure is too high, remove the
gauge and allow air out of the tyre by
pressing the centre of the valve. Refit the
gauge to the valve and check the pressure.
Tyre pressures, all speeds up to a maximum of 200 km/h (130 mph)
5 seat vehicles
1 to 4 occupants 4 to 5 occupants
Tyre size Speed rating Front Rear Front Rear
bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa)
225/65 R17 V 2.4 (35, 240) 2.1 (30, 210) 2.5 (36, 250) 2.4 (35, 240)
235/65 R17 H or V
235/60 R18 V
235/55 R19 V 2.5 (36, 250) 2.2 (32, 220) 2.5 (36, 250) 2.5 (36, 250)
245/45 R20 V 2.7 (39, 270) 2.8 (41, 280)
7 seat vehicles
1 to 4 occupants 4 to 7 occupants
Tyre size Speed rating Front Rear Front Rear
bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa)
225/65 R17 V 2.4 (35, 240) 2.1 (30, 210) 2.5 (36, 250) 2.8 (41, 280)
235/65 R17 H or V
235/60 R18 V
235/55 R19 V 2.5 (36, 250) 2.2 (32, 220) 2.5 (36, 250) 2.7 (40, 270)
245/45 R20 V 2.7 (39, 270) 3.0 (44, 300)

Temporary use spare, tyre pressures - maximum 80 km/h (50 mph)

Tyre size Load/speed index Front Rear
bar (psi. kPa) bar (psi. kPa)
155/85 R18 - 4.2 (61, 420) 4.2 (61, 420)

223
L
Tyres

TYRE VALVES When the tread has worn down to approximately

2 mm, wear indicators start to appear at the
Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly to
surface of the tread pattern. This produces a
prevent water or dirt entering the valve. Check
continuous band of rubber across the tread, as
the valves for leaks when checking the tyre
a visual reminder.
pressures. For TPMS tyre valves, see 227, TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM. Tyres should be renewed in sets of 4. If this is
not possible, renew the tyres in pairs (both front
REPLACEMENT TYRES or both rear). When tyres are renewed, the
wheels should always be re-balanced and the
Always fit replacement tyres of the alignment checked.
same type, and wherever possible, of
the same make and tread pattern. For the correct tyre specification and pressures,
see 221, TYRE PRESSURES. Alternatively
The load and speed index ratings on contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
all replacement tyres must be, at least,
Replacement TPMS sensor
the same specification as the vehicle's
original equipment. If in doubt, consult If a new TPMS sensor is to be fitted to a
a Dealer/Authorised Repairer. standard size running wheel on the vehicle, it
should be installed by a Dealer/Authorised
If lower speed rated specialist tyres
Repairer. The vehicle needs to be stationary for
are fitted (e.g., winter tyres or off-road
15 minutes during the sensor fitment, before
tyres) then the vehicle must be driven
the system is ready to detect the new sensor.
within the speed limitations of the
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of
tyres. Consult your Land Rover dealer
15 minutes after the sensor change, and then
for further information. In markets that
remain stationary for 15 minutes to activate full
require a tyres maximum speed label
TPMS operation.
to be fitted, the tyre's maximum speed
label should be placed within the If the TPMS warning lamp does not extinguish,
driver's field of vision. These can be even after checking the tyre pressures and
obtained from the tyre dealer. driving for more than 10 minutes above 25 km/h
(16 mph), seek qualified assistance as soon as
Do not rotate the tyres around the
possible.
vehicle.

If the use of tyres not recommended by AVOIDING FLAT SPOTS

Land Rover is unavoidable, make sure In areas of extended high ambient temperature,
you read, and fully comply with, the vehicle tyres can be affected by a softening of
tyre manufacturer’s instructions. the tyre's sidewall. If the vehicle is stationary
Tyre removal and fitting should be for long periods, the effect is to slightly deform
carried out by a Dealer/Authorised the tyre at the point where the tyre meets the
Repairer. standing surface. This is known as a flat spot.
When removing a tyre from a wheel or
fitting a tyre to a wheel, make sure the
TPMS sensor is not damaged.

224
 R
Tyres

This is normal tyre behaviour. However, when Note: A dedicated winter tyre often has a lower
the vehicle is subsequently driven, vibration speed rating than the original equipment tyre,
may be experienced from the flat spot. The and the vehicle must; therefore, be driven within
condition will steadily improve with extra the speed limitation of the tyre. Consult your
mileage. Land Rover dealer for further information. In
In order to minimise flat spotting while the markets that require a tyres maximum speed
vehicle is stationary for a long period, tyre label to be fitted, the tyre's maximum speed
pressures can be increased to the maximum, label should be placed within the driver's field
as stated on the tyre's sidewall. The tyres must of vision. These can be obtained from the tyre
be returned to the specified running pressures dealer.
before driving. See 221, TYRE PRESSURES. The tyre pressures indicated on the tyre
information label are for use in all conditions
TYRE DEGRADATION on the original equipment tyres. If a reduced
speed rating tyre is fitted, the recommended
Tyres degrade over time due to the effects of
pressures are only suitable for use below 160
ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
km/h (100 mph).
loads, and environmental conditions. It is
recommended that tyres are renewed at least For optimum traction, tyres should be run in for
every 6 years, but they may require renewing at least 160 kilometres (100 miles) on dry
more frequently. roads, before driving on snow or ice.
Land Rover approved winter tyre sizes
USING WINTER TYRES
17 inch wheels 225/65 R17
In many countries legislation exists that requires 235/65 R17
the use of winter tyres during specified periods
of the year. 18 inch wheels 235/60 R18
M+S (mud and snow) tyres have a recognised 19 inch wheels 235/55 R19
level of winter performance and need not be 20 inch wheels 245/45 R20 *
renewed. The M+S marking on the tyre's
sidewall indicates an 'all season' tyre designed
Note: *Studded tyres are market dependent.
for use all year round, including cold
Consult a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
temperatures, snow and ice.
Use of dedicated winter tyres may require a
This symbol identifies dedicated change of wheel size, depending on the original
winter tyres, which can be fitted if choice of wheel. All 4 wheels must be changed.
optimum winter traction is required,
If fitted with standard rubber valves, the Tyre
or the vehicle is to be used in more
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) warning
extreme winter conditions.
lamp will flash for 75 seconds and then remain
illuminated. The Message centre will also
display TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT.

225
L
Tyres

When the original wheels and tyres are refitted, TYRE DECLARATION (India only)
the vehicle will need to travel a short distance
All imported tyres meet the requirements of
to reset the TPMS and extinguish the warning
Bureau of India Standards (BIS) and comply
lamp.
with the requirements under Central Motor
Vehicle Rules (CMVR) 1989. The tyres are the
USING SNOW CHAINS same as those tyres supplied as Original
Only use traction devices in heavy Equipment (OE) for Land Rover models which
snow conditions, on compacted snow. are fully Type Approved for the Indian market.
Never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) when
traction devices are fitted.
Never fit traction devices to a
temporary use spare wheel.
Land Rover approved traction devices may be
used to improve traction on compacted snow
in heavy snow conditions. They should not be
used in off-road conditions.
If it becomes necessary to fit traction devices,
the following points must be observed:
• Only Land Rover approved traction devices
should be used on the vehicle. Only Land
Rover approved traction devices have been
tested to make sure they do not cause
damage to the vehicle. Contact a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for information.
• The wheels and tyres fitted must conform
to the specifications of the vehicle's original
equipment.
• For the 17, 18, 19 and 20 inch diameter
wheels, only half chains can be fitted.
• Fit traction devices in pairs on the front axle
only.
• Always read, understand and follow the
traction device manufacturer's instructions.
Pay particular attention to the maximum
speed and fitting instructions.
• Avoid tyre/vehicle damage, by removing the
traction devices as soon as the conditions
allow.

226
 R
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM
TPMS provides a low pressure warning
and does not re-inflate your tyres. Tyre
pressures should be checked regularly,
using an accurate pressure gauge when
the tyres are cold.
TPMS can NOT register damage to a
tyre. Regularly check the condition of
your tyres, especially if the vehicle is
driven off-road.
When inflating tyres, care should be
taken to avoid bending or damaging the
TPMS valves. Always confirm the correct
alignment of the inflation head to the
valve stem. Wheels fitted with a TPMS can be visually
Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere identified by the external metal lock nut and
with the system. If this occurs, TYRE valve (1). All Land Rover non-TPMS wheels
PRESSURE MONITORING FAULT is displayed have a rubber valve fitted (2).
in the Message centre. Note: At each tyre change, a special service kit
Note: Different types of tyre may affect TPMS is required for each TPMS valve.
performance. Always renew tyres in accordance Tyre pressures should be checked regularly
with recommendations. when the tyres are cold and adjusted as
TPMS constantly monitors the tyre pressure in necessary. The presence of a TPMS does not
each wheel, including the full size spare. remove the need to check tyre pressures as part
Temporary use spare tyres are not monitored. of a vehicle safety check. See 221, TYRE
See 228, TEMPORARY USE SPARE WHEEL AND PRESSURES.
TYRE CHANGE. The tyre pressure warning lamp illuminates
when one or more of the tyres are significantly
under-inflated, accompanied with a message in
the Message centre. See 55, TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM (YELLOW). Stop and
check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate
them to the recommended pressure.
TPMS also monitors the full size spare tyre
pressure. If the pressure for the spare tyre is
incorrect, the message CHECK SPARE TYRE
PRESSURE is displayed, accompanied by the
illumination of the warning lamp.

227
L
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

Vehicles supplied with 245/45/R20 tyres, will This TPMS display sequence will be activated
also have a speed based TPMS. If the vehicle at every ignition cycle until the temporary spare
is required to travel at speeds over 160 km/h wheel is replaced by a full-size road wheel with
(100 mph), the tyre pressures should be raised. a TPMS sensor fitted.
See 221, TYRE PRESSURES. Failure to do this Note: If in use, always replace the temporary
may cause the warning message TYRE spare wheel before having a TPMS fault
PRESSURES LOW FOR SPEED to be displayed investigated.
in the Message centre.
Note: Make sure to reset the tyre pressures to
the correct pressure when the vehicle will be
travelling at speeds of less than 160 km/h (100
mph).

FULL SIZE SPARE WHEEL AND TYRE

CHANGE
The system will automatically recognise any
changes in wheel positions. The vehicle must
be stationary for 15 minutes during the wheel
and tyre change, to make sure that the system
can detect the change. After driving above 25
km/h (18 mph) any deflation warning should
clear within approximately 5 minutes.

TEMPORARY USE SPARE WHEEL AND

TYRE CHANGE
If the temporary use spare wheel is fitted, the
system will automatically recognise the change
in wheel positions. After approximately 10
minutes of driving above 25 km/h (18 mph),
the message FRONT[REAR] RIGHT[LEFT] TYRE
PRESSURE NOT MONITORED will be displayed,
accompanied by illumination of the warning
lamp.
The warning lamp will first flash and then
illuminate continuously. Extended use of the
temporary use spare wheel will trigger the
message TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT.

228
 R
Tyre repair kit

TYRE REPAIR KIT Only use the tyre repair kit to seal
damage located within the tyre tread
If you are in any doubt regarding your
area (A).
ability to carry out the instructions,
contact your Dealer/Authorised Do not use the tyre repair kit to seal
Repairer before attempting the repair. damage to the tyre sidewall.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with a spare Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when
tyre. If this is the case, in its place in the rear a repaired tyre is fitted to the vehicle.
underfloor of the loadspace, you will find a tyre The maximum distance that should be
repair kit which comprises of a compressor and driven when a repaired tyre is fitted,
a bottle of sealant. The tyre repair kit can be is 200 km (125 miles).
used to repair one tyre and it is essential that When a repaired tyre is fitted, drive
you read the following guide before attempting with caution and avoid sudden braking
to repair a tyre. or steering manoeuvres.
The tyre repair kit seals most punctures, with a Only use the tyre repair kit for the
maximum diameter of 6 mm (1/4 in.), within vehicle with which it was supplied.
the tread area.
Do not use the tyre repair kit for any
Note: The sealant used in the tyre repair kit has other purpose than tyre repair.
a shelf life and the expiry date is shown on the
tyre sealant bottle. Make sure that the container Never leave the tyre repair kit
is renewed before the expiry date. unattended when in use.
Only use the tyre repair kit within the
TYRE REPAIR KIT SAFETY -30°C to +70°C temperature range.
INFORMATION Always keep children and animals at
a safe distance from the tyre repair kit
Some tyre damage may only be
when in use.
partially sealed, or may not seal at all,
depending on the amount and type of Do not stand directly beside the
damage. Any loss of tyre pressure can compressor when it is operating.
seriously affect vehicle safety. Check the tyre sidewall before
Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyre inflating. If any cracks, damage or
has been damaged by driving while deformities are apparent, do not inflate
under-inflated. the tyre.
Watch the tyre sidewall during
inflation. If any cracks, bumps or
similar damage, or deformities appear,
switch off the compressor and deflate
the tyre. Do not continue to use the
tyre.

USING THE TYRE REPAIR KIT

Avoid skin contact with the sealant
which contains natural rubber latex.

229
L
Tyre repair kit

Before attempting a tyre repair, make If the tyre's inflation pressure does not
sure that the vehicle is parked safely, as reach 1.8 bar (26 psi, 180 kPa) within
far away from passing traffic as possible. a maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre
Make sure the parking brake is applied may have suffered excessive damage.
and Park (P) is selected. Select 1st or A temporary repair will not be
reverse gear for vehicles with a manual possible, and the vehicle should not
transmission. be driven until the tyre has been
renewed.
Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects such as nails, screws, etc. from 1. Open the tyre repair kit and peel off the
the tyre. maximum speed label. Attach the label to
the fascia, in the driver's field of vision. Take
Always run the engine when using the
care not to obstruct any of the instruments
compressor, unless the vehicle is in an
or warning lamps.
enclosed or poorly ventilated space, as
this may cause asphyxiation. 2. Uncoil the compressor power cable and the
inflation hose.
To prevent overheating, do not operate
the compressor continuously for longer 3. Unscrew the orange cap from the sealant
than 10 minutes. bottle receiver and the sealant bottle cap.
Note: All vehicle drivers and occupants should 4. Screw the sealant bottle into the receiver in
be made aware that a temporary repair has been a clockwise direction, until tight.
made to a tyre fitted to the vehicle. They should Note: Screwing the bottle onto the receiver
also be made aware of the special driving will pierce the bottle's seal. Once the
conditions imposed when using a repaired tyre. receiver has been fitted, a ratchet prevents
it from being removed.
REPAIR PROCEDURE 5. Remove the valve cap from the damaged
Check the tyre's sidewall prior to tyre.
inflation. If there are any cracks, 6. Remove the protective cap from the inflation
bumps or similar damage, do not hose. Connect the inflation hose to the tyre
attempt to inflate the tyre. Do not stand valve, making sure that the hose is screwed
directly beside the tyre while the on firmly.
compressor is pumping. Watch the 7. Make sure the compressor switch is in the
tyre's sidewall. If any cracks, bumps Off (0) position, then insert the power cable
or similar damage appear, turn off the connector into an auxiliary power socket.
compressor and let the air out by See 91, AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS.
means of the pressure relief valve. Do Switch on the ignition. See 108, SWITCHING
not continue to use the tyre. ON THE IGNITION. Alternatively, if the
vehicle is not in a confined space the engine
can be started.
8. Switch on the compressor by positioning
the switch to the (l) position.

230
 R
Tyre repair kit

9. Inflate the tyre to a minimum of 1.8 bar (26 CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE
psi, 180 kPa) and a maximum of 3.5 bar AFTER A REPAIR
(51 psi, 350 kPa).
When driving the vehicle, if you
Note: When pumping the sealant through experience vibrations, abnormal
the tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to steering, or noises, reduce speed
6 bar (87 psi, 600 kPa). The pressure will immediately. Drive with extreme
drop again after approximately 30 seconds. caution and reduced speed, to the first
10. During inflation, switch the compressor off safe place to stop the vehicle. Visually
briefly, to check the tyre pressure using the examine the tyre and check its
gauge mounted on the compressor. pressure. If there are any signs of
Note: It should not take longer than 10 damage or deformity to the tyre, or the
minutes to inflate the tyre. If, after a tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 psi,
maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre has not 130 kPa), do not continue driving.
yet reached minimum pressure, the tyre Consult a tyre repair centre or your
should not be used. Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for advice
11. Once the tyre has been inflated to the concerning the renewal of a tyre after
required pressure, switch off the using a tyre repair kit.
compressor. If desired, the ignition may be 1. Drive the vehicle for a maximum of 10 km
turned off after the compressor has been (6 miles), then stop in a safe place. Carry
turned off. out a visual examination of the tyre’s
12. Remove the power connector from the condition.
auxiliary power socket. 2. Remove the repair kit from the vehicle.
13. Remove the inflation hose from the tyre 3. Screw the inflation hose connector firmly
valve, by unscrewing it as quickly as onto the tyre valve.
possible in an counter-clockwise direction. 4. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge.
14. Replace the inflation hose's protective cap 5. If the pressure of the sealant filled tyre is
and the tyre valve cap. above 1.3 bar (19 psi, 130 kPa), adjust the
15. Make sure the tyre repair kit (including the pressure to the correct value.
bottle and receiver caps) is placed securely 6. Make sure that the compressor switch is in
in the vehicle. You will need to use the kit the off (O) position and insert the power
to check the tyre pressure after a maximum cable connector into the auxiliary power
of 10 km (6 miles), so make sure it is easily socket.
accessible. Switch on the ignition. Alternatively, if the
16. Immediately drive the vehicle for a vehicle is not in a confined space the engine
maximum of 10 km (6 miles). This will allow can be started.
the sealant to coat the inner surface of the 7. Switch the compressor to on (l) and inflate
tyre and form a seal at the puncture. the tyre to the correct pressure. See 221,
TYRE PRESSURES.

231
L
Tyre repair kit

8. To check the tyre pressure, turn off the Only sealant bottles which are
compressor and then read the pressure completely empty should be
from the gauge. disposed of with normal household
9. When the compressor is off, if the tyre waste. Sealant bottles which contain
pressure is too high, release the required some sealant, and the tyre inflation
amount of pressure using the pressure hose, should be disposed of by a
release valve. tyre specialist or your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, in
10. Once the tyre is inflated to the correct
compliance with local waste disposal
pressure, switch off the compressor and
regulations.
remove the power plug from the auxiliary
socket.
• The use of the tyre repair kit sealant
may lead to error prompts and incorrect
readings of the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). Therefore,
use the tyre repair kit pressure gauge
to check and adjust the damaged tyre's
inflation pressure.
11. Unscrew the inflation hose connector from
the tyre valve, renew the tyre valve cap and
the inflation hose connector's protective
cap.
12. Make sure that the tyre repair kit is placed
securely in the vehicle.
13. Drive to the nearest tyre repair centre or
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for a
replacement tyre to be fitted. Make sure that
you make the repair centre aware that the
tyre repair kit has been used before the tyre
is removed.
14. The tyre inflation hose, the receiver and the
sealant bottle must be renewed once a new
tyre has been fitted.

232
 R
Wheel changing

WHEEL CHANGING SAFETY TOOL KIT

Before raising the vehicle or changing a wheel, 5 seat vehicles
make sure you read and comply with the Lift the loadspace floor to access the temporary
following warnings: use spare wheel and tool kit.
Always find a safe place to stop, off the
highway and away from traffic.
Make sure the vehicle is on firm, level
ground.
Apply the parking brake. Engage Park
(P) on automatic vehicles; select first
or reverse gear on manual vehicles.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

Make sure the front wheels are in the

straight ahead position and engage the
steering lock.
Disconnect a trailer/caravan from the
vehicle.
Make sure all passengers, and
animals, are out of the vehicle and in
a safe place away from the highway.
Place a warning triangle at a suitable
distance behind the vehicle, facing
towards oncoming traffic.

1. Temporary use spare wheel locking ring.

2. Temporary use spare wheel retaining bolt.
3. Tool kit retaining bolt.
4. Jack.
5. Wheel brace.
Secure the spare wheel, or the
removed wheel, in the correct position
using the retaining bolt.

233
L
Wheel changing

7 seat vehicles The temporary spare wheel is

Lift the loadspace floor to access the tool kit. extremely heavy and if handled
incorrectly may cause injury. Use
extreme caution when lifting or
manoeuvring the wheels.
5 seat vehicles
Always secure the temporary spare
wheel, or the removed wheel, in the
correct position using the retaining
bolt.
1. Lift the loadspace floor to access the
temporary spare wheel.
2. Turn the temporary spare wheel locking ring
counter-clockwise to gain access to the
retaining bolt.
3. Turn the retaining bolt counter-clockwise
until it comes free.
4. Remove the temporary spare wheel.
7 seat vehicles
The wheels are extremely heavy.
Always take care when operating the
spare wheel winch while removing or
1. Wheel chocks. stowing the temporary spare wheel and
the road wheel.
2. Wheel brace.
It is recommended that the road wheel
3. Locking wheel nut adaptor. is always stowed underneath the vehicle
4. Jack. following a puncture.
5. Winch handle for lowering the temporary Always stow a road wheel, and the
use spare wheel. temporary spare wheel with the outer
6. Rear bumper cover removal tool. face of the wheel facing upwards.
Note: Examine the jack occasionally, clean and Do not operate the winch (retracting or
grease the moving parts, particularly the screw extracting the cable) without
thread, to prevent corrosion. pre-tensioning the cable as you do so.
Doing so may cause damage to the
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL winch. This pre-tensioning can be
achieved, either with the weight of a
Remove the temporary spare wheel temporary spare wheel, a road wheel, or
prior to jacking the vehicle, to avoid by maintaining a tension using your
destabilising the vehicle when raised. hand.
Do not stow the wheel while the vehicle
is raised on the jack.

234
 R
Wheel changing

If when using your hand to tension the Note: The cover cannot be refitted after the full
winch cable, take care not to trap your size wheel is to be stowed under the vehicle.
fingers. Store the cover in the loadspace.
Do not use power tools to lower the
temporary spare wheel. Doing so may
damage the winch mechanism.
The temporary spare wheel is located
underneath the rear of the vehicle. The winch
to lower the spare wheel is located in the bottom
of the tool tray.
Before lowering the temporary spare wheel,
remove the cover in the rear bumper.

To remove the spare wheel:

1. Remove the jack to allow access to the
temporary spare wheel winch.
2. Fit the winch handle to the temporary spare
wheel winch and rotate counter-clockwise
to lower the spare wheel.
Note: To avoid damage to the side trim and
third row seats (if raised), slide the winch
handle through the tube to shorten the
handle.
3. Rotate the winch handle until the temporary
spare wheel is on the ground and the winch
cable is slack.
Note: Do not attempt to turn the winch
beyond the physical stop.
To release the wheel from the winch:
1. Using the special tool located in the tool
tray, remove the 2 fixings (1) and store
them in a safe place. See 233, TOOL KIT.
2. Remove the cover, easing it off the 4
retaining clips (2).

235
L
Wheel changing

Note: If while the cable is being extracted, the

winch feels tight or locks up, stop winding and
wind back, at least one full turn. Apply a tension
on the cable to release any cable slack, if
necessary, giving it a sharp tug. Try the winch
again and continue if the mechanism is free to
operate. Repeat, if the winch feels tight or locks
up again.
If the winch feels tight or locks up, stop
Lift the temporary spare wheel and release the
winding and wind back, at least one full
winch cable by passing it through the centre of
turn. If this fails to free the winch
the wheel, as shown in the above graphic.
mechanism, do not continue, as damage
To stow the removed road wheel: may be caused to the winch.
1. Remove the centre cap from the road wheel Refitting the bumper cover
and store it in a safe place.
When the temporary spare wheel is stowed
2. Position the road wheel underneath the rear underneath the vehicle, refit the bumper cover
of the vehicle, with the outer face of the as follows:
road wheel facing upwards.
1. Locate the 4 retaining clips on the cover
3. Pass the winch cable through the centre of into the slots in rear bumper.
the wheel.
2. Locate the 2 fixing points in the underside
4. Start to turn the winch handle clockwise to of the cover to the bumper and fasten the
take the slack out of the cable, then make cover to the bumper using the fixings.
sure the cable end is seated correctly before Tighten the fixings with the special tool.
continuing to raise the wheel.
5. Continue to rotate the winch handle until IMPORTANT – USE OF SPARE TYRE
the road wheel is in the stowed position. Adhere to the instructions on the
6. Remove the winch handle and stow all of temporary spare wheel warning label,
the tools and the jack in the tool tray. affixed to the wheel. Failure to do so
Note: The bumper cover cannot be refitted to may cause vehicle instability and/or
the vehicle with a stowed full sized wheel. tyre failure.
Operating the winch without a road wheel Where fitted, the temporary spare
attached wheel is FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
Drive with caution while the temporary
When extracting the winch cable after the winch
spare wheel is fitted. Make sure an
cable has been retracted without a road wheel
original size wheel and tyre are fitted
attached, operate the winch as follows:
as soon as possible.
Fit the winch handle to the temporary spare
Do not fit more than one temporary use
wheel winch and rotate counter-clockwise to
spare wheel on the vehicle at any one
extract the cable, while also applying tension
time.
by pulling on the end of the winch cable.

236
 R
Wheel changing

The temporary use spare wheel must Note: A code number is stamped onto the
be inflated to 4.2 bar (60 psi, 420 kPa) underside of the adaptor. If a replacement
and cannot be repaired. adaptor is required, you will be asked to quote
The temporary use spare wheel's, this number. Make sure the number is recorded
maximum speed is 80 km/h (50 mph). and kept safe, but it should not be kept with the
vehicle.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) must
be switched on while the temporary 1. Insert the wheel nut adaptor into the locking
spare wheel is in use. wheel nut, making sure it is fully engaged.
Traction devices, such as snow chains, 2. Locate the wheel brace over the adaptor and
cannot be used with a temporary spare unscrew the wheel nut half a turn
wheel. counter-clockwise.
3. After raising the vehicle on the jack, remove
USING WHEEL CHOCKS the locking wheel nut.
Note: Not all vehicles have wheel chocks Note: After use, store the wheel nut adaptor
supplied as part of the tool kit. correctly in the tool kit.
Wheel chocks are a useful addition to a vehicle's
tool kit. Note the following advice when using WHEEL CHANGING
wheel chocks: Before raising the vehicle or changing a wheel,
Before raising the vehicle, the wheel make sure you read and comply with the
diagonally opposite the one to be following warnings:
removed must be chocked. Make sure the jack is on firm level
Always chock the wheels using suitable ground.
wheel chocks. Place the chocks on both
sides of the wheel diagonally opposite Never place anything between the jack
the wheel to be changed. and the ground, or the jack and the
vehicle.
If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope
is unavoidable, place the chocks on Position the jack from the side of the
the downhill side of both wheels on the vehicle, in-line with the appropriate
axle not being raised. jacking point.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS unless the jack head is fully engaged
in the jacking point. Only jack the
Locking wheel nuts can be removed, only by
vehicle using the approved jacking
using the special adaptor provided in the tool
points.
kit.
WARNING - THAT NO PERSON SHOULD
Note: When the vehicle is first supplied, the
PLACE ANY PORTION OF THEIR BODY
adaptor may be stored in the glove
UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
compartment. It should be removed and stored
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
in the tool kit as soon as possible.

237
L
Wheel changing

Take care when loosening the wheel

nuts. The wheel brace may slip off if
not properly attached and the wheel
nuts may give way suddenly. Either
unexpected movement, may cause an
injury.
Take care when lifting the spare wheel
and removing the punctured wheel.
The wheels are heavy and can cause
injuries if not handled correctly.
Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is supported only by a jack.
Jack up the vehicle using only the
jacking points described, or damage to
the vehicle could occur.
If your vehicle is fitted with side steps
1. Locate the jack under the relevant jacking
or tubes, DO NOT use them as jacking
point.
points.
Note: Do not allow the jack to contact the
Note: Your vehicle may be fitted with a tilt
sill at any other point, as damage may
sensor, which activates the alarm if the vehicle
result.
is tilted in any direction after it has been locked.
To lock the doors while changing the wheel, and 2. Unfold the cranking handle from its stowed
avoid the alarm activating, the tilt sensor can position on the jack.
be temporarily disabled. See 16, TILT SENSOR. 3. Rotate the handle clockwise to raise the jack
Before rasing the vehicle, use the wheel nut until the jack, pin locates into the jacking
brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn point.
counter-clockwise. 4. Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clear of
the ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and place them
together where they cannot roll away.
6. Remove the wheel and place it to one side.
Do not lay the wheel on its face, as this may
damage the finish.
7. Fit the temporary spare wheel to the hub.
8. Re-fit the wheel nuts and lightly tighten
them, making sure that the wheel is making
contact with the hub evenly.
9. Make sure the space under the vehicle is
clear of obstructions before lowering the
vehicle slowly and smoothly.

238
 R
Wheel changing

10. With all of the wheels on the ground and

the jack removed, fully tighten the wheel
nuts. The wheel nuts must be tightened in
sequence (see the illustration below) to the
correct torque of 133 Nm (98 lb.ft).

Note: If it is not possible to torque the wheel

nuts when a wheel is renewed, they should be
set to the correct torque as soon as possible.
Check and adjust the tyre pressure as soon as
possible.

239
L
Vehicle recovery

RECOVERY METHOD
The method for recovery/transportation of the
vehicle is on a transporter or trailer designed
for that purpose.
Make sure that vehicle
recovery/transportation is carried out by
suitably qualified personnel and the
vehicle is secured correctly.
The recovery agent must activate the
Transmission park release before
recovery commences. This procedure is
covered in a separate publication for
service personnel. Failure to activate the
Transmission park release can result in
serious transmission damage.
This vehicle should not be towed on all
4 wheels and should not be recovered
with the front or rear wheels suspended.
Doing so can result in serious
transmission damage.

TOWING POINTS
The towing eyes at the front and rear
To access the front towing eye: Rotate the 2
of the vehicle are designed for on-road
fasteners (1) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
recovery only. If they are used for any
Pull the panel away from the front bumper.
other purpose, it may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury. The rear towing eye is located under the
loadspace floor cover. The rear towing eye must
Use extreme caution when moving or
be screwed into the towing point, located behind
towing the vehicle. Death or serious
the panel on the right-side of the rear bumper.
injury may occur.
Note: Panel design may vary depending on the
Use extreme caution when detaching
vehicle specification.
towing equipment. Vehicle movement
is possible which can result in serious
injury.
Remove the front towing eye cover
before driving off-road, to prevent
damage or loss. The cover must be
replaced before driving on the road.
The front towing eye is fixed and located behind
the panel in the front bumper.

240
 R
Vehicle recovery

Fitment of the panels is the reverse of removal.

TRANSMISSION PARK RELEASE

When recovering the vehicle, it is essential that
the Transmission park release mechanism is
activated. This will lock the transmission in
Neutral (N) and prevent the transmission from
automatically selecting Park (P). The
Transmission park release mechanism is
activated by a lever, beneath the air cleaner in
the engine compartment.
Make sure that the vehicle is secured
with wheel chocks, apply the Electric
Parking Brake (EPB), or firmly press
the brake pedal (this will require 2
people). Failure to do so can result in
unexpected movement of the vehicle,
causing serious injury or death.
1. Pop out the access cover. Note: This procedure will require a tool with a
2. Locate the towing eye through the bumper 5 mm diameter, to lock the Transmission park
and fully screw the towing eye clockwise release mechanism in the Neutral (N) position.
into the towing point, until secure.

241
L
Vehicle recovery

To activate the Transmission park release 10. Release the air cleaner assembly from the
mechanism, carry out the following: 2 locating grommets, and remove the air
1. Release the clip on the air cleaner outlet cleaner assembly.
pipe. Note: Stow the air cleaner in a suitable
2. Release the wiring harness clip. place.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 11. Rotate the park release lever
counter-clockwise, until it is in the forward
4. Undo the bolt.
position.
5. Rotate the 2 clips counter-clockwise and
12. Insert a suitable tool with a 5 mm diameter
pull upwards to remove.
(Allen key, drill bit, etc.), through the hole
6. Release the clip. in the park release lever, and locate the tool
7. Remove the air cleaner intake pipe. in to the transmission casing.
8. Apply upwards pressure to the air cleaner
assembly.
9. Release the wiring harness clip.

242
 R
Vehicle recovery

Note: Make sure that the tool is fully

engaged in to the transmission casing.
Incorrect location of the tool may cause
damage to the vehicle, and may cause the
vehicle to return to the Park (P) position.
When the transmission park release mechanism
is activated, the gear selector will remain in P,
but the selector indicator and the Instrument
panel will both display a flashing N.
When vehicle transportation has been
completed, the Transmission park release
mechanism will need to be deactivated. To
deactivate the Transmission park release
mechanism, reverse the steps above.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the towing eyes are to be used for
off-road recovery, it is essential that
off-road driver training, covering
recovery techniques, is undertaken.
Further information on off-road driver training
can be found at:
www.landroverexperience.com.

243
L
After a collision

BEFORE STARTING OR DRIVING 2. Airbag side panels inflated.

If the vehicle is involved in a collision 3. Airbag centre panel inflated.
it should be checked by a Dealer/ Repack the Pedestrian airbag, as follows:
Authorised Repairer, or suitably Note: If the airbag is not fully deflated, fold and
qualified persons, before starting or compress the airbag to release air, before
driving. starting to repack.

AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE

PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM
Note: Fitment of the Pedestrian protection
system is market and model dependent.
Following a collision, the vehicle must be
stopped as soon as it is safe to do so.
The hazard warning lamps will be activated and
can only be switched off by pressing the engine
Start/stop button to turn the engine off and on
again.
A warning message will appear in the Message
centre and, if requested, the vehicle should be
transported to the nearest Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
If the Pedestrian airbag deploys following a
collision and none of the internal airbags have
deployed, the vehicle can be driven after the
Pedestrian airbag has been stowed. See 244,
REPACKING THE PEDESTRIAN AIRBAG.

REPACKING THE PEDESTRIAN AIRBAG

1. Fold both of the airbag side panels across

the vehicle, and underneath the airbag
cover.
2. Pull the airbag centre panel over the airbag
cover.
1. Airbag cover.

244
 R
After a collision

3. On each side, pull the airbag centre panel South Korea Only
as tight as possible. Using the velcro panels, Please be advised that this vehicle incorporates
attach the straps on the centre airbag panel an Event Data Recorder (EDR). An EDR stores
(3) to the airbag cover straps (4). driving information at the moment of accident
Following repacking, if safe to do so, the vehicle (driving speed, application of brake pedal and
should be driven with caution to a accelerator control etc.), and enables to confirm
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to be checked for the information stored. EDR information helps
damage and for the replacement of the understanding the circumstances of accident
Pedestrian airbag. more clearly.

EVENT DATA RECORDING SERVICE DATA RECORDING

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Service data recorders in your vehicle are
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like information about your vehicle. This potentially
situations, such as an airbag deployment or includes information about the performance or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in status of various systems and modules in the
understanding how a vehicle's systems vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
performed. The EDR is designed to record data brakes.
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems In order to properly diagnose and service your
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
record such data as: information through a direct connection to your
• How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle.
operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were buckled/fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
To access this information special equipment
must be connected directly to the recording
modules. Land Rover do not access EDR
information without obtaining consent unless
pursuant to a court order or where required by
law enforcement, other government authorities
or third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Land Rover.
Note: No personal data (e.g., name, gender, age
and crash location) are recorded.

245
L
Vehicle labels

LABEL LOCATIONS 4. Battery warning symbols: Located on the

top of the battery.
Warning labels attached to the
5. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
vehicle bearing this symbol mean:
stamped on a plate which is visible through
Do not touch or adjust components
the lowest part of the left side of the front
until you have read the relevant
windscreen.
instructions in the handbook.
The VIN can also be shown in the Message
Labels showing this symbol indicate centre via the Vehicle Info and Vehicle VIN
that the ignition system utilises very Instrument panel menus. See 49,
high voltages. Do not touch any INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
ignition components while the Note: If you need to communicate with a
starter switch (ignition) is turned on. Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be
Additional information labels may also be found asked to quote the VIN number.
at the following locations: The vehicle's built date is shown on the VIN
label.
Note: The vehicle's built date is the calendar
month and year in which the body and
power-train assemblies were conjoined and
the vehicle was driven from the production
line. The vehicle's built date may also be
shown on the tyre pressure label.
6. The VIN is also stamped into the right side,
front inner wing.
7. Airbag label and vehicle handling label:
Located on the sun visors.
8. Tyre pressure and airbag warning labels.
Left side B post: VIN label.
9. Fuel specification label: Located inside the
fuel filler flap.
It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects to make sure the vehicle and its
features are used safely.

1. Air conditioning label: Located on the

bonnet locking platform.
2. Engine identification information: Stamped
into the engine mounting flange.
3. Engine information label: Located on the
top right side of the engine cover.

246
 R
Technical specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Description Diesel 150 PS Diesel 190 PS Petrol
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Displacement (cc) 2 179 2 179 1 999
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Compression ratio 15.8:1 15.8:1 10:1
Maximum torque 400 Nm at 1 750 rpm 420 Nm at 1 750 rpm 340 Nm at 1 750 rpm
Power output 110 kW (150 PS) at 140 kW (190 PS) at 177 kW (240 PS) at
4 000 rpm 3 500 rpm 5 500 rpm

247
L
Technical specifications

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Description Variant Specification
Engine oil Diesel with DPF (Diesel SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
Particulate Filter) WSS-M2C934-B. If unavailable, 5W-30 engine
oils to ACEA C2 specification may be used.
Diesel without DPF SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
WSS-M2C913- C. If unavailable, 5W-30 engine
oils to ACEA A5/B5 specification may be used.
Petrol SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
WSS-M2C913-C.
Gearbox oil Manual Land Rover recommends Castrol ECO MTF FE
75W.
Automatic Land Rover recommends Shell AFT L12108.
Active driveline Vehicles with active Land Rover recommends Pentosin CHF11S.
disconnect hydraulic driveline
actuator
Power transfer unit Vehicles without active Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT448.
driveline
Vehicles with active Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT720.
driveline
Haldex coupling Vehicles without active Land Rover recommends Statoil SL 12 301.
driveline
Rear differential oil Vehicles without active Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT448.
driveline
Vehicles with active Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT720.
driveline
Brake/Clutch fluid All vehicles Use Land Rover brake fluid. If unavailable for
topping up, a Low Viscosity, DOT4 brake fluid
that meets the requirements of ISO 4925 class
6 may be used.
Screen wash All vehicles Screen wash with frost protection.
Screen cleaning paste All vehicles Land Rover screen cleaning paste DNJ500340.
Coolant All vehicles 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water - Land
Rover recommends Texaco XLC.

248
 R
Technical specifications

Land Rover recommends: Castrol EDGE

Professional

249
L
Technical specifications

CAPACITIES
Item Variant Capacity litres (pints)
Fuel tank Diesel 65 (14.3 gallons)
Petrol 70 (15.4 gallons)
Engine oil refill and filter Diesel 5.9 (10.4)
change Petrol 5.4 (9.5)
Gearbox Manual 1.9 (3.3)
Automatic 7.0 (12.3)
Washer reservoir With and without headlamp powerwash 4.1 (8.7)
Cooling system (refill) Diesel manual with auxiliary heater 5.6 (9.9)
Diesel manual without auxiliary heater 5.4 (9.5)
Diesel automatic with auxiliary heater 5.9 (10.4)
Diesel automatic without auxiliary heater 5.7 (10.0)
Petrol with auxiliary heater 4.6 (8.1)
Petrol without auxiliary heater 4.4 (7.7)

The quoted capacities are approximate and

provided as a guide only. All the oil levels must
be checked using the level plugs, the Message
centre information or the drain and refill
procedure, as applicable.

WEIGHTS
Vehicle weights
Variant Vehicle weight from Gross Vehicle Weight Gross Train Weight
kg (lb) (GVW)¹ kg (lb) (GTW)² kg (lb)
Diesel 150PS manual, 1 765 (3 891) 2 505 (5 523) 4 305 (9 491)
with 5 seats
Diesel 190PS manual, 1 765 (3 891) 2 505 (5 523) 4 505 (9 932)
with 5 seats
Diesel 150PS manual, 1 854 (4 087) 2 600 (5 732) 4 350 (9 590)
with 7 seats
Diesel 190PS manual, 1 854 (4 087) 2 600 (5 732) 4 600 (10 141)
with 7 seats

250
 R
Technical specifications

Variant Vehicle weight from Gross Vehicle Weight Gross Train Weight
kg (lb) (GVW)¹ kg (lb) (GTW)² kg (lb)
Diesel 150PS 1 775 (3 913) 2 505 (5 523) 4 705 (10 373)
automatic, with 5 seats
Diesel 190PS 1 775 (3 913) 2 505 (5 523) 5 005 (11 034)
automatic, with 5 seats
Diesel 150 and 190PS 1 863 (4 107) 2 600 (5 732) 4 800 (10 582)
automatic, with 7 seats
Petrol, with 5 seats 1 744 (3 845) 2 505 (5 523) 4 505 (9 932)
Petrol, with 7 seats 1 841 (4 059) 2 575 (5 677) 4 575 (10 086)

¹ The maximum permissible weight of the Note: For every 1 000m increase above sea
vehicle, including passengers and load. level, GTW must be reduced by 10%.
² The maximum permissible weight of the
vehicle and braked trailer, including their
respective loads.
Variant Maximum front axle Maximum rear axle Maximum roof rack
load¹ kg (lb) load¹ kg (lb) load² kg (lb)
5 seat vehicles 1 340 (2 954) 1 270 (2 800) 75 (165)
7 seat vehicles 1 310 (2 888) 1 360 (2 998) 75 (165)

¹ The front and rear axle maximum loads cannot ² This figure includes the weight of the roof rack.
be reached simultaneously as this will exceed
the GVW limit.
Towing weights
Trailer/Vehicle Maximum weight kg (lb)
Unbraked trailers, all vehicles 750 (1 650)
Braked trailer, Diesel 150PS, manual, with 5 seats 1 800 (3 968)
Braked trailer, Diesel 190PS, manual, with 5 seats 2 000 (4 409)
Braked trailer, Diesel 150PS, manual, with 7 seats 1 750 (3 858)
Braked trailer, Diesel 190PS, manual, with 7 seats 2 000 (4 409)
Braked trailer, Diesel 150PS, automatic, with 5 seats 2 200 (4 850)
Braked trailer, Diesel 190PS, automatic, with 5 seats 2 500 (5 512)

251
L
Technical specifications

Trailer/Vehicle Maximum weight kg (lb)

Braked trailer, Diesel 150 and 190PS, automatic, with 7 seats 2 200 (4 850)
Braked trailer, Petrol, with 5 and 7 seats 2 000 (4 409)

For more information on Towing, see 95,

TOWING WEIGHTS.

WHEEL ALIGNMENT DATA

Wheel alignment - front toe + 0.22°
Wheel alignment - rear toe +0.18°
Camber - front -0.51°
Camber - rear -1.25°

252
 R
Technical specifications

DIMENSIONS

Item Description mm (inches) Degrees

1 Width (mirrors extended) 2 173 (85.5) -
Width (mirrors folded) 2 069 (81.4) -
2 Length (including number plate plinth) 4 590 (180.7) -
3 Height (including the roof antennae) 1 724 (67.8) -
Height with roof side rails and cross bars 1 700 (66.9) -
4 Track - front 1 621 (63.8) -
Track - rear 1 630 (64.1) -
5 Wheelbase 2 741 (107.9) -
6 Approach angle - 25.4°
7 Maximum departure angle - 31.3°
8 Ramp angle (5 and 7 seat vehicles) - 21.2°
- Maximum wading depth 600 (23.6) -
- Minimum ground clearance 212 (8.3) -
- Turning circle (kerb to kerb) 11.6 m (38 ft) -

253
L
Technical specifications

BULB SPECIFICATION
Before attempting to renew a bulb, make
sure that both the affected lamp and the
vehicle's ignition, are turned off. If the
circuit remains live, a short circuit can
occur which may damage the vehicle's
electrical system.
Lamp Specification Power (Watts)
Halogen headlamp (DRL/high beam) H15 15/55
Halogen headlamp (low beam) H7 LL 55
Front direction indicators PSY24W 24
Rear direction indicators PY21W 21
Reverse lamps W16W 16

254
 R
Technical specifications

SMART KEY TRANSMITTER LOCATIONS

1. Centre console transmitter. 8. Floor console rear transmitter (7 seat

2. Centre console transmitter. vehicles).
3. Roof keyless receiver. 9. Tailgate passive entry receiver.
4. Rear of centre console transmitter. 10. Low frequency antennas.
5. Loadspace transmitters.
6. Floor console rear transmitters (5 seat
vehicles).
7. Floor console rear transmitter (7 seat
vehicles).

255
L
Technical specifications

Any person fitted with an implanted

medical device should make sure the
device is kept at a distance of at least
22 cm (8.7 in) away from any
transmitter mounted in the vehicle.
This is to avoid any possibility of
interference between the system and
the device.

256
 R
Technical specifications

RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM REGULATION STATEMENTS

Service Frequency Max. Output Antenna Position Specific Conditions
Band
4m VHF 70 - 85 MHz 30 W / CW Anywhere on the metallic Transmitter, harness and
40 W / AM part of the roof. antenna installation to the
requirements of ISO/TS
21609.
2m VHF 142 - 175 30 W / CW Anywhere on the metallic Transmitter, harness and
MHz 40 W / AM part of the roof. antenna installation to the
requirements of ISO/TS
21609.
TETRA 380 - 422 10 W / CW Anywhere on the metallic Transmitter, harness and
MHz 10 W / PM part of the roof. antenna installation to the
requirements of ISO/TS
21609.
UHF 450 - 470 10 W / CW Anywhere on the metallic Transmitter, harness and
MHz part of the roof. antenna installation to the
requirements of ISO/TS
21609.
Bluetooth 2400 - 10 mW Anywhere on the vehicle. Transmitter, harness and
2483.5 MHz antenna installation to the
requirements of ISO/TS
21609.
Road 5795 - 5815 2 W eirp Anywhere close to a glazed Transmitter, harness and
Telematics MHz area that does not contain antenna installation to the
antennas or conductive requirements of ISO/TS
glass. 21609.
Road 63 - 64 GHz 2 W eirp Anywhere close to a glazed Transmitter, harness and
Telematics area that does not contain antenna installation to the
antennas or conductive requirements of ISO/TS
glass. 21609.

South Korea only

Omnidirectional transmission or
point-to-multipoint transmission is prohibited
according to the law.

257
L
Type approval

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY

258
 R
Type approval

259
L
Type approval

260
 R
Type approval

261
L
Type approval

262
 R
Type approval

263
L
Type approval

264
 R
Type approval

265
L
Type approval

266
 R
Type approval

267
L
Type approval

268
 R
Type approval

269
L
Type approval

270
 R
Index

Alarm...................................................15, 186
A automatic relocking and arming...............14
About this handbook......................................2 battery backed sounder............................16
Accessories................................................187 deactivating..............................................17
tow bar...................................................102 interior disabling......................................15
Access position perimeter..................................................14
rear seat...................................................26 tilt sensor.................................................16
Adaptive cruise control..............................134 AM/FM radio controls................................152
ACC gap change.....................................135 Anchor points (luggage)..............................93
automatic switch-off..............................136 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
driving hints...........................................137 lamp.............................................................55
follow mode...........................................135 Anti-theft system........................................186
forward alert...........................................139 Anti-trap protection
intelligent emergency braking................140 windows...................................................77
malfunction............................................138 Arduous driving conditions........................185
queue assist...........................................136 Assistance
radar detection beam issues..................138 InControl link..........................................165
resume follow mode...............................137 Audio
resume set speed...................................137 AM/FM radio controls.............................152
set speed and follow mode override.......136 connecting a media device.....................155
Adaptive dynamics.....................................117 connecting multiple devices...................158
Adaptive front lighting system.....................60 DAB radio controls.................................153
warning lamp...........................................55 licensing.................................................159
Adaptive headlamps.....................................60 media controls.......................................150
Age degradation (tyres).............................225 pairing and connecting a device.............158
Airbags playing a portable device........................158
cover cleaning........................................199 portable media connections...................154
curtain......................................................45 portable media controls.........................157
deployment........................................42, 45 settings..................................................151
disability modifications............................46 sound settings........................................151
disabling...................................................43 Audio settings............................................151
front.........................................................44 Auto lamps
locations...................................................42 wiper detection.........................................60
maintenance...........................................186 Automatic locking....................................9, 14
repacking the pedestrian airbag.............244 Automatic speed limiter
service information..................................46 warning lamp...........................................55
side..........................................................45 Automatic switch off of ACC......................136
warning lamp.....................................45, 55 Automatic transmission.............................112
Air conditioning drive selector fails to elevate..................114
air vents...................................................84 fault........................................................114
auto setting..............................................83 gear selector..........................................113
manual.....................................................82 gear shift warning lamp............................56
remote control batteries...........................87 Auto mode (climate)....................................83
third row seats.........................................88 Autonomous emergency braking...............119

271
L
Index

Auxiliary device connection................155, 158 automatic braking..................................119

Auxiliary power sockets...............................91 control with ABS....................................118
electronic brake force distribution..........118
B emergency assist...................................139
Battery emergency brake assist..........................118
boost starting.........................................208 fluid
care........................................................206 specification.......................................205
charging.................................................208 top up.................................................205
connecting jump leads...........................207 fluid level................................................204
disconnection.........................................209 handbrake..............................................120
effects of disconnection.........................209 important information............................118
maintenance...........................................206 parking brake warning lamp.....................53
monitoring system.................................209 steep slope control.................................118
removing................................................208 warning lamp (amber)..............................54
replacing................................................208 warning lamp (red)...................................53
using a starting aid.................................208 Brake temperature......................................145
warning lamp...........................................54 Bulbs
warning symbols....................................206 changing a bulb......................................190
Battery backed sounder...............................16 direction indicator..........................194–195
Blinds reversing lamp.......................................195
rear window.............................................77 specification...........................................254
side windows...........................................77
Blind spot monitor C
closing vehicle sensing............................72 Call volume................................................164
displayed messages.................................73 Cameras
sensor blockage.......................................73 hitch guidance..........................................96
Bluetooth proximity view........................................130
changing the connected phone or rear camera....................................123, 125
device.....................................................162 reverse traffic detection..........................125
deleting the connected phone................162 touch screen menu.................................130
general information................................161 Capacities...................................................250
pairing and connecting a device.............158 engine oil................................................250
pairing a wireless technology device......161 fuel tank.................................................250
phone compatibility................................161 washer reservoir....................................250
telephone Changing a bulb.........................................190
overview.............................................163 Changing a fuse.........................................211
safety..................................................164 Changing a wheel
Bonnet locking wheel nuts.................................237
closing...................................................188 recommended process...........................237
opening..................................................188 safety warnings......................................233
Booster seats for larger children..................39 spare wheel............................................234
Boost starting............................................208 temporary spare wheel...........................237
Brakes tool kit....................................................233
ABS warning lamp....................................55 Changing the connected phone or device...162

272
 R
Index

Charging the vehicle battery.......................208 Condensation (headlamps)..........................60

Chassis number.........................................246 Conformity declarations.............................258
Child safety Connecting a media device........................155
booster seats............................................39 Connecting a phone or device....................161
check list..................................................39 Connecting jump leads...............................207
child seats................................................36 Connecting multiple portable media
ISOFIX installation....................................39 devices.......................................................158
larger children on booster seats...............39 Controls
lock and window inhibitor........................36 touch screen............................................79
positioning...............................................37 Convenience mode.........................................9
recommended child seats........................39 Coolant
tether straps.............................................40 checking the level...................................203
Cleaning specification...........................................203
after off-road driving..............................197 top up.....................................................203
airbag covers..........................................199 Courtesy delay.............................................59
alloy wheels............................................198 Covers
exterior...................................................197 refitting...................................................189
glass.......................................................198 removal..................................................189
interior...................................................198 Critical warning messages...........................53
leather....................................................198 Cruise control............................................133
park assist sensors................................197 ACC driving hints...................................137
parking aids sensors..............................197 ACC emergency braking.........................140
rear screen.............................................198 ACC follow mode....................................135
seat belts................................................199 ACC gap change.....................................135
sensors and cameras.............................197 ACC radar detection beam issues...........138
under body.............................................197 ACC set speed and follow mode
washer jets.............................................200 override..................................................136
Climate control adaptive cruise control...........................134
air vents...................................................84 adaptive cruise control malfunction.......138
auto setting..............................................83 follow mode...........................................135
heated and cooled seats...........................85 forward alert in ACC...............................139
heated seats.............................................85 resume ACC follow mode.......................137
manual.....................................................82 resume ACC set speed...........................137
remote control batteries...........................87 using ACC..............................................134
third row seats.........................................88 warning lamp...........................................56
Climate seats................................................85 Curtain airbags.............................................45
Clock............................................................48
Closing the bonnet.....................................188 D
Closing vehicle sensing................................72 DAB radio...................................................153
Clutch Data recording...........................................245
fluid level................................................204 Daytime running lamps................................59
Cold weather driving Declarations of conformity.........................258
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................186 Deleting the connected phone or device.....162
Compatibility of phones.............................161 Deselecting valet mode................................81

273
L
Index

Detachable tow bar Driving

fitting........................................................98 ACC automatic switch-off.......................136
removing..................................................99 ACC driving hints...................................137
Detection beam issues...............................138 ACC emergency braking.........................140
Device pairing and connecting...................161 ACC follow mode....................................135
Diesel ACC forward alert...................................139
filler flap.................................................181 ACC gap change.....................................135
fuel.........................................................180 ACC malfunction....................................138
glow plugs ACC queue assist...................................136
warning lamp........................................55 ACC radar detection beam issues...........138
misfuel device........................................181 ACC set speed and follow mode
sulphur content......................................180 override..................................................136
Diesel particulate filter (DPF).....................186 activating intelligent stop/start...............110
cold weather driving...............................186 adaptive cruise control...........................134
driving short distances...........................186 after a collision.......................................244
sulphur content......................................180 after deployment of the pedestrian protection
Dimensions................................................253 system...................................................244
Direction indicators......................................58 arduous conditions................................185
warning lamp...........................................56 automatic braking..................................119
Disability modifications automatic speed limiter..........................132
airbags.....................................................46 before starting........................................244
Disabling the passenger air bag...................43 blind spot monitor
Door mirrors................................................68 closing vehicle sensing.........................72
blind spot monitor blind spot monitor messages...................73
closing vehicle sensing.........................72 brake control with ABS...........................118
sensors.................................................73 brakes important information.................118
Door transceiver daily checks............................................185
assistance................................................76 deactivating intelligent stop/start...........110
erase all programming.............................75 DSC active warning lamp.........................54
garage door opener..................................74 electronic brake force distribution..........118
programming...........................................74 emergency brake assist..........................118
programming a single button...................75 forward alert...........................................139
programming the garage door opener.....74 forward alert warning lamp......................56
rolling code device programming.............75 gear shift warning lamp............................56
Double locking.............................................14 lane departure warning lamp (green).......57
full alarm..................................................15 lane departure warning lamp (red)...........54
Downloading from the internet low oil pressure........................................53
InControl connection..............................166 park assist limitations............................128
Drive away locking.........................................9 park assist troubleshooting....................129
Driver exit rain sensor...............................................65
deactivating intelligent stop/start...........111 resume ACC follow mode.......................137
Drive selector resume ACC set speed...........................137
malfunction............................................114 running-in..............................................185
Drive selector fails to elevate.....................114 selecting park assist...............................127

274
 R
Index

sitting correctly........................................21 Emergency (navigation).............................174

steep slope control with ABS.................118 Emergency brake assist.....................118, 139
using ACC..............................................134 Emergency call
using cruise control...............................133 InControl link..........................................165
weekly checks........................................185 Emergency key locking................................17
Driving abroad Engine
beam pattern............................................60 antifreeze level........................................203
headlamps................................................60 compartment opening............................188
Driving aids coolant level...........................................203
lane departure warning...........................148 diesel fuel...............................................180
traffic sign recognition...........................147 diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................186
Driving position memory.............................21 engine compartment
Driving programs poisonous fluids.................................188
dynamic program...................................142 oil level...................................................201
general program.....................................142 petrol fuels.............................................179
grass/gravel/snow..................................142 running-in..............................................185
mud/ruts................................................142 specifications.........................................247
override options.....................................143 starting
sand.......................................................142 keyless start backup...........................109
system difficulties..................................143 switching off..........................................108
Driving short distances Engine/transmission warning lamp..............54
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................186 Engine compartment
Dynamic program......................................142 fluid filler locations.................................201
Dynamic stability control (DSC).................115 Engine covers
DSC active warning lamp.........................54 refitting...................................................189
DSC off warning lamp..............................55 removal..................................................189
switching off..........................................115 Engine oil
switching on...........................................115 capacity..................................................250
Engine starting...........................................108
E Entering the vehicle
Eco program entry and exit mode..................................22
fuel saving..............................................141 global opening............................................8
Effects of battery disconnection.................209 keyless entry..............................................8
Electric parking brake.................................120 passive entry..............................................8
Electric seats................................................20 unlocking mode..........................................8
position memory......................................21 unlocking the steering column.................31
restricted front seat travel........................21 Ethanol.......................................................179
Electric windows Event data recording..................................245
operation..................................................77 Exhaust emissions.....................................190
Electronic brake force distribution.............118 Exiting the vehicle
Electronic data...........................................245 arming the alarm......................................17
Electronic traction control (ETC)................116 closing mislock........................................17
Email door locks and release levers...................16
InControl connection..............................166 double locking..........................................14

275
L
Index

emergency locking...................................17 Fog lamps

full alarm..................................................15 warning lamps
global closing...........................................16 front.....................................................56
interior locks............................................16 rear.......................................................55
keyless locking.........................................15 Follow
lock confirmation.....................................14 override..................................................136
perimeter alarm........................................14 Follow mode
single locking...........................................14 entering..................................................135
Exterior cleaning........................................197 gap change.............................................135
Exterior lamps gap changing..........................................135
bulb changing........................................190 override..................................................137
bulb specification...................................254 resume...................................................137
Exterior mirrors Forward alert..............................................139
electric.....................................................68 Forward alert in ACC
heated......................................................69 object detection......................................139
manual.....................................................68 Forward alert warning lamp.........................56
mirror dip when reversing........................69 Front airbags................................................44
External temperature Front parking aids......................................122
warning lamp...........................................55 system fault............................................123
Extra features...............................................80 Front wipers
winter park position...............................195
F Fuel and refuelling......................................181
Flat spots...................................................224 consumption..........................................183
Fluids diesel......................................................180
brake diesel fuel sulphur content.....................180
check..................................................204 ethanol...................................................179
specification.......................................205 filler flap.................................................181
top up.................................................205 fuel filler flap..........................................181
capacities...............................................250 methanol................................................179
clutch check...........................................204 methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE).........180
coolant misfuel device........................................181
specification.......................................203 octane rating..........................................179
top up.................................................203 petrol......................................................179
engine oil running out............................................180
check..................................................201 safety precautions..................................179
filler locations.........................................201 tank capacity..........................................182
oil Fuel consumption......................................183
top up.................................................202 combined cycles....................................184
specifications.........................................248 extra-urban cycle....................................183
washer fluid............................................205 urban cycle.............................................183
check..................................................205 Fuel filler flap.............................................181
specification.......................................205 Fuel gauge....................................................48
Fuel saving
eco program...........................................141

276
 R
Index

Fuel system................................................190 adaptive....................................................60

Fuel tank beam pattern............................................60
capacity..................................................250 bulb changing................................190, 194
Fuses bulb specification...................................254
changing................................................211 condensation............................................60
engine compartment fuse box................212 courtesy delay..........................................59
locations.................................................210 daytime running lamps.............................59
luggage compartment fuse box..............216 driving abroad..........................................60
passenger compartment fuse box..........214 high beam assist......................................59
high beam assist warning lamp................56
G high beam warning lamp..........................57
Garage door opener.....................................74 levelling....................................................60
assistance................................................76 removal..................................................192
entry gate.................................................75 warning lamp (AFS).................................55
erase all programming.............................75 washers....................................................66
programming...........................................74 xenon.....................................................191
programming a rolling code device..........75 Head restraints
programming a single button...................75 front seats................................................29
Gearbox rear seats.................................................29
automatic...............................................112 Head up display...........................................51
drive selector fails to elevate..................114 Heated exterior mirrors................................69
emergency park release.........................241 Heated seats................................................85
fault........................................................114 Heated steering wheel..................................31
gear shift warning lamp............................56 Heating and ventilation...........................82–83
manual...................................................114 air vents...................................................84
General program........................................142 auto setting..............................................83
Glass cleaning............................................198 heated and cooled seats...........................85
Global closing..............................................16 heated seats.............................................85
Global opening...............................................8 manual.....................................................82
Glow plugs remote control batteries...........................87
warning lamp...........................................55 third row seats.........................................88
Gradient release control High beam assist.........................................59
ascent brake release...............................145 Hill descent control....................................144
Grass/gravel/snow.....................................142 brake release control..............................145
brake temperature..................................145
H warning lamp...........................................56
Hitch guidance cameras...............................96
Handbook symbols........................................2 Homelink......................................................74
Handbrake..................................................120 assistance................................................76
Hands free parking.....................................126 erase all programming.............................75
park assist limitations............................128 gate/door opener......................................75
park assist troubleshooting....................129 programming...........................................74
selecting park assist...............................127 programming a single button...................75
Headlamps...................................................58 programming the garage door opener.....74

277
L
Index

rolling code device programming.............75 warning messages...................................49

Intelligent emergency braking
I ACC........................................................140
Ignition Intelligent stop/start
rolling re-start........................................109 activating................................................110
switching on...........................................108 deactivating....................................110–111
InControl Intelligent stop/start warning lamp..............56
apps.......................................................167 Interior cleaning.........................................198
overview.................................................165 airbag covers..........................................199
remote....................................................165 Interior lamps..............................................62
secure....................................................166 ambient lighting.......................................63
wi-fi connection......................................166 bulb changing........................................190
Indicators warning lamp..............................56 bulb specification...................................254
Information messages...........................49, 53 intensity...................................................63
Infotainment types........................................................62
connecting a media device.....................155 Interior locking.............................................16
connecting multiple devices...................158 Interior protection
licensing.................................................159 temporary disabling.................................15
media controls.......................................150 Internet browsing
pairing and connecting a device.............158 InControl connection..............................166
playing a portable device........................158 Introduction
portable media instructional videos....................................3
connections........................................154 ISOFIX installation........................................39
controls..............................................157
radio controls.................................152–153 J
settings..................................................151 Jump starting
sound settings........................................151 connecting a starting aid........................208
touch screen connecting jump leads...........................207
care......................................................80
extra features........................................80 K
operating..............................................80 Keyless entry..................................................8
Instrument panel..................................48, 199 Keyless locking............................................15
display units.............................................51 Key transmitters.............................................9
fuel range.................................................50
head up display........................................51
lamp test..................................................53
L
menu........................................................49 Label locations...........................................246
driving features....................................49 Lamps..........................................................58
instrument display................................49 auto lamps wiper detection......................60
trip computer........................................49 bulb changing........................................190
vehicle set-up.......................................49 bulb replacement....................................194
trip computer...........................................50 bulb specification...................................254
trip distance.............................................50 condensation............................................60
warning lamps..........................................53 test...........................................................53

278
 R
Index

TPMS warning lamp.................................55

warning lamps..........................................53
M
xenon headlamps...................................191 Maintenance
Lane departure warning.............................148 after off-road driving..............................197
Lane departure warning lamp (green)..........57 arduous driving conditions.....................185
Lane departure warning lamp (red)..............54 brake fluid level......................................204
Leather cleaning.........................................198 bulb changing........................................190
Levelling bulb specification...................................254
headlamps................................................60 capacities...............................................250
License changing a fuse......................................211
navigation...............................................175 checking tyre pressure after a repair......231
Lighting cleaning
ambient lighting.......................................63 alloy wheels........................................198
interior lamps intensity.............................63 exterior...............................................197
interior lamps locations............................62 glass...................................................198
Load carriers interior................................................198
roof mounted...........................................93 leather................................................198
Load carrying rear screen.........................................198
securing a load.........................................92 seat belts............................................199
Load securing..............................................93 sensors and cameras.........................197
Loadspace cover..........................................92 under body.........................................197
Locking closing the bonnet..................................188
automatic relocking..................................14 clutch fluid level.....................................204
confirmation.............................................14 daily checks............................................185
door locks and release levers...................16 diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................186
double locking..........................................14 engine compartment fuse box................212
drive away..................................................9 engine coolant level................................203
emergency locking...................................17 engine oil level.......................................201
global closing...........................................16 fuel system.............................................190
in an emergency.......................................17 fuse box (passenger compartment).......214
keyless.....................................................15 jump starting..........................................208
mislock.....................................................17 label locations........................................246
single.......................................................14 lubricants and fluid specifications..........248
transmitter effects on medical devices.......9 luggage compartment fuse box..............216
with the emergency key............................17 oil top up................................................202
Locking wheel nuts....................................237 paintwork repair.....................................200
Low fuel warning lamp.................................55 running-in..............................................185
Low oil pressure warning lamp....................53 smart key battery.....................................13
Lubricants specifications...........................248 tyre repair kit..........................................229
Luggage tyre repair procedure..............................230
loadspace area.........................................92 using a starting aid.................................208
Luggage compartment washer fluid level...................................205
anchor points...........................................93 weekly checks........................................185
loadspace cover.......................................92 Manual seats................................................19

279
L
Index

Map screen seat belt reminder warning.......................35

navigation system..................................172 seat belt safety.........................................34
Media controls...........................................150 seat belts warning lamp...........................54
Message centre display units.......................51 using seat belts........................................32
Methanol....................................................179 Octane rating..............................................179
Minor paintwork repairs.............................200 petrol......................................................179
Mirrors Off-road driving
automatic heaters.....................................69 cleaning after..........................................197
blind spot monitor dynamic program...................................142
closing vehicle sensing.........................72 general program.....................................142
sensors.................................................73 grass/gravel/snow..................................142
dip when reversing...................................69 mud/ruts................................................142
exterior mirrors........................................68 override options.....................................143
Misfuel device............................................181 recovery.................................................243
Mpg...........................................................183 sand program.........................................142
Mud/ruts....................................................142 system difficulties..................................143
Oil
N engine oil specification...........................202
Navigation filler locations.........................................201
emergency contacts...............................174 poisonous fluids.....................................188
license....................................................175 specification...........................................248
map screen............................................172 top up.....................................................202
menu......................................................171 used engine oil.......................................188
operating................................................170 Opening the bonnet....................................188
overview.................................................169 Oversteer...................................................115
points of interest (POI)...........................174 Overview
SD card..................................................169 InControl mobile technology..................165
set a selected destination.......................174 Owner maintenance...................................185
settings..................................................172
guidance.............................................173 P
soft key icons.........................................175 Paintwork
terms and conditions.............................175 repair......................................................200
voice commands....................................160 Pairing a phone or device...........................161
where to?...............................................173 Panoramic roof blind...................................77
Park assist.................................................127
O cleaning sensors and cameras...............197
Occupant safety hands free parking.................................126
child seat tether straps.............................40 limitations of use....................................128
cleaning seat belts..................................199 selecting.................................................127
recommended child seats........................39 troubleshooting......................................129
seat belt care points.................................34 Park assist options.....................................127
seat belt checks........................................34 Parking aids
seat belt pre-tensioners............................33 cleaning sensors and cameras...............197
operating................................................122

280
 R
Index

rear camera....................................123, 125

reverse traffic detection..........................125
Q
system fault............................................123 QR codes for smart phones
Parking brake.............................................120 instructional videos....................................3
warning lamp...........................................53 Queue assist (ACC)....................................136
Park position emergency release...............241
Parts..........................................................187 R
Passenger compartment fuse box..............214 Radio frequency regulations......................257
Passive entry..................................................8 Rain sensor..................................................65
Pedestrian protection system Rear camera
after deployment....................................244 hitch guidance..........................................96
repacking the airbag...............................244 parking aids............................................123
Perimeter alarm...........................................14 reverse traffic detection..........................125
Petrol sensors...............................................125
fuel types................................................179 Rear climate control.....................................88
Petrol consumption....................................183 Rear fog lamps warning lamp......................55
Petrol filler flap...........................................181 Rear screen cleaning..................................198
Phone Rear seat
call volume.............................................164 access position........................................26
deleting the connected phone or device..162 Rear seats
overview.................................................163 folding......................................................23
safety.....................................................164 third row folding and raising....................27
steering wheel controls..........................164 Rear window blind.......................................77
Phone compatibility...................................161 Recording
Playing a portable device...........................158 event data...............................................245
Points of interest (POI)..............................174 service data............................................245
Portable media Recovery
Bluetooth wireless technology...............161 off-road..................................................243
connections............................................154 towing points.........................................240
controls..................................................157 transmission park release......................241
Portable media pairing...............................161 transporting...........................................240
Powered tailgate..........................................11 Refuelling
opening height.........................................12 diesel......................................................180
resetting the memory...............................12 diesel fuel sulphur content.....................180
Powered tow bar..........................................99 ethanol...................................................179
Power sockets..............................................91 fuel filler flap..........................................181
Pressure checking (tyres) methanol................................................179
checking after a repair............................231 MTBE.....................................................180
Pressures octane rating..........................................179
tyres.......................................................221 petrol......................................................179
Puncture repair kit.....................................229 running out of fuel..................................180
instructions for use................................229 safety precautions..................................179
repair procedure.....................................230 Reminder (seat belt)....................................35
safety.....................................................229

281
L
Index

Remote control tyre pressures........................................221

care..........................................................13 used engine oil.......................................188
driving position memory..........................21 using seat belts........................................32
single locking...........................................14 using the telephone................................164
smart key battery.....................................13 Safety in the garage
system transmitters...............................255 battery precautions................................187
Removing the spare wheel.........................234 electrical components............................187
Removing the vehicle battery.....................208 engine fans.............................................187
Repacking the pedestrian airbag................244 exhaust gases........................................187
Repairing paintwork damage.....................200 hot components.....................................187
Replacement tyres.....................................224 jacking....................................................187
Resetting the windows...............................196 Sand program............................................142
Restarting the engine while moving...........109 Satellite navigation
Restricted front seat travel...........................21 emergency contacts...............................174
Resume speed and follow mode (ACC)......137 map screen............................................172
Reverse parking aids..................................122 menu......................................................171
rear camera............................................125 operating................................................170
reverse traffic detection..........................125 overview.................................................169
system fault............................................123 points of interest (POI)...........................174
Road sign recognition................................147 SD card..................................................169
Rolling re-start...........................................109 set a selected destination.......................174
Rolling roads..............................................187 settings..................................................172
Roof blind....................................................77 guidance.............................................173
operation..................................................77 soft key icons.........................................175
Roof racks....................................................93 voice commands....................................160
maximum weight......................................93 where to?...............................................173
Rotary gear selector...................................113 Screen wash
Running-in.................................................185 check......................................................205
Running out of fuel....................................180 specification...........................................248
topping up..............................................205
S SD card
Safety navigation system..................................169
child safety locks......................................36 Seat belts.............................................32, 199
cleaning seat belts..................................199 adjusting..................................................32
fuel and refuelling...................................179 care points...............................................34
seat belt care points.................................34 checks......................................................34
seat belt checks........................................34 pre-tensioners..........................................33
seat belt pre-tensioners............................33 reminder warning.....................................35
seat belt reminder warning.......................35 safety.......................................................34
seat belts..................................................34 warning lamp...........................................54
seat belts warning lamp...........................54 Seats
seats for larger children...........................39 child restraint check list...........................39
sitting correctly........................................21 child seat positioning...............................37
tyre care.................................................221 child seats................................................36

282
 R
Index

child seat tether straps.............................40 display units.............................................51

cleaning seat belts..................................199 Setting the touch screen..............................80
climate.....................................................85 Side airbags.................................................45
electric front.............................................20 Side lamps warning lamp.............................56
front head restraints.................................29 Sign recognition.........................................147
heated......................................................85 Silencing the alarm......................................17
ISOFIX installation....................................39 Sitting correctly............................................21
manual front.............................................19 Smart key
position memory......................................21 battery changing......................................13
raising the rear seat............................23–24 care..........................................................13
rear head restraints..................................29 driving position memory..........................21
rear seat folding...........................23–24, 27 single locking...........................................14
recommended child seats........................39 transmitters............................................255
restricted front seat travel........................21 Smartphone
seat belts warning lamp...........................54 InControl app.................................165, 167
sitting correctly........................................21 InControl remote link.............................165
Securing luggage...................................92–93 Smart phone video
Security........................................................15 QR codes....................................................3
alarm......................................................186 Snow chains..............................................226
tilt sensor.............................................16 Soft keys
automatic relocking and arming...............14 navigation system..................................175
battery backed sounder............................16 SOS emergency call
closing mislock........................................17 InControl remote link.............................165
deactivating the alarm..............................17 Sound settings...........................................151
lock confirmation.....................................14 Spare wheel...............................................234
locking with the emergency key...............17 using wheel chocks................................237
perimeter alarm........................................14 Specifications
single locking...........................................14 capacities...............................................250
Selecting valet mode....................................81 dimensions.............................................253
Sensors engine....................................................247
blockage...................................................73 ethanol...................................................179
Servicing fluids......................................................248
airbags.....................................................46 fuel tank capacity...................................182
data recording........................................245 label locations........................................246
Servicing requirements lubricants...............................................248
interval indicator....................................185 methanol................................................179
Set speed limit...........................................132 MTBE.....................................................180
Setting a destination weight....................................................250
navigation system..................................174 wheel alignment.....................................252
Settings Speed-dependent wipers..............................66
guidance Speed limiting............................................132
navigation system..............................173 Speedometer................................................48
navigation system..................................172 SRS..............................................................42
Settings menu..............................................49 airbag warning lamp.................................55

283
L
Index

Stability control Suspension

DSC........................................................115 adaptive dynamics..................................117
switching on.......................................115 Switching off the engine............................108
switching off..........................................115 Switching on the ignition...........................108
Starting after a collision.............................244
Starting the engine.....................................108 T
keyless start backup...............................109 Tachometer..................................................48
Steering column Tailgate
lock............................................................9 opening and closing...........................10–11
vehicle recovery.........................................9 powered opening height...........................12
Steering column lock...................................31 resetting the powered tailgate memory.....12
Steering wheel Technical specifications
adjusting..................................................31 brake fluid..............................................248
heated......................................................31 capacities...............................................250
Steering wheel controls dimensions.............................................253
speed limiter..........................................132 engine....................................................247
telephone...............................................164 engine coolant........................................248
Stolen vehicle engine oil................................................248
InControl secure.....................................166 radio frequency regulations....................257
Stop/start washer fluid............................................248
activating................................................110 weights...................................................250
deactivating....................................110–111 wheel alignment.....................................252
Storage compartments................................89 Telephone..................................................163
cup holders..............................................89 Bluetooth wireless technology...............161
front cubby box........................................89 call volume.............................................164
rear armrest.............................................89 deleting the connected phone or device..162
Storage compartments areas overview.................................................163
glove box..................................................89 safety.....................................................164
Sun blind......................................................77 steering wheel controls..........................164
Sunroof Telephone compatibility.............................161
anti-trap protection..................................77 Telephone connecting................................161
Sun roof Telephone pairing......................................161
roof blind..................................................77 Terms and conditions
Supplementary restraint system (SRS) navigation...............................................175
airbag deployment....................................45 Terrain response........................................141
airbag locations........................................42 Tilt sensor....................................................16
airbags maintenance..............................186 Timed climate
airbag warning lamp...........................45, 55 remote control batteries...........................87
curtain airbags.........................................45 Tool kit.......................................................233
disabling passenger airbag.......................43 Touch screen.............................................199
front airbags.............................................44 4x4i menu..............................................146
side airbags..............................................45 button feedback........................................80
Surround cameras.....................................130 clock.........................................................80
touch screen menu.................................130 eco-data.................................................141

284
 R
Index

extra features...........................................80 Tracking your vehicle

fuel economy facts.................................141 InControl secure.....................................166
general settings........................................80 Traction control..........................................116
heated and cooled seats...........................85 switching off..........................................115
heated seats.............................................85 switching on...........................................115
language selection....................................80 Traffic sign recognition..............................147
operating..................................................80 Trailer
shortcuts..................................................80 electrical connections.............................101
surround cameras..................................130 sway.........................................................96
system settings........................................80 towing weights.........................................95
touch screen care.....................................80 Trailer direction indicators warning lamp.....56
valet mode................................................81 Trailer tow assist..........................................96
volume presets.........................................80 Transmission
Tow ball automatic...............................................112
options.....................................................95 drive selector fails to elevate..................114
powered tow bar......................................99 emergency park release.........................241
Tow bar fault........................................................114
detachable..........................................98–99 gear shift warning lamp............................56
mounting points.....................................104 manual...................................................114
Tow bar accessories..................................102 Transmission park release.........................241
Towing Transmitters
a trailer...................................................102 smart key...............................................255
calculating weight..................................101 Transporting the vehicle.............................240
checks Trip computer..............................................50
breakaway cable.................................101 average speed..........................................50
lights..................................................101 fuel consumption.....................................50
nose weight limit................................101 fuel range.................................................50
tow ball...............................................101 reset.........................................................50
detachable tow bar.............................98–99 trip distance.............................................50
essential checks.....................................101 Tyre pressure checking after a repair.........231
hitch guidance..........................................96 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..227
powered tow bar......................................99 full size replacements.............................228
stability assist..........................................96 tyre care.................................................221
tow assist.................................................96 valves.....................................................224
tow ball options........................................95 warning lamp...........................................55
tow bar accessories...............................102 Tyre repair kit
tow bar dimensions................................104 checking pressures................................231
tow bar mounting points........................104 repair procedure.....................................230
trailer electrical connections...................101 safety information..................................229
trailer hitch.............................................100 using......................................................229
trailer reversing aid..................................96 Tyres
trailer sway...............................................96 age degradation......................................225
weights.....................................................95 changing................................................228
Towing points............................................240 flat spots................................................224

285
L
Index

full size replacements.............................228 Using the spare tyre

important information............................236 important information............................236
Indian regulations..................................226 Using the touch screen................................79
pressures...............................................221 Using wheel chocks...................................237
repair kit.................................................229
repair kit use..........................................229 V
repair procedure.....................................230 Valet mode...................................................81
replacements..........................................224 deselecting...............................................81
snow chains...........................................226 Vehicle alarm.............................................186
speed ratings..........................................221 Vehicle battery
temporary use spare..............................228 battery monitoring system.....................209
TPMS.....................................................227 connecting jump leads...........................207
warning lamp........................................55 effects of disconnection.........................209
tyre care.................................................221 removing................................................208
tyre repair safety....................................229 replacing................................................208
tyre wall markings..................................220 warning symbols....................................206
use of spare tyre....................................236 Vehicle battery care....................................206
valves.....................................................224 Vehicle cleaning
wall markings.........................................220 after driving off-road..............................197
winter.....................................................225 airbag covers..........................................199
alloy wheels............................................198
U interior...................................................198
Under body cleaning..................................197 rear screen.............................................198
Under bonnet covers..................................189 under body.............................................197
Understeer.................................................115 washer jets.............................................200
Unlocking.....................................................16 Vehicle data recording...............................245
all doors.....................................................6 Vehicle location
driver's door...............................................6 InControl secure.....................................166
entry and exit mode..................................22 Vehicle recovery
global opening........................................6, 8 off-road..................................................243
keyless entry..............................................8 steering column lock..................................9
mode..........................................................6 towing points.........................................240
multi point entry.....................................6, 8 transmission park release......................241
opening the tailgate............................10–11 transporting the vehicle..........................240
passive entry..............................................8 Vehicle testing on rolling roads..................187
single point entry...................................6, 8 VIN number................................................246
steering column.......................................31 Voice control..............................................160
transmitter effects on medical devices.......9 navigation POI categories.......................160
USB devices Volume
connecting multiple devices...................158 telephone...............................................164
Used engine oil..........................................188
Using adaptive cruise control.....................134
Using cruise control...................................133
Using the parking aids...............................122

286
 R
Index

fluid specification...................................205
W fluid top up.............................................205
Wade sensing headlamps................................................66
controls..................................................146 Web browsing
Wading depth InControl connection..............................166
touch screen aid.....................................146 Weights
Warning lamps.......................................53, 56 gross vehicle weights.............................250
ABS..........................................................55 roof load.................................................250
ACC follow mode......................................55 roof rack weight.....................................250
adaptive front lighting system (AFS)........55 tow ball/hitch............................................95
airbags...............................................45, 55 towing......................................................95
automatic speed limiter............................55 vehicle weights.......................................250
battery charge..........................................54 Wheel changing
brake..................................................53–54 important information............................236
critical warning message..........................53 locking wheel nuts.................................237
cruise control...........................................56 recommended process...........................237
diesel glow plugs.....................................55 safety warnings......................................233
DSC active................................................54 spare wheel............................................234
engine/transmission.................................54 temporary spare wheel...........................237
external temperature................................55 tilt sensor...............................................237
forward alert.............................................56 tool kit....................................................233
gear shift warning lamp............................56 use of spare tyre....................................236
HDC..........................................................56 Wheel chocks use......................................237
headlamp high beam................................57 Wheels and tyres
high beam assist......................................56 age degradation......................................225
indicators.................................................56 changing a tyre.......................................228
intelligent stop/start (green).....................56 checking the pressures after a repair.....231
lamp test..................................................53 flat spots................................................224
lane departure (green)..............................57 full size replacements.............................228
lane departure (red).................................54 Indian regulations..................................226
low fuel....................................................55 pressures...............................................221
low oil pressure........................................53 puncture repair.......................................229
parking brake...........................................53 puncture repair safety............................229
rear fog lamps..........................................55 repair kit.................................................229
seat belt....................................................54 repair kit use..........................................229
side lights.................................................56 repair procedure.....................................230
trailer direction indicators........................56 replacements..........................................224
tyre pressure monitoring system snow chains...........................................226
(TPMS).....................................................55 temporary use spare..............................228
Warning messages......................................49 TPMS.....................................................227
Washer jets................................................200 TPMS warning lamp.................................55
Washer reservoir tyre care.................................................221
capacity..................................................250 tyre speed ratings...................................221
Washers.......................................................64 tyre wall markings..................................220

287
L
Index

valves.....................................................224
wheel alignment.....................................252
winter tyres............................................225
Wheel spin.................................................115
Where to
navigation system..................................173
Wi-Fi
InControl connection..............................166
Windows
anti-trap protection..................................77
operation..................................................77
reset.......................................................196
roof blind..................................................77
Winter park position...................................195
Winter tyres...............................................225
Wipers.........................................................64
Wipers and washers.....................................64
drip wipe..................................................66
fluid level................................................205
rain sensor...............................................65
speed-dependent mode............................66
winter park position.................................66
Wireless technology
Bluetooth................................................161

X
Xenon headlamps......................................191

288
 R

289
L
Controls overview

DRIVER CONTROLS 28. Terrain Response (141).

For further information on the numbered item, 29. ECO Program (141).
refer to the page number. 30. Intelligent stop/start (110).
1. InControl remote - Breakdown call (165). 31. Media on/off and volume (150).
2. Roof blind (77). 32. Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control
3. InControl remote - SOS emergency call (ACC) (133/134).
(165) 33. Horn.
4. Front map reading lamps (62). 34. Audio controls, Voice control, and
5. Front interior lamp (62). Telephone (151/160/164).
6. Exterior lamps and Trip computer (58/50). 35. Headlamp levelling (60).
7. Downshift gear paddle. (112). 36. Interior illumination control (63).
8. Instrument panel and Message centre (48). 37. Bonnet release (188).
9. Heated steering wheel (31). 38. Lane departure warning (148).
10. Upshift gear paddle (112). 39. Tailgate release/open (10).
11. Wiper/washers controls (64). 40. Central locking/unlocking (16).
12. Engine START/STOP (108). 41. Driving position memory (21).
13. Touch screen home menu (79). 42. Rear window isolation and child door locks
(77).
14. Touch screen General settings or Park
assist (80/126). 43. Window controls (77).
15. Mute or Parking aids off (122). 44. Mirror adjustment/power-folding mirrors
(68).
16. Touch screen on/off or Surround cameras
(130).
17. Media source (150).
18. Media system (150).
19. Telephone (163).
20. Navigation (169).
21. Touch screen (79).
22. Hazard warning lamps.
23. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning
controls (82/83).
24. Rotary gear selector (112), for Manual
transmission (114).
25. Electric Parking Brake (EPB) (120).
26. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) (115).
27. Hill Descent Control (HDC) (144).

290
R